JP2024092041A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can appropriately improve the enjoyment of games.
[Solution] When the performance of the variable element of "Super Reach" is missed, a "miss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the execution symbol displayed in the redisplayed cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode changed from the display mode before it was erased by the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach".
[Selection] Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of patterns etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a specified number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing this suggestive display, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by lottery, and the suggestive display is made to appear based on the result of the lottery, thereby informing the player of the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-340046 A

However, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can diversify the presentation and effectively increase the entertainment value of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises an acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is met, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a dynamic display execution means for causing a display means to execute a dynamic display of identification information based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and is a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements, and the dynamic display is a gaming machine that judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that appears the predetermined identification information among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. The device includes a judgment means, a second display means capable of displaying information related to the judgment result by the judgment means, a change means for changing the state of the display element of the second display means from a predetermined first state to a second state indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, a start time selection means for selecting a start time for changing the state of the display element of the second display means to the second state by the change means, a situation judgment means for judging, during execution of the dynamic element, that it is a situation in which the state of the display element of the second display means is to be changed to the second state, and an element execution means for executing the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second state at the start time selected by the start time selection means in a situation in which the state of the display element of the second display means during execution of the dynamic element is not displayed in the second state.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is met, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a dynamic display execution means for causing a display means to execute a dynamic display of identification information based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the gaming machine awards a predetermined gaming value to a player, the dynamic display being composed of a combination of a plurality of dynamic elements, the dynamic display being composed of a combination of a predetermined number of dynamic elements, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and a judgment means for judging whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means includes a dynamic display that appears the predetermined identification information. The game device includes a second display means capable of displaying information related to the result of the judgment by the judgment means, a change means for changing the state of the display element of the second display means from a predetermined first state to a second state indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means, a start time selection means for selecting a start time for changing the state of the display element of the second display means to the second state by the change means, a situation determination means for determining that the state of the display element of the second display means is changed to the second state during the execution of the dynamic element, and an element execution means for executing the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second state at the start time selected by the start time selection means in a situation in which the state of the display element of the second display means during the execution of the dynamic element is not displayed in the second state. This has the effect of diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before (just before) the ``reach display (a variable element of ``normal reach'')'' appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device, (b) is a diagram showing the state from (a) where the occurrence of the variable element of ``normal reach'' is confirmed, the secondary display area is erased, and the variable element of ``normal reach'' is being executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state from (b) where the variable element of ``super reach'' occurs, the cockpit display area is erased, and the variable element of ``super reach'' is being executed in the main display area, and (d) is a diagram showing the state from (c) where the secondary display area and cockpit display area are re-displayed, and the ``miss display'' of the third pattern appears in the main display area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters, reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a big win type table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a big win type table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation number table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of Table A of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of Table B of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a C table of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a D table of the stop pattern table. A diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot. A diagram showing a schematic example of a variation pattern table for misses. A diagram showing an example of the presentation time for each variable element of a variable presentation. 2 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation change table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot scenario table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a miss scenario table. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a hold information storage area and an execution information storage area; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing an execution pattern change process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device, (b) is a diagram showing the state where the secondary display area has been erased from the state of (a) and the variable element of the "normal reach" has been executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state where the cockpit display area has been erased from the state of (b) and the variable element of the "super reach" has been executed in the main display area, (d) is a diagram showing the state where a performance is executed from the state of (c) that suggests the appearance of a "miss display" in the variable element of the "super reach", (e) is a diagram showing the state where the secondary display area and the cockpit display area have been redisplayed from the state of (d) and the "miss display" has appeared in the main display area, and (f) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (e) just before the variable element of the "re-variation" is executed and the "jackpot display" appears. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a hold information storage area and an execution information storage area in the second embodiment; FIG. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of ``pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation'' and the fluctuation pattern of ``normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation'', and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of ``pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation'' and the fluctuation pattern of ``normal reach + special reach + re-fluctuation''. A flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an execution pattern change process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the ``reach display'' appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the third embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (a) where the secondary display area has been erased and the variable elements of the ``normal reach'' are being executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (b) where the variable elements of the ``super reach'' are being executed in the main display area, and (d) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (c) where the secondary display area has been redisplayed and the ``miss display'' has appeared in the main display area. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the drive pattern of the left-side movable part and the right-side movable part in the third embodiment using a "weak pattern", and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the drive pattern of the left-side movable part and the right-side movable part in the "strong pattern". A block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a scenario table for a jackpot in the third embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a scenario table for a loss in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a bonus item lottery table in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance time for each variable element of the variable performance in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the operating time of the ``weak pattern'' and ``strong pattern'' of each movable part. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the "weak pattern" of each movable part in the "normal reach" presentation mode in the third embodiment, (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable part in the "super reach" presentation mode, and (c) is a time chart showing the relationship between the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable part in the "special reach" presentation mode. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a hold information storage area and an execution information storage area in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an execution pattern change process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the character drive processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the third embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state where the secondary display area has been erased from the state of (a) and the variable elements of the "normal reach" are being executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state where the variable elements of the "super reach" are being executed in the main display area from the state of (b), (d) is a diagram showing the state where each movable part has been driven in a "strong pattern" from the state of (c), (e) is a diagram showing the state where each movable part has returned to its original position from the state of (d), and (f) is a diagram showing the state just before the "jackpot display" appears from the state of (e). (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the ``reach display'' appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (a) where the secondary display area has been erased and the variable elements of the ``normal reach'' are being executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (b) where the variable elements of the ``super reach'' are being executed in the main display area, and (d) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (c) where the secondary display area has been redisplayed and the ``miss display'' has appeared in the main display area. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a state in which a small cut-in display appears on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a state in which a large cut-in display appears on the third pattern display device. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the ``reach display'' appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state where the sub-display area has been erased from the state of (a) and the variable elements of the ``normal reach'' are being executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state where the variable elements of the ``super reach'' are being executed in the main display area from the state of (b), (d) is a diagram showing the state where the big cut-in display has appeared from the state of (c), (e) is a diagram showing the state where the big cut-in display has been erased from the state of (d), and (f) is a diagram showing the state just before the ``jackpot display'' appears from the state of (e). A diagram showing a schematic example of a scenario table for a jackpot in the fifth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a scenario table for a loss in the fifth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of a suspension information storage area and an execution information storage area in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state from (a) where the secondary display area has been erased and the variable element of the "normal reach" has been executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state from (b) where the variable element of the "super reach" has been executed in the main display area, (d) is a diagram showing the state from (c) where a presentation suggesting that a "miss display" will appear in the variable element of the "super reach" is being executed, (e) is a diagram showing the state from (d) where the secondary display area has been redisplayed and the "miss display" has appeared in the main display area, and (f) is a diagram showing the state just before the "jackpot display" appears in the variable presentation that was on hold from (e). A block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing an example of a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern" of reach patterns in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a diagram showing an example of a reach pattern table. (a) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of the variable factors of a "normal reach" in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of the variable factors of a "normal reach", (c) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of the variable factors of a "super reach", (d) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of the variable factors of a "super reach", (e) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of the variable factors of a "special reach", and (f) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of the variable factors of a "special reach". 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the variation pattern determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a variable change process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the state where the secondary display area has been erased from the state of (a) and the variable element of the "normal reach" has been executed in the main display area, (c) is a diagram showing the state where the cockpit display area has been erased from the state of (b) and the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "super reach" has been executed in the main display area, (d) is a diagram showing the state where a performance suggesting the appearance of a "miss display" in the variable element of the "super reach" is executed from the state of (c), (e) is a diagram showing the state where the secondary display area and the cockpit display area have been redisplayed from the state of (d) and the "miss display" has appeared in the main display area, and (f) is a diagram showing the state where the variable element of the "re-variation" has been executed from the state of (e) and the "jackpot display" is about to appear.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 33. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, 65a, etc. is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 6). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described below. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the performance content in the preview display executed in the variable display of the third pattern (hereinafter, the variable display of the third pattern is referred to as the "variable performance").

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and as described below, is executed when a ball shot into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (the first ball entry hole 64 described below; see FIG. 2) (hereinafter, the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 may be referred to as the "initial winning"), and after the pattern (the third pattern described below) is changed for a predetermined period of time, the result of the lottery for the initial winning (whether it is a jackpot or not) is presented to the player based on the combination of patterns that are stopped and displayed.

A stage is a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "town stage," "sky stage," and "island stage." The above-mentioned variable presentations and various presentations such as the "reach display" that is executed during the variable presentations are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The "reach display" refers to the display just before the "jackpot display" that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot in the variable presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81. Specifically, it refers to the state in which the third patterns in the left pattern row Z1 and the right pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stop at the same pattern, and the center pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 4) has not yet stopped and continues to vary.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "reach displays" are roughly divided into a single element that executes a "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, a single element that executes an effect is referred to as a "variable element"), a "super reach" variable element that is executed by developing from the "normal reach" variable element and has a higher chance of winning than the "normal reach" variable element, and a "special reach" variable element that is executed by developing from the "normal reach" variable element and has a higher chance of winning than the "super reach" variable element. Details of each "reach display" and "variable element" will be described later.

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no change performance is taking place, or during a "high-speed change" change element in which the third symbol changes so quickly that it is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage changes repeatedly in the following order: "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the variable element of "Normal Reach" is started in the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81, if the variable element of "Normal Reach" develops into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach", a selection screen for the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the variable element of "Normal Reach".

Specifically, the selection screen displays multiple candidates that can be selected as the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach", and is configured so that if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected candidate is changed. Then, based on the candidate that was selected when the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" develop, the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are determined, and the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are executed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, it may be configured as an operation lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or changed, or a variable element of the "Super Reach" or a variable element of the "Special Reach" may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light emission mode by turning on or blinking in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified "reach display" is activated, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination sections 29-33 incorporating light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereafter abbreviated as "LEDs").

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or a "reach display" is activated, the built-in LEDs of the illumination units 29-33 light up or flash to indicate that a jackpot is being hit or that a "reach display" is being displayed, which is one step away from a jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the top left of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there is built a touch sensor 51a for allowing the operation of the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 6), a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, and the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning opening 63, a first ball opening 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a wooden base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

At the upper right side of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 2), a first pattern display device 37 is provided, which is equipped with multiple LEDs 37a as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b. The first pattern display device 37 displays the variation of the first pattern in response to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 6), which will be described later (hereinafter, the variation of the first pattern will be referred to as "dynamic display"), and mainly displays the play status of the pachinko machine 10.

The LEDs 37a perform dynamic display by indicating whether or not a change is being made in response to a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning) by changing their lighting state, and by changing their lighting state, they indicate a pattern corresponding to the result of a lottery made for the initial winning as a stopping pattern after the change is completed, depending on the result of the lottery made for the initial winning, and by changing state, they indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 but have not yet been changed (reserved balls). The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED has a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is judged to be a jackpot or not (jackpot lottery), and if it is judged to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also judged. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include "15R special jackpot," "2R special jackpot," and "15R normal jackpot."

The LED 37a not only indicates whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation that occurs when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 ends, but also displays a pattern according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot is found.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a "probability fluctuating state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "2R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a "probability fluctuating state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2. A "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a "time-shortened state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and remains in the "time-shortened state" for a specified number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

The "probability-changing state" refers to a high-probability state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, i.e., during a "probability-changing" state; in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. The high-probability state (probability-changing state, probability-changing state) in the first embodiment includes a gaming state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol described below increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability changing state" or a "time shortening state", and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the "probability changing state". Also, the "time shortening state (so-called time shortening state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is low, just like in the "normal game state", and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, making it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the second symbol, the time for which the electric device associated with the first ball entrance 64 opens or the number of times the electric device opens per win may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "time-shortened state", the time for which the electric device associated with the first ball entrance 64 opens may be made longer than in any other state than the "time-shortened state", or the number of times the electric device opens per win may be made more than in any other state than the "time-shortened state". Also, in the "time-shortened state", at least two of the following may be performed simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning the second symbol, lengthening the time for which the electric device opens, and increasing the number of times the electric device opens.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the play area. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable performance of a third pattern while synchronizing with the dynamic display in the first pattern display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and a second pattern display device 83 consisting of an LED that displays a variable second pattern (hereinafter, the variable display of the second pattern is referred to as "variable display"), triggered by the passage of a ball through the second ball entrance 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 6) described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4), left, center, and right, are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is made up of multiple symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

Now, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained with reference to Figures 4 and 5. Figure 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, Figure 4(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the area division settings and the effective line settings of the display screen, and Figure 4(b) is a diagram that shows an example of the actual display screen. Also, Figures 5(a) to 5(d) are diagrams that show a schematic diagram of the transition of the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 when the "reach display" described later appears in the main display area Dm.

The third design is made up of 10 main designs numbered "0" to "9". Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" to "9" added above it, and the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned, and the jackpot occurs after the variation effect is completed. If the jackpot ends and the game transitions to a "probability variation state (probability change state)" and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots are awarded, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are aligned. Similarly, if the jackpot ends and the game transitions to a "probability variation state" and a maximum of two rounds of jackpots are awarded, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols with a specific symbol number combination (e.g., "341") (corresponding to so-called "sudden probability symbols") are aligned. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends and the game transitions to a "time-saving state (time-saving state)", a variation effect is performed in which main symbols with even numbers (corresponding to "low probability symbols") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two, top and bottom, with the bottom 2/3 being the main display area Dm for displaying the variable third pattern, and the remaining top 1/3 being the sub-display area Ds for displaying preview effects, characters, etc. Also, in the center of the bottom base of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, there is a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right. The left pattern row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the center pattern row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the right pattern row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The third patterns described above are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the variable performance is performed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern column Z1, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the center pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, at the top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each variable performance, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → middle symbol column Z2. If the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols; "jackpot display"), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is horizontally elongated and positioned above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three equal small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas that display characters and preview performance images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will result from the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is an area that displays a reserved ball count, which is the number of balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and for which a variable performance has not yet been performed (reserved balls), and an execution pattern related to the variable performance currently being performed.

As shown in FIG. 4(b) on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the left small area Ds1 displays a video in which a preview symbol appears, suggesting to the player that the variable presentation taking place in the main display area Dm is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot.

In the sub-display area Ds, in the small central area Ds2, a specific character (in the first embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a specific action, and based on the change effect being performed in the main display area Dm, a special action different from the specific action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of his headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears, and a preview effect is performed.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a level meter (not shown) appears in the right small area Ds3, indicating in stages whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable performance being performed in the main display area Dm. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected probability of a "reach display" occurring or the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the variable performance being performed based on the appearance of a preview pattern or the like in the variable performance, and is configured to indicate that a jackpot will be confirmed when the level meter reaches its display limit (MAX display). Thus, the sub-display area Ds has the function of indicating the occurrence of a "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while a variable performance (dynamic display) is being performed on the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37), the number of times the ball has entered (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37, and when the cockpit display area Db is displayed, it is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db. In the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved pattern (in the normal display mode, a "○" pattern (white circle pattern)) is displayed per reserved ball (one reserved ball number), and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed in each reserved pattern display area Db1 to Db4.

In other words, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, if two reserved patterns are displayed in the first and second reserved pattern display areas Db1 and Db2, one each, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is two, if three reserved patterns are displayed in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db3, one each, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is three, and if four reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4, one each, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Also, if no reserved pattern is displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero and there are no reserved variable effects.

The cockpit display area Db also has an execution pattern display area Db0 where an execution pattern is displayed, indicating that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm. This execution pattern display area Db0 is provided to the left of the first reserved pattern display area Db1, and is configured to be larger than each of the reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 is shifted (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in this execution pattern display area Db0.

When the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 is shifted to the execution pattern display area Db0 and displayed as the execution pattern, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 is moved and enlarged, and is displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0. Specifically, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is configured to be displayed larger (e.g., twice the radius) than the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1.

When shifting the reserved pattern from the first reserved pattern display area Db1 to the execution pattern display area Db0, in addition to the mode of enlarging and moving the display, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 may be temporarily made invisible and then redisplayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0, or the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 may be morphed and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0.

The execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is erased when the variable performance ends, and the displayed reserved pattern is moved and displayed as the reserved pattern on the lower side (left side) with the erasure of the execution pattern. Specifically, when the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance, if the reserved pattern was displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0. Also, if the reserved pattern was displayed in the second reserved pattern display area Db2, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the first reserved pattern display area Db1. Furthermore, if the reserved pattern was displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the second reserved pattern display area Db2. Also, if the reserved pattern was displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display area Db3.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution pattern continues to be displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 while a variable performance is being executed in the main display area Dm (except during the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach"). On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, or when the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" are being executed, the execution pattern is erased. In other words, when the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, it indicates that a variable performance is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and when the execution pattern is not displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, it indicates that a variable performance is not being executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or that a variable element of "Super Reach" or a variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed.

The cockpit display area Db is also configured to be able to execute a "reserved change notice" using the reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "reserved change notice" is a notice that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable performance executed in the main display area Dm by changing the display color of the reserved symbols and execution symbols in multiple stages from before the variable performance is executed until the performance is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display color of the reserved and executed symbols can be changed from the normal display mode of white to a blue display mode of "blue," a red display mode of "red," or a rainbow display mode of "rainbow" as a "reserved change notice." In this pachinko machine 10, when a "jackpot display" or a "reach display" occurs in the variable presentation, the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved and executed symbols is configured to be different, so that the display color of the reserved and executed symbols changes from the normal display mode (white) to another display mode (for example, "blue"), and the possibility of a "reach display" or a "jackpot display" occurring in the variable presentation indicated by the reserved and executed symbols can be suggested to the player for each display color.

Specifically, in the "reserve change notice," the probability of the reserved and executed symbols showing a "reach" or "jackpot" display is set higher when the reserved and executed symbols are displayed in a "blue" mode rather than a normal display mode (white). Also, the probability of the reserved and executed symbols showing a "reach" or "jackpot" display is set higher when the reserved and executed symbols are displayed in a "red" mode rather than a "blue" mode. Furthermore, the probability of the reserved and executed symbols showing a "reach" or "jackpot" display is set higher when the reserved and executed symbols are displayed in a "rainbow" mode rather than a "red" mode. The setting percentages for the "reserve change notice" will be described later.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is "red", the display mode mainly consisting of "Super Reach" (hereinafter, the main display mode is referred to as "display mode"), "Special Reach" display mode or "Special Change" display mode (hereinafter, "Super Reach" display mode, "Special Reach" display mode or "Special Change" display mode may be collectively referred to as "Super Reach or higher") is set to be executed in the change display indicated by the reserved pattern or execution pattern of "rainbow". Furthermore, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is "rainbow", the appearance of "jackpot display" is set to be confirmed in the change display indicated by the reserved pattern or execution pattern of "rainbow". Therefore, in the first embodiment, the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is set so that the expectation of the appearance of "reach display" or "jackpot display" increases stepwise in the order of normal (white) → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow".

The "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" is set so that it does not appear with reserved symbols, but can only appear with executed symbols. This is because if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (e.g., a power outage) after the reserved symbol is displayed as a "rainbow" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot, the player will become dissatisfied because they did not get the jackpot that they should have. Therefore, by configuring the reserved symbol so that it does not display the "rainbow" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot in advance, it is possible to prevent the above dissatisfaction from occurring.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved pattern has changed due to this "reserved change notice," if the reserved pattern shifts with the execution (consumption) of a variable performance, the display mode of the changed reserved pattern is inherited (taken over) and reflected in the shifted reserved pattern or executed pattern. In other words, when the display mode of the reserved pattern has changed, even when the changed reserved pattern shifts to another reserved pattern display area Db1-Db3 or executed pattern display area Db0 with the execution of a variable performance, the display mode before the shift is maintained as the display mode of the shifted reserved pattern or executed pattern.

Therefore, for example, if the display color of the reserved pattern in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4 changes to "red," the "red" reserved pattern or execution pattern is configured to continue to be displayed as the reserved pattern shifts from the third reserved pattern display area Db3 to the second reserved pattern display area Db2 to the first reserved pattern display area Db1 to the execution pattern display area Db0. Details of this "reserved change notice" will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Also, instead of displaying the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the third pattern display device 81 does not display information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved pattern, etc.), it is not possible to execute the "reserved change notice" by the reserved pattern, so it may be configured to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "reserved change notice" by additionally appearing other character patterns, etc.

Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit. Note that if the reserved lamps are configured to display the number of reserved balls, it is of course possible to perform a pre-reading notice similar to the "reserved change notice" of the first embodiment by providing multiple display colors for the reserved lamps.

Now, referring to FIG. 5, we will explain the transition of the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 when the variable elements of "normal reach" and "super reach" appear in the variable performance. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing the state just before (immediately before) the "reach display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable elements of "normal reach" have started from the state of FIG. 5(a), the sub-display area Ds has been erased, and the variable elements of "normal reach" have been executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 5(c) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable elements of "super reach" have started from the state of FIG. 5(b), the cockpit display area Db has been erased, and the variable elements of "super reach" have been executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 5(d) shows the state in which the secondary display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state in FIG. 5(c), and the "missed display" of the third pattern appears in the primary display area Dm.

In the following explanation, for the sake of convenience, when expressing the third pattern, the main pattern is expressed in the figure only with a numerical pattern, and the rear pattern consisting of a wooden box and the additional patterns imitating characters are omitted, and their explanations are also omitted. Also, in FIG. 5, the variable elements of "Super Reach" are explained as an example of a "reach display" that develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". Although the variable elements of "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" differ in the presentation content such as background display, character pattern, and variable time, the screen configuration (display or redisplay, etc.) of the secondary display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same, so it is possible to replace the variable elements of "Super Reach" with the variable elements of "Special Reach".

First, in FIG. 5(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is "high-speed fluctuating" so that it is not yet visible. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In FIG. 5(b), from the state of FIG. 5(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a "normal reach" variable element, and the secondary display area Ds becomes invisible. This is because, as mentioned above, the secondary display area Ds mainly serves the function of indicating whether or not a "reach display" will occur in the variable presentation in the primary display area Dm, and when a "reach display" occurs in the primary display area Dm, the significance of the secondary display area Ds is diminished.

In addition, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player focuses on whether the result of the "reach display" is a "jackpot display" or a "miss display," and the player pays less attention to the display content of the secondary display area Ds, which suggests the occurrence of the "reach display."

Therefore, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the secondary display area Ds is erased in conjunction with the enlargement, so that the player can easily recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player is focusing on.

In the state of Fig. 5(b), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of Fig. 5(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, as in Fig. 5(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display of the cockpit display area Db is configured to continue to be displayed without being erased during the variable element of the "normal reach". This is because the variable element of the "normal reach" often results in a missed jackpot selection in a variable presentation that is only the variable element of the "normal reach", and there is a high possibility that a "miss display" will appear. When the variable element of the "normal reach" becomes a "miss display", the next variable presentation will start immediately, so it is necessary to indicate to the player whether or not the next variable presentation is on hold. Therefore, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuous display) during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach", and the device is configured to indicate to the player how many balls are on hold for the variable presentation.

In addition, because the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the secondary display area Ds, even if it continues to be displayed during the variable element of the "normal reach", it does not interfere with the presentation of the variable element of the "normal reach". Therefore, there is no actual harm in continuing to display the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach".

Furthermore, the reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-mentioned "reserved change notice", and are configured to inherit (take over) the display mode of the reserved symbols changed by the "reserved change notice" even in the execution symbols that suggest the content of the variable performance currently being executed. In other words, the display mode of the execution symbols is configured to be able to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot being won in the variable performance currently being executed. Therefore, by having the player check the display mode of the execution symbols while the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed, the player can predict whether the variable element of the "normal reach" currently being executed will develop into a variable element of the "super reach" and result in a jackpot, providing an interest based on that prediction.

Specifically, for example, if the execution symbol is displayed in "white," which is the normal display mode, or in "blue," which is one level higher than the "white" and has a higher probability of winning, during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach," the player predicts that the variable element of the "normal reach" is unlikely to develop into a variable element of a "super reach" and result in a jackpot. On the other hand, if the execution symbol is displayed in "red" or "rainbow" during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach," the player predicts that the variable element of the "normal reach" will develop into a variable element of a "super reach" and result in a jackpot, or that the "jackpot display" will appear even if the variable element of the "normal reach" remains as it is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine 10 equipped with a "hold change notice," in order to give the player the above-mentioned interest during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach," the cockpit display area Db is configured to be continuously displayed during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach." Details of the "hold change notice" will be described later.

Figure 5(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 5(b). In this variable element of "Super Reach", a pattern indicating that a "reach display" based on the "7" pattern displayed in the variable element of "Normal Reach" has occurred (hereinafter, the pattern indicating that this "reach display" has occurred is referred to as the "reach formation pattern") is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In FIG. 5(c), a "battle effect" (a "competition effect" in the variable element of the "Special Reach") is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in which multiple character symbols compete for victory or defeat. In this "battle effect", an effect (kickboxing in the first embodiment) is executed in which the player's character symbol (e.g., the left character symbol) and the enemy's character symbol (e.g., the right character symbol) fight. In the "battle effect", if the player's character symbol wins, it is a jackpot, and a "jackpot display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "Super Reach". On the other hand, if the enemy's character symbol wins in the "battle effect", it is a loss, and a "loss display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "Super Reach".

Also, as shown in FIG. 5(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, a new reach formation pattern, a numeric pattern (in the first embodiment, "4") indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance, is newly displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and below the reach formation pattern.

When a "Super Reach" variable element occurs during a variable effect that has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than a "Normal Reach" variable element, the player focuses on whether the variable effect being executed will be a "jackpot display" or a "miss display" rather than on how many variable effects are pending (on hold). For this reason, the player does not focus on the reserved symbol that indicates the number of reserved balls in the variable effect before execution. Rather, if the reserved symbol is displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the "Super Reach" variable element, the player will not be able to concentrate on the performance of the "Super Reach" variable element, and the player may find the display of the reserved symbol annoying.

In addition, the reserved patterns displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship to the variable performance currently being performed. Furthermore, the reserved patterns displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 are displayed and controlled based on a setting (lottery) process that is different from the display control of the variable performance currently being performed (in the voice lamp control device 113, the variable performance is processed by the variable performance process (see FIG. 31) described later for the variable performance, and the reserved display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later for the reserved patterns). On the other hand, during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach", the processing load of the display control is increased by making various character patterns appear and displaying many effects on each character pattern, etc. In such a situation, if the display control of multiple reserved patterns that are not directly related to the variable performance currently being performed is performed, the processing load of the display control of the entire third pattern display device 81 increases by the amount of each reserved pattern, and there is a risk of display abnormalities such as so-called frame drops occurring.

Furthermore, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db inherits (takes over) the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by the "reserved change notice", and therefore has a direct relationship with the variable performance being performed, but the "reserved change notice" suggests the expected appearance probability of the "jackpot display" as well as the expected appearance probability of the "reach display". For this reason, when the variable element of the "super reach" appears, it is a state in which the indication of the expected appearance probability of the "reach display" as the "reserved change notice" is fulfilled to a certain extent (for example, half) by the execution of the "reach display", which is a variable element of the "super reach" and has a high expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, as described above, when the variable element of the "super reach" appears, the player focuses on the performance content of the variable element of the "super reach", and is less interested in the display mode of the "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern.

Therefore, by erasing the reserved and executed symbols that attract little attention from the player while the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are being executed, and mainly executing the presentation of the variable elements of the "Super Reach" on the display screen, it is possible to make the player pay attention (focus) to the presentation of the variable elements of the "Super Reach". Furthermore, by erasing the reserved and executed symbols that attract little attention from the player, it is possible to reduce the burden on the display control, and to prevent display abnormalities such as dropped frames from occurring.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 5(c), the "7" symbol that caused the variable element of this "Super Reach" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The performance of the variable element of the "Super Reach" indicates whether the variable element being executed will be a "jackpot display" or a "miss display", but since it is performed by a character symbol that has no direct relationship to the display mode of the third symbol, if the third symbol is not displayed at all and one focuses only on the character symbol in the variable element of the "Super Reach", it may not be possible to recognize whether the performance is a "reach display" or not (for example, it may be mistaken for a "demo screen"). In addition, since the performance of the variable element of the "Super Reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player may forget which third symbol caused the "reach display" during the variable element of the "Super Reach". However, if the reach formation symbols are displayed in a large size while the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are being executed, it may become difficult to see the presentation of the variable elements of the "Super Reach", which may hinder the presentation of the variable elements of the "Super Reach" itself.

Therefore, among the variable elements of the "Super Reach", the reach-forming pattern of the third pattern that caused the variable element of the "Super Reach" to occur is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that a "reach display" has occurred without interfering with the presentation of the variable elements of the "Super Reach", and it is also possible to clearly suggest to the player the type of third pattern that caused the "reach display".

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 5 (c), a number symbol (in the first embodiment, "4") indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (below the "reach display"). As mentioned above, while the variable element of the "super reach" is being executed, the display in the cockpit display area Db is erased, so the player may not be able to recognize at all the number of variable performances that are reserved based on the display content of the cockpit display area Db.

Therefore, instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db while the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed, a number pattern indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable effect is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, the number of reserved variable effects can be shown to the player while the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed, without interfering with the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach".

Figure 5 (d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 5 (c), the "Super Reach" variable element presentation has failed (the enemy character symbol has won), a "miss display" appears in the main display area Dm, and the secondary display area Ds and cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds and the execution symbol and reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are once again visible. Note that the character symbol in the central small area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds is displayed in a manner that shows a disappointed expression due to the appearance of the "miss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends and the variable performance is stopped (confirmed), the display state of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be the initial state, that is, the state in which the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the variable performance has stopped (confirmed), and to smoothly execute the next variable performance when there is a variable performance on hold (waiting). Therefore, when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends, the execution pattern and reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the variable performance execution process, so the player does not feel strange.

As shown in Figures 5(a) to 5(d), the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to make it easier for the player to recognize the display content that is of high importance at each timing by enlarging or reducing the display state of the main display area Dm, displaying, hiding (erasing) or redisplaying the display state of the secondary display area Ds, and displaying, hiding (erasing) or redisplaying the display state of the cockpit display area Db at each timing in the variable presentation.

At each timing in the change performance, the display state of the main display area Dm, the secondary display area Ds, or the cockpit display area Db may be appropriately rearranged to execute the change performance. Specifically, for example, the main display area Dm and the secondary display area Ds may be displayed and the cockpit display area Db may be erased to execute the change performance, or the secondary display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db may be displayed in a reduced size while the main display area Dm is enlarged to execute the change performance.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol) each time a ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "circle" symbol in the first embodiment).

The number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display device 37 and is also lit up by the second pattern reservation lamp 84. There are four second pattern reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically above the third pattern display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit second pattern reservation lamps 84.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the first embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be turned on.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6). A display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and a variable performance is executed by the third pattern display device 81. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

The first ball entrance 64 is provided with an electric device having two blades that cover the opening through which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The electric device opens and closes the two blades to open (expanded) or close (reduced) the first ball entrance 64. Under normal circumstances, the first ball entrance 64 is in a closed state with the blades of the electric device closed (standing upwards), making it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, the electric device in the first ball entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined time. While the electric device is being operated, the blades of the electric device move from an upwardly raised state to an approximately V-shaped (inverted V-shape), and the first ball entrance 64 is in an open state. When the first ball entrance 64 is in an open state, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, or it becomes easier for the ball to enter compared to a closed state. In other words, when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, which is a win, and the first ball entrance 64 is in an open state, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, allowing for many jackpot draws to be held.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

A second ball entrance 67 is provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80. The second ball entrance 67 has a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction for the ball to pass through. When a ball shot into the play area passes through the second ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and when this is turned on, the main control device 110 performs a lottery to determine whether a second symbol (also called a normal symbol) will win.

If the ball that passed through the second ball entrance 67 is determined to have won as a result of the drawing of the second pattern (normal pattern), the second pattern display device 83 changes its display and displays a static "○" pattern, after which the electric device at the first ball entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric device, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, move from a nearly vertically erected state to a nearly V-shape (an inverted V-shape), allowing the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 for a specified period of time, or making it easier for the ball to enter compared to a closed state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a read-only memory (ROM) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a random access memory (RAM) 203 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing the jackpot lottery, setting the dynamic display and variable effects in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 also stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reserved number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Now, referring to FIG. 7, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37, the setting of the variable performance of the third pattern display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83, and the like. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 13.

The first win random number counter C1 used to draw the jackpot, the first win type counter C2 used to select the type of stop of the jackpot pattern, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first win random number counter C1, and the variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern are used to draw the jackpot, the first win random number counter C1 used to set the initial value of the first win random number counter C1, and the variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second pattern display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 4 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 26), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Details will be described later, but the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 899") and to return to "0" after it reaches a maximum value (e.g., "899" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 899") In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 has completed one cycle of update, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the first hit random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of "0 to 899". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and is stored in one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The random number value that results in a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a low probability state table used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period not in a "probability variable state") in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a "normal game state" or a "time-shortened state", and a high probability state table used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a "probability variable state (during a probability variable)" in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state. The number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of "0 to 899". In this first win random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in a high probability state is 30, and the following values are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a: 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state are set so that they do not overlap. If a value exists that will be the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, this value will be easier to predict from the outside, which may increase the possibility of winning a jackpot illegally. In contrast, by changing the value of the random number that will be the jackpot depending on the state (i.e., whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state) as in the first embodiment, the value of the random number that will be the jackpot can be made harder to predict, which can help to prevent fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will continue. The first winning type counter C2 determines the type of big win in the event of a big win, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values of "0 to 99"). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the value is stored in the same reserved area as the first winning random number counter C1, among the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a jackpot, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss, the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a miss. On the other hand, if the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a jackpot, the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the stop type will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on this first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Now, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b will be explained. FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates jackpot types with the value of the first win type counter C2.

As for the types of jackpots, as mentioned above, there are "15R sure-change jackpots" in which the jackpot probability changes to a "probability-changing state" where the jackpot probability is high after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, "15R normal jackpots" in which the jackpot probability is low after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds and the state changes to a "time-shortened state" for 100 changes, and "2R sure-change jackpots" in which the jackpot probability changes to a "probability-changing state" after a jackpot with a maximum of 2 rounds. In the following explanation, the 15-round jackpots of the "15R sure-change jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "common 15R jackpots."

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the "15R special jackpot", the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "40 to 79" is associated with the "15R normal jackpot", and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "80 to 99" is associated with the "2R special jackpot".

When the value of the first win random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "20", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R variable jackpot", if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R normal jackpot", and if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "90", the jackpot type is determined to be "2R variable jackpot".

In this way, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that a "15R guaranteed jackpot" is selected, a 40% probability that a "15R normal jackpot" is selected, and a 20% probability that a "2R guaranteed jackpot" is selected. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected when a jackpot occurs is set appropriately depending on the model. Then, depending on the set probability, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is specified in the jackpot type table 202b.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may be changed depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and the number of values of the first jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 7, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "99").

In the first embodiment, the general presentation mode of the variable presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of a big win or a miss is selected based on the number of reserved variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, six presentation modes are selected: a "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs, a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed as the "reach display", a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of the "super reach", a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of the "special reach", and a "special variation" presentation mode that occurs when a "2R guaranteed big win" is selected.

Here, each of the presentation modes will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode are presentation modes in which, after a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element occurs in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4(a)) of the main display area Dm, the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and a "reach display" does not occur.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element here refers to a state in which the third symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) are scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed during the variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed by fluctuating the third symbol so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and by randomly mixing (shuffling) the stop results of the variable presentation that was previously stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a "fast change" variable element is performed, a "slow change" variable element is performed except for a specific presentation mode (a "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode). The "slow change" variable element refers to a state in which, in a variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4(a)) of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is scrolled slowly at a speed that is visible to the player after the "fast change" variable element. In this "slow change" variable element, the third pattern is displayed in the order of left pattern row Z1 → right pattern row Z3 → center pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 4(a)) while allowing the player to recognize the display content of the third pattern. If the same third symbol stops in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, it is determined that a "reach display" has occurred, and the game progresses to a "normal reach" variable element. On the other hand, if different third symbols stop in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed as stopped, and the variable effect ends (except when it progresses to a "pseudo consecutive" as described below).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and then the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4 (a)) stops in order, and one variable presentation ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 stops simultaneously, and one variable presentation ends.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "reach display" in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed immediately after the same third symbol stops in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable presentation of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) of the main display area Dm, and the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed, and the "reach display" is executed without developing into other "reach displays", that is, the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach". In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbol displayed stopped in the left symbol column Z1 (left display area Dm1) and the right symbol column Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is displayed larger than usual. In addition, the third symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 (middle display area Dm2) is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol in the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a state where it can be seen by the player. Furthermore, in this "normal reach" variable, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm is enlarged (see FIG. 5(b)).

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "reach display" in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" described above are developed and the variable elements of the "super reach" are executed. In this "super reach" presentation mode, while the variable elements of the "super reach" are being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(a)) is erased from the display state of the variable elements of the "normal reach", and the reach formation pattern of the third pattern that was the cause of the occurrence of this "reach display" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable elements of the "normal reach", and multiple character patterns are made to appear, performing a "battle presentation (kickboxing in the first embodiment)" (see FIG. 5(c)).

In the first embodiment, the display is configured to suggest whether the variable performance will be a success or failure based on the result (win or loss) of the "battle performance." Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle performance," if the character design on the player's side wins against the character design on the enemy's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable performance will be a "jackpot display," and if the character design on the player's side loses to the character design on the enemy's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable performance will be a "loss display."

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "Reach Display" in which the variable elements of the "Special Reach" are executed by developing from the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" described above. In this "Special Reach" presentation mode, while the variable elements of the "Special Reach" are being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(a)) is erased from the display state of the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" as in the variable elements of the "Super Reach" described above, and the reach formation pattern of the third pattern that was the cause of the occurrence of this "Reach Display" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4(a)) changes from the variable elements of the "Normal Reach", and multiple characters different from the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are made to appear, and a "race presentation (in the first embodiment, a car race)" is performed (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the display is configured to suggest whether the variable presentation will be a success or failure based on the result (win or loss) of the "competition presentation." Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition presentation," if the character design on the player's side wins against the character design on the opponent's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable presentation will be a "jackpot display," and if the character design on the player's side loses to the character design on the opponent's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable presentation will be a "loss display."

Among the presentation modes, the "special variation" presentation mode is a presentation mode that is always executed if a "2R special jackpot" is won. In this "special variation" presentation mode, the sub-display area Ds and cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm changes from the normal background display to display a "movie" presentation that suggests a "2R special jackpot" will occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), it is stored in the same holding area as the holding area in which the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, among the first to fourth holding areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable performance is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently on hold (number of reserved balls). That is, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided and are configured to be selected based on the number of waiting variable performances (number of reserved balls) and the like. In the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variable pattern of the variable performance, first, based on the reserved number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, one of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the win/loss of the variable performance, the current game state, and the current number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is selected. After that, based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later, a detailed variable pattern (variation time) of the variable performance is determined.

The multiple stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the presentation mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason for providing multiple stop pattern tables 202d is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third pattern, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability variable state," "time shortening state," or "normal game status," and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the reserved variable presentation.

The first reason is to change the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode. That is, by configuring the ratio of selection of the "non-reach" presentation mode, the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode to be different between when the jackpot lottery is won and when it is lost, the expectation of a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" presentation mode or the "normal reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the "super reach" presentation mode and the "special reach" presentation mode can be made to be a presentation that is easy to win a jackpot, and the "normal reach" presentation mode and the "non-reach" presentation mode can be made to be a presentation that is difficult to win a jackpot or does not win a jackpot, and the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot appears in the variable performance, the player is informed that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while that performance is occurring, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, the device is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on a stop pattern table 202d (e.g., C table 202d3 (see Figure 11(a))) which makes it easy to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a miss, the device is configured to select a stop pattern table 202d (e.g., A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 (see Figure 10(a) or Figure 10(b))) which makes it difficult to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the result of the lottery for the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable presentation, if a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the jackpot will be more likely to occur in that variable presentation, and if a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the jackpot will be less likely to occur in that variable presentation. By providing a difference in the expected jackpot value for each presentation mode, the excitement of the game can be increased while the variable presentation is being executed.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called no-lottery due to overflow winning) resulting from balls entering the first ball entrance 64 when the number of waiting times for the variable performance has reached the upper limit. To be more specific, the number of waiting times for the variable performance is limited to a maximum of four times, and the variable exit is executed for at least a certain period of time. Therefore, in a game state in which balls are likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 in the "probability variable state" or "time shortening state," the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, balls will frequently enter the first ball entrance 64 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol has been reached, and the chance to select the third symbol cannot be obtained even though the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. Also, even in the "normal game state," if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol has been reached, the reserved balls for the third symbol are not consumed during the variable performance, and so even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during that time, the player cannot obtain a lottery opportunity for the third symbol. In this state, the player decides that they cannot obtain game value by letting the ball enter the first ball entrance 64, and stops firing balls and suspends play until the variable performance is consumed and the reserved balls can be obtained again. If play is suspended, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which has an impact on the management of the game parlor.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., table B 202d2 (see FIG. 10(b))) in which a relatively short variable time is likely to be selected in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol is likely to be reached or in a number of reserved balls close to (or equal to) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent a ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol has been reached.

The third reason is that the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. To be more specific, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small (none), the next variable performance cannot be started unless a new ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the variable performance is not performed on the third pattern display device 81 even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player cannot get the excitement of the lottery for the big win that the player is looking for, and loses interest in the game. In addition, because the variable performance is not performed on the third pattern display device 81, the player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and may judge that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain game value, and may stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., table A 202d1 (see FIG. 10(a))) in which a relatively long variable presentation time is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is small. This makes it difficult for a situation to occur in which the variable presentation is not being performed in the third pattern display device 81, and makes it possible to maintain the execution state of the variable presentation in the third pattern display device 81 for a long time.

Here, the details of the reserved number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 11. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the reserved number table 202c in schematic form. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variable performance is performed based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the reserved number table 202c is referenced, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected based on whether the variable performance is successful, the game state at that time, and the reserved number of the variable performance at that time. Then, the general performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 9, when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls is "1", "2 or 3", or when a miss is extracted in the "probability changing state" or "time shortening state" and the number of reserved balls is "1", table A 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10(a)) is selected. Also, when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls is "4", or when a miss is extracted in the "probability changing state" or "time shortening state" and the number of reserved balls is "2 or 3" or "4", table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10(b)) is selected. Furthermore, when extracting a "15R jackpot ("15R special jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot")," regardless of the game state or number of reserved balls, table C 202d3 (see FIG. 11(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Also, when extracting a "2R special jackpot," regardless of the game state or number of reserved balls, table D 202d4 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In other words, if a jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls or game status at that time, and only if a jackpot is not won (i.e., a miss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and game status at that time.

It should be noted that even in the case of a jackpot win, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when a jackpot win is won and there are many reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to select a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, a "super reach" presentation mode or a "special reach" presentation mode in which the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is three seconds). In this case, in each presentation mode in which the "reach display" is executed, a presentation mode in which only the time period of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is changed from seven seconds to only three seconds is selected. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a variable performance starts with the maximum number of reserved balls being four, even if the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for three seconds, at the time when the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for the three seconds ends (the time when it is recognized as a "high-speed fluctuation" for three seconds), a "reach display" may occur in the variable performance, and even if a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for three seconds is performed, by configuring it so that a display mode in which a "reach display" other than "non-reach (shortened)" is executed is executed, it is possible to make it unclear at the time when the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for three seconds is executed whether the variable performance will be a big hit or a miss.

In addition, in the "probability changing state" or "time shortening state", if a jackpot has not been won and there are few reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., table A 202d1) in which a relatively long changing pattern is likely to be selected may be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the changing performance is being performed by the third pattern display device 81 even in the "probability changing state" or "time shortening state", making it difficult for a situation to arise in which the changing performance is not being performed by the third pattern display device 81, and it is possible to maintain the execution state of the changing performance by the third pattern display device 81 for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11. FIG. 10 shows a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected when losing, FIG. 10(a) is a diagram showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11 shows a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected when winning big, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in A table 202d1 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98" and "99". Note that in A table 202d1, no value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98, 99". Note that in the C table 202d3, no value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

That is, in table A 202d1, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode. In addition, in table B 202d2, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

Therefore, in table A 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is selected, and in table B 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode. Therefore, it can be said that table A 202d1 is more likely to have a relatively long variable presentation time than table B 202d2. In other words, table B 202d2 is more likely to have a short variable presentation time than table A 202d1. Note that the selection ratios of the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode are set to be the same in table A 202d1 and table B 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the system is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable performance based on the number of reserved balls for the pending variable performance. For example, when there are many reserved balls for the variable performance, it is easier to select a "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, which has a short variable performance time. This makes it possible to shorten the execution time of the variable performance when there are many reserved balls for the variable performance, and increase the number of times the variable performance is executed, thereby improving the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

Also, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small, the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode, which has a longer variable performance time than the "non-reach (reduced)" performance mode, is more likely to be selected in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. This makes it possible to perform the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode, which has a longer variable performance time than when the "non-reach (reduced)" performance mode is selected, making it easier to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and by increasing the possibility of a new starting winning occurring during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is being executed can be maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(a), in C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99". Note that in C table 202d3, no value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "special variation" presentation mode, and the "special variation" presentation mode is set not to be selected. Also, since C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a jackpot, the "non-reach" presentation mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in D table 202d4 of stop pattern table 202d, the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" presentation mode ("0" to "99"), and the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to other "reach displays". Therefore, it is set so that the stop type selected when a "2R sure-variable jackpot" is won is always the "special variation" presentation mode. Note that since D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected when a jackpot is won, the "non-reach" presentation mode is not selected.

That is, in table C 202d3, the selection rate for the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to 5%, the "super reach" presentation mode to 35%, and the "special reach" presentation mode to 60%. In addition, in table D 202d4, the selection rate for the "special variation" presentation mode is set to 100%.

Therefore, in the variable presentation when a jackpot is won, the selection rate is set to be "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode, and in the variable presentation when a loss occurs, the selection rate is set to be "Normal Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Special Reach" presentation mode. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot when each "reach display" appears is configured so that the probability of a jackpot display result appearing increases in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode. This makes it possible to show the player the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the player can feel the excitement of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable performance is configured to be different when selecting the performance mode in the variable performance of a miss, but the same performance mode is selected when determining the variable performance based on the ball's entry into the first ball entrance 64 and when determining the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the ball's entry. Specifically, when the variable performance is a miss, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable performance, but the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode or the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode are the same in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, and the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the other performance modes are also set to the same.

In other words, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (shortened)" or "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable presentation, so essentially the same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the presentation mode selected at the start of the winning and the presentation mode selected at the start of the variation are essentially the same presentation mode, even if the game state transitions (for example, from "normal game state" to "probability variation state"). As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as a "reserved change notice" is made based on the presentation mode selected at the start of the winning, a presentation can be executed in which there is no discrepancy with the contents of the pre-reading notice in the variable presentation that was the subject of the pre-reading notice.

As described above, by determining the presentation mode of the variable performance to be executed based on whether the variable performance is successful, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable performance at that time, it is possible to select a presentation mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable performance by shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times the variable performance is executed based on the situation in which the game is being played.

When the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for each "reach display" is shortened. Also, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variable element of "slow fluctuation" is omitted for each performance mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d in which the selection rate of each performance mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance may be provided. However, when the selection rate of each performance mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance, when a look-ahead notice such as a "reserved change notice" is made, the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding to execute the look-ahead notice may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time the variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead notice is executed. In such a case, a process is required to maintain consistency between the contents of the look-ahead notice and the contents of the variable performance, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to Figure 7 for further explanation, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by "1" within the range of "0 to 199", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "199"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see Figure 26).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the variation performance. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the execution mode of the advance notice performance.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation presentation and determines only the variation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the variation presentation, so the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation presentation can be reduced. In addition, the main control device 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation presentation, so the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation presentation based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby increasing the freedom to select the variation presentation. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variation presentation at any time in response to the changes, and an appropriate presentation can be executed according to the game state.

Now, with reference to Figures 12 and 13, the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202e will be described. In this pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202e, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 used in the event of a jackpot, and a miss fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used in the event of a miss are prepared. Figure 12 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected presentation mode. Specifically, the presentation modes are divided into "E5: Normal Reach", which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E6: Super Reach", which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E7: Special Reach", which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined, and "E8: Special Fluctuation", which is referenced when the "Special Fluctuation" presentation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then associated with each of these divided groups.

When the value of the first win random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area, the game state at the time of the start winning, and the number of reserved balls at the time of the start winning, and the presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the presentation mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation presentation reserved in the reserved area.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Normal reach" has six selectable fluctuation patterns: "Normal reach only" with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds, "Pseudo fake + normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "Pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Normal reach + re-fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "Pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and "Pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

Here, referring to FIG. 14, each variable element that constitutes the variable pattern will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation time for each variable element of a variable presentation. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable presentation, and one variable presentation is composed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are "high-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", "pseudo fake", "pseudo consecutive 1", "pseudo consecutive 2", "normal reach", "super reach", "special reach", "re-variation", and "movie".

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at such a high speed that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable performance when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected (see FIG. 14), and is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the variable performance when a presentation mode other than "non-reach (shortened)" (for example, "non-reach (normal)") is selected (see FIG. 14). When this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described below is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that starts after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element for 7 seconds, and scrolls and changes the third symbol so that it can be seen, to show whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected, and is executed for 3 seconds after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element when a presentation mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode (for example, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode) is selected. That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is rapidly stopped (so-called a perfect stop) without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Note that, when this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "pseudo-fake" variable element described later is started (executed), the "normal reach" variable element described later is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern that includes a seven-second "high-speed variation" variable element and a three-second "low-speed variation" variable element. Also, the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern that includes only a three-second "high-speed variation" variable element.

The "pseudo fake" variable element is a variable element that determines whether or not the "pseudo consecutive 1" variable element or the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element described below will occur (hereinafter, the "pseudo consecutive 1" variable element and the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element may be collectively referred to as the "pseudo consecutive variable element"), but does not generate the "pseudo consecutive" variable element.

The "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable effect occurs multiple times (one or more pseudo stops) during one variable effect. Specifically, the "high-speed variable" variable element starts in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the third pattern display device 81, then switches to a "low-speed variable" variable element, and then the variable effect in all of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 ends and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo consecutive chance eye "677") is displayed. This "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element in which the above-mentioned predetermined stop result stops at least once after the "slow-speed variable" variable element, and the "high-speed variable" variable element starts again from that stop result, and the effect is executed as if the variable effect had started once more.

In the "pseudo-fake" variable element, a performance is performed in which a predetermined stop result appears or not after the execution of the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element (for example, a performance in which the symbols forming the above-mentioned predetermined stop result fluctuate back and forth on the pay line L1 (see FIG. 4(a)) and stop or not; hereafter referred to as "pseudo fluctuation"). In this "pseudo fluctuation", the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear, and it is a variable element that does not develop into a "pseudo consecutive" variable element. Therefore, after the end of the "pseudo-fake" variable element, this "pseudo-fake" variable element develops into a "normal reach" variable element, or a "miss display" appears (for example, "687") and the performance ends.

The variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" is a variable element in which a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of a "pseudo fluctuation" after a "slow fluctuation" variable element, a second "fast fluctuation" variable element is executed again, and in the second "pseudo fluctuation" thereafter, the predetermined stop result does not appear again and develops into a "normal reach" variable element. In other words, the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" is a variable element in which a pseudo fluctuation stop (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo stop") in which a pseudo consecutive chance eye is displayed is executed once, and then a predetermined stop result appears in that pseudo stop, and a "fast fluctuation" variable element is started again. Therefore, after the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" ends, it develops into a "normal reach" variable element, or the variable performance ends as it is.

The variable element of "pseudo consecutive 2" is a variable element in which a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of "pseudo fluctuation" after the variable element of "slow fluctuation", the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again for the second time, the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" appears again for the second time thereafter, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is executed for the third time, and then it develops into a variable element of "normal reach". In other words, "pseudo consecutive 2" is a variable element in which pseudo stops are performed a total of two times, a predetermined stop result appears at each pseudo stop, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 2" is set to the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations among the variable elements of "pseudo consecutive". Therefore, after the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" ends, it always develops into a variable element of "normal reach".

The variable element of "pseudo fake" is an effect where the pseudo consecutive chance eye does not stop after the first "slow fluctuation" variable element, and this is performed for a total of 10 seconds. The variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" is an effect where the pseudo consecutive chance eye stops after the first "slow fluctuation" variable element, and then a "pseudo fluctuation" is performed, and in this "pseudo fluctuation", a reach formation pattern appears instead of the pseudo consecutive chance eye, and this is performed for a total of 20 seconds. The variable element of "pseudo consecutive 2" is an effect where the first pseudo consecutive chance eye stops after the first "slow fluctuation" variable element, and then the first "pseudo fluctuation" is performed, and in this first "pseudo fluctuation", the pseudo consecutive chance eye stops again, and then the "pseudo fluctuation" is performed again and a reach formation pattern appears, and this is performed for a total of 30 seconds (see FIG. 14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "pseudo-fake" is executed, there are prepared a pattern in which the predetermined stop result is not displayed and a "miss display" is displayed as it is, and a pattern in which the predetermined stop result is not displayed but the reach formation symbols stop and the variable element of "normal reach" is generated. Also, after the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 1" is executed, there are prepared a pattern in which the predetermined stop result is not displayed and a "miss display" is displayed as it is, as with the variable element of "pseudo-fake", and a pattern in which the predetermined stop result is not displayed but the reach formation symbols stop and the variable element of "normal reach" is generated. Furthermore, after the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 2" is executed, there is prepared a pattern in which the "miss display" is not displayed directly and the reach formation symbols stop and the "normal reach" is generated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 2" is configured to be selected only when the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode is selected. Therefore, when the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 2" is performed, it is determined that the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" will occur after passing through the variable element of "normal reach".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is set to be between the start of the change in the change presentation and before the "reach display" is executed, that is, the execution timing of the "before reach" where the execution pattern changes during the execution of the "fast change" variable element, the "slow change" variable element, or the "pseudo consecutive" variable element, but since the "before reach" period is extended by the execution of the "pseudo consecutive" variable element, the player feels as if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" has increased, and can enjoy the interest of the increased reliability of a jackpot based on the execution of the "pseudo consecutive", and the interest of the increased possibility of the "reserve change notice" being executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

It is also possible to provide a "pseudo consecutive" variable element with a pseudo stop count (pseudo consecutive chance eye stop count) of three or more times. It is also possible to configure the game so that a predetermined stop result appears in the "slow fluctuation" variable element without executing the "pseudo fluctuation," leading to a performance related to the "pseudo consecutive" variable element.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the result of the fluctuation of the middle pattern column Z2 when a reach-forming pattern is displayed stationary in the left pattern column Z1 and the right pattern column Z3 in the "slow fluctuation" variable element, the "pseudo fake" variable element, the "pseudo consecutive 1" variable element, or the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element (hereinafter, "the variable elements of "slow fluctuation", the "pseudo fake" variable element, the "pseudo consecutive 1" variable element, or the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element" may be collectively referred to as "slow fluctuation, etc." variable elements). This "normal reach" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after the variable elements of "slow fluctuation", etc. (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "special reach", and a pattern in which the variable element of the "re-variation" is executed after the "miss display" is displayed once.

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues, and a "battle performance" is performed in the main display area Dm to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is executed for 10 seconds after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element (see Figure 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "miss display" is displayed once.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" in the "Normal Reach" variable element does not stop and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and a "race presentation" is performed in the main display area Dm to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is executed for 20 seconds after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element (see Figure 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "special reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "miss display" is displayed once.

It is configured so that after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, it develops into the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach". However, instead of this configuration, when the reach forming symbol stops after the variable element of the "slow fluctuation", it may be configured so that it develops straight into the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach" without going through the variable element of the "normal reach". It may also be configured so that the variable element of the "special reach" is executed after the variable element of the "super reach" is executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and is executed after a "miss display" appears once in any of the "reach displays", causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after any of the "reach displays" (see Figure 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only a pattern is prepared in which the "jackpot display" appears after the execution of the "re-variation" variable element. In other words, when "re-variation" is executed, the "jackpot display" is always displayed afterwards.

The "movie" variable element is performed after the "slow fluctuation" is executed if a "2R certain jackpot" has been won, and causes a "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R certain jackpot" to appear. This "movie" variable element is executed for 40 seconds after the "slow fluctuation" (see FIG. 14), and executes an effect in which a specific character design (e.g., a premium character) speaks a specific message across the entire main display area Dm (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only a pattern is prepared in which the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R certain jackpot" appears after the variable element of the "movie" is executed. In other words, when the "movie" is executed, the "jackpot display" for the "2R certain jackpot" always appears afterwards.

Returning to Figure 12 for further explanation, in the example shown in Figure 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E5: normal reach" is "0-9" for "normal reach only (01H)", "10-19" for "pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)", "20-59" for "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)", "60-79" for "normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)", "80-99" for "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", and "100-199" for "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (06H)".

That is, in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the following patterns are selected: "normal reach only (01H)" 5%, "pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)" 5%, "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)" 20%, "normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)" 10%, "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)" 10%, and "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" 50%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, a variation pattern that includes the "re-variation" variation element is likely to be selected (70% of the total), and in particular, the "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-variation (06H)" variation pattern is likely to be selected (50% of the total). However, by configuring it so that "normal reach only (01H)" and "pseudo false + normal reach (02H)," which do not include the "re-variation" variation element, can also be selected, providing gameplay in which a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, eight fluctuation patterns are available for "E6: Super Reach": "Super Reach only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, "Super Reach + Re-flux (05H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach + Re-flux (06H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach + Re-flux (07H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach + Re-flux (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E6: Super Reach" is "0-9" for "Super Reach only (01H)", "10-19" for "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)", "20-59" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "60-99" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)", "100-119" for "Super Reach + Re-flux (05H)", "120-139" for "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach + Re-flux (06H)", "140-169" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach + Re-flux (07H)", and "170-199" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach + Re-flux (08H)".

In other words, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the following patterns are selected: "Super Reach only (01H)" 5%, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)" 5%, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)" 20%, "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 20%, "Super Reach + Re-Change (05H)" 10%, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach + Re-Change (06H)" 10%, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach + Re-Change (07H)" 15%, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach + Re-Change (08H)" 15%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variation patterns including the "re-variation" variable element and the variation patterns not including the "re-variation" variable element are selected equally (50% of the time). Also, the variation pattern including the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element is more likely to be selected (35%). However, by configuring it so that "Super Reach only (01H)" and "pseudo false + Super Reach (02H)," which do not include the "re-variation" variable element or the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element, are also selected, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, eight fluctuation patterns are available for "E7: Special Reach": "Special Reach Only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds, "Special Reach + Re-Fluctuation (05H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach + Re-Fluctuation (06H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach + Re-Fluctuation (07H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach + Re-Fluctuation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 80 seconds. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E7: Special Reach" is "0-9" for "Special Reach only (01H)", "10-19" for "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)", "20-39" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "40-99" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach (04H)", "100-109" for "Special Reach + Re-flux (05H)", "110-119" for "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach + Re-flux (06H)", "120-139" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach + Re-flux (07H)", and "140-199" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach + Re-flux (08H)".

In other words, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the following patterns are selected: "Special Reach only (01H)" 5%, "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)" 5%, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach (03H)" 10%, "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 30%, "Special Reach + Re-Change (05H)" 5%, "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach + Re-Change (06H)" 5%, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach + Re-Change (07H)" 10%, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach + Re-Change (08H)" 30%.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variation patterns including the "re-variation" variable element and the variation patterns not including the "re-variation" variable element are selected equally (50% of the time). Also, the variation pattern including the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element is more likely to be selected (60%). However, by configuring it so that "Special Reach Only (01H)" and "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)," which do not include the "re-variation" variable element or the "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element, are also selected, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, only one fluctuation pattern, "Movie (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, is prepared for "E8: Special fluctuation". In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: Special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199" for "Movie (01H)", and only "Movie (01H)" is set to be selectable. In other words, if the jackpot stop type is "2R sure jackpot", "Movie (01H)" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

When "Movie (01H)" is selected by the main control device 110, the detailed variation pattern corresponding to "Movie (01H)" is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In this pachinko machine 10, the detailed variation pattern corresponding to "Movie (01H)" includes, for example, a variation pattern in which characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81, and the third pattern finally stops at a specific pattern (for example, "341"), and a variation pattern in which the third pattern finally stops at a specific pattern as a specific lamp lights up or flashes.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined using multiple other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice performance that predicts the start of a jackpot or a "reach display" before the start of the fluctuation or during the fluctuation performance may be determined by other fluctuation type counters, and when a reach is established, the number of patterns by which the third pattern that stops last will be shifted (for example, a miss that is shifted by one pattern before or after) may be determined by other fluctuation type counters.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1, a group dedicated to the "2R variable jackpot" is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, when a "2R variable jackpot" occurs, only the "movie (01H)" fluctuation pattern is selected, so instead of providing a group dedicated to the "2R variable jackpot", the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1 may only specify the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when a "15R variable jackpot" or a "15R normal jackpot" occurs. In this case, when the jackpot type is a "2R variable jackpot", the fluctuation pattern may be determined to be "movie (01H)" without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when a "2R certain jackpot" occurs, only "Movie (01H)" is selected, but when a "2R certain jackpot" occurs, one of multiple variation patterns may be selected. In this case, even in a group dedicated to a "2R certain jackpot", such as the "15R common jackpot" group, a variation type counter CS1 may be associated with the variation pattern selected when a "2R certain jackpot" occurs, and the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reserved area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reserved area.

Next, the loss variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a loss variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the loss variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation modes are divided into "E0: Non-reach (shortened)" which is referenced when "Non-reach (shortened)" is determined, "E1: Non-reach (normal)" which is referenced when "Non-reach (normal)" is determined, "E2: Normal reach" which is referenced when "Normal reach" is determined, "E3: Super reach" which is referenced when "Super reach" is determined, and "E4: Special reach" which is referenced when "Special reach" is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is then associated with each of these divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), i.e., it is a value that results in a loss, a stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referenced in the loss variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on that presentation mode. In that group (group) of the loss variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation presentation reserved in that holding area.

In the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e2, only one fluctuation pattern, "Non-reach (shortening) only" with a total fluctuation time of 3 seconds, is prepared for "E0: non-reach (shortening)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (shortening)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199" for "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)", and only "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is set to be selectable. In other words, when the "non-reach (shortening)" presentation mode is selected in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is associated with all values ("0 to 199") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (shortening)" presentation mode, "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E1: Non-reach (normal)" has three selectable fluctuation patterns: "Non-reach (normal) only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 10 seconds, "Pseudo-fake + non-reach (normal) (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and "Pseudo consecutive 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds. Each fluctuation pattern is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E1: Non-reach (normal)" is "0 to 179" for "Non-reach (normal) only (01H)", "180 to 189" for "Pseudo-fake + Non-reach (normal) (02H)", and "190 to 199" for "Pseudo-consecutive 1 + Non-reach (normal) (03H)".

In other words, in the "non-reach (normal)" variation presentation when a miss occurs, the "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" variation pattern is selected 90%, the "pseudo-fake + non-reach (normal) (02H)" variation pattern is selected 5%, and the "pseudo-1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" variation pattern is selected 5% of the time. Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" variation presentation selected when a miss occurs, the "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" variation pattern is more likely to be selected (90%).

In the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E2: Normal reach" has three selectable fluctuation patterns: "Normal reach only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds, "Pseudo false + normal reach (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and "Pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E2: Normal reach" is "0 to 49" for "Normal reach only (01H)", "50 to 149" for "Pseudo false + normal reach (02H)", and "150 to 199" for "Pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)".

In other words, in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs, the "normal reach only (01H)" variation pattern is selected 25%, the "pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)" variation pattern is selected 50%, and the "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)" variation pattern is selected 25% of the time. Therefore, in the variation presentation that includes the "normal reach" variation element selected when a miss occurs, the "pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)" variation pattern is more likely to be selected (50%).

In the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E3: Super Reach" has four selectable fluctuation patterns: "Super Reach only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Each fluctuation pattern is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in Figure 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E3: Super Reach" is "0 to 49" for "Super Reach only (01H)", "50 to 99" for "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)", "100 to 179" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)", and "180 to 199" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)".

In other words, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a win is lost, the following patterns are selected: "Super Reach only (01H)" 25% of the time, "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach (02H)" 25% of the time, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)" 40% of the time, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 10% of the time. Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when a win is lost, the "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach (03H)" pattern is more likely to be selected.

In the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E4: Special Reach" has four selectable fluctuation patterns: "Special Reach Only (01H)" with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds, "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds. Each fluctuation pattern is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in Figure 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E4: Special Reach" is "0 to 79" for "Special Reach only (01H)", "80 to 159" for "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach (02H)", "160 to 179" for "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach (03H)", and "180 to 199" for "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach (04H)".

In other words, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a win is lost, the following patterns are selected: "Special Reach only (01H)" 40%, "Fake + Special Reach (02H)" 40%, "Fake 1 + Special Reach (03H)" 10%, and "Fake 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 10%. Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when a win is lost, the "Special Reach only (01H)" and "Fake + Special Reach (02H)" patterns are equally likely to be selected (40% of each).

In this way, when a jackpot is won, a relatively long variation pattern is likely to be selected, and the content of the variation presentation when a jackpot occurs is enhanced, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Also, when a jackpot is not won, that is, when a miss occurs, a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected, and the content of the variation presentation when a miss occurs is shortened, allowing the variation presentation to be consumed efficiently.

Note that the fluctuation pattern when a loss occurs is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may also be selected using multiple fluctuation type counters in combination (selecting whether or not to display a warning, etc.).

Returning to FIG. 7, the second win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 250", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (i.e., "250"). Also, when the second win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4.

In the first embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that a ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. There are 149 random number values that can be a winning combination, with the range being "5 to 153." In other words, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153," it is determined to be a winning combination, and the second pattern display device 83 lights up and displays a "circle" symbol as the stopping symbol (second symbol), while the electric device of the first ball entrance 64 is activated, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 250"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 26).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting dynamic displays and variable effects in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results in the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from a power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 26) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 19) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

The reserved ball number counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the dynamic display (variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S613 in FIG. 25). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable performance) increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S203 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a dynamic display (variable performance) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 22).

The value of the reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 21). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control device 110 by using the reserved ball number command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved dynamic displays (variable performance) without accessing the main control device 110. Also, by sending a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected, even if the reserved ball number of the dynamic display (variable performance) managed by the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

In addition, each time the number of reserved balls managed internally changes, the voice lamp control device 113 sends a display reserved ball number command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls.The display control device 114 displays the reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved ball number command.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 sends a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command includes not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a incremented by 1, but also the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see Figure 7) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the reserved ball number counter 203a.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113 by the reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command before the change performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the change performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change performance is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it is possible to decide whether to execute various types of performance, and to determine the content and execution time (timing) of the "reserved change notice" performance.

It may be configured to transmit the reserved ball count command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the first win random number counter C1, etc. separately. As a command indicating the value of the first win random number counter C1, etc., separate from the reserved ball count command, a reserved ball count command may be generated at the timing of a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the program creation can be facilitated by reusing the programs for the variable pattern command and stop type command for the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory for storing the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) when a start winning is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one start winning (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is a memory for storing data (the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced in processes such as the jackpot lottery and the settings for the dynamic display and variable presentation of the first and third symbol display devices 37 and 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b described above to this reserved ball execution area 203c in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the setting of the variable performance. Note that in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring back to FIG. 7, the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described in detail. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery and to set dynamic display and variable presentation of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

The first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the dynamic display and variable presentation of the first and third symbol display devices 37 and 81 uses the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first type of symbol counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the variable type counter CS1 used for determining the variable pattern. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry).

The reserved ball storage area 203b is made up of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) includes a first win random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter storage area 203b2 that stores the value of the first win type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the first embodiment, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are provided in one reserved ball storage area 203b, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As mentioned above, the reserved ball storage area 203b stores up to four pieces of data (the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1) obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), and in this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved areas 1-4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to an older initial entry is stored, and the reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest initial entry.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Like the reserved ball storage area 203b, this reserved ball execution area 203c is provided with a first win random number counter storage area 203c1 that stores the value of the first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter storage area 203c2 that stores the value of the first win type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it shifts the data (the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b to each of the areas 203c1-203c4 of this reserved ball execution area 203c. The data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is then referenced in the variable start process (see Figure 23), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data, while a variable pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variable pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the random number value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Similarly, it shifts the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the reserved ball storage area 203b to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. Note that in this embodiment, data shifting is only performed for the reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the reserved ball storage area 203b where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in reserved ball storage area 203b. For example, assume that the value of reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable performance, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of reserved ball storage area 203b. In this state, when the data in reserved area 1 is shifted to reserved ball execution area 203c and reserved area 1 becomes empty, MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data in reserved area 2 is shifted to reserved area 1, the data in reserved area 3 is shifted to reserved area 2, and the data in reserved area 4 is shifted to reserved area 3.

For example, if the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area and ends the data shifting. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each data in the reserved areas (2nd to 4th) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the reserved areas (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create programs.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will continue. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable effects and continuous preview effects.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 425 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance mode, such as "Super Reach".

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the presentation mode of a "Super Reach", a frame button operation command is sent to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, referring to FIG. 15, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a reserve change table 222e, and a scenario table 222f as fixed value data. Of these tables 222a to 222f, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 executes a read-ahead process based on the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 upon the start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, as well as the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, this pre-reading process determines what the pending variable performance that was the subject of the pre-reading process will result in (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) before the variable performance is executed, and executes control to decide whether to execute various performances, and to determine the performance content and execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice." Details of the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 is provided with at least a change start flag 223a, a sub reserved ball count counter 223b, a reserved change counter 223c, a scenario counter 223d, a reserved information storage area 223e, and an execution information storage area 223f.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag that indicates that a fluctuation performance should be started when it is in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned ON, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1207 in FIG. 29). It is then turned OFF when the fluctuation performance is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S1401 in FIG. 31). When this fluctuation start flag 223a is turned ON, if there is a waiting fluctuation performance, the MPU 221 performs a fluctuation performance process (see FIG. 31) to execute the waiting fluctuation performance.

The sub reserved ball number counter 223b, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, is a variable performance (dynamic display) performed on the third pattern display unit 81 (first pattern display unit 37), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the reserved ball count based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball count using the sub reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 in the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 is incremented, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the incremented value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 contained in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance reserved in the main control device 110) in the sub reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1301 in Figure 30).

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and when the mode of the variable presentation in the third pattern display device 81 is set in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, it decrements the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 31). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b according to the command sent from the main control device 110 in conjunction with the update of the reserved ball count counter 203a, so that the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b can be updated in synchronization with the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110.

The value of the sub reserved ball counter 223b is used to display the reserved patterns in the third pattern display device 81. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command and stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the sub reserved ball number counter 223b, or when it receives a variable pattern command and updates the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b, it sends a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1313 in FIG. 30 or S1412 in FIG. 31).

The value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b is also referenced to determine the timing of executing the "reserve change notice" when the "reserve change notice" described below is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in the reserve display setting process (see FIG. 30) described below that the "reserve change notice" is to be executed, the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b is referenced when determining the timing of executing the "reserve change notice" using the scenario counter 223d and scenario table 222f described below, to determine the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at that time.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for displaying the number of reserved balls, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the reserved balls indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the sub reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable performance is pending.

The pending change counter 223c is a counter that draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a "pending change notice" on the pending and executed symbols in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, the "pending change notice" is configured to be able to change the display color of the pending and executed symbols from the normal display mode of white to "blue" for a blue display mode, "red" for a red display mode, or "rainbow" for a rainbow display mode.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a look-ahead process based on the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 in response to the reserved ball count command received from the main control device 110, and based on the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c and the change pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead process, the presentation mode of the change presentation indicated by the reserved ball count command is grasped, and based on that presentation mode, a lottery is performed using the reserved change counter 223c and the reserved change table 222e to determine whether or not to perform a "reserve change notice."

In the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, the reserved change counter 223c is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values of "0 to 99"). The value of the reserved change counter 223c is updated (e.g., incremented by one) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the presentation mode of the variable presentation indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and the reserved change counter 223c value and the reserved change table 222e are referenced based on the presentation mode to determine whether to execute the "reserved change notice" and the display mode (see S1303 in FIG. 30).

Now, with reference to FIG. 16, the reserve change table 222e will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a schematic example of the reserve change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it refers to the reserve change table 222e based on the value of the reserve change counter 223c at that time, and determines whether or not to perform a "reserve change notice" and the display mode of the "reserve change notice." As shown in FIG. 16, the reserve change table 222e is divided into groups based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, they are divided into "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a miss occurs, "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode when a miss occurs, "normal reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs, "super reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs, "special reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs, "normal reach" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, "super reach" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, "special reach" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, and "special variation" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs. Each divided group is associated with a possible value of the reserved change counter 223c.

In the reserve change table 222e, for the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a miss occurs, two display modes are available for selection: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue", in which the color changes to blue, and the value of the reserve change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In the first embodiment, if "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change, is selected, the "reserve change notice" is not executed.

The value of the reserved change counter 223c is not associated with the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a miss occurs, so that the display modes of "red" in which the reserved or executed symbol changes color to red, and "rainbow" in which the reserved or executed symbol changes color to rainbow, are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the reserved or executed symbol is "red" in the "reserved change notice", it is determined that the "super reach or higher" presentation mode will be executed in the variable presentation indicated by the reserved or executed symbol. Also, if the reserved or executed symbol is "rainbow" in the "reserved change notice", it is determined that the "jackpot display" will appear in the variable presentation indicated by the reserved or executed symbol. Therefore, in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode in which the "super reach or higher" and "jackpot display" do not appear, the "red" or "rainbow" of the "reserved change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the reserve change counter 223c in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a miss occurs is associated with the "reserve change notice" as "0-98" for "none" and "99" for "blue." Note that since no value is assigned to "red" and "rainbow," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected for a miss, the "hold change notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "none" 99% of the time, "blue" 1%, and "red" and "rainbow" 0% of the time.

Therefore, when the "Hold Change Notice" is selected during a "non-reach (shortened)" period when you lose, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (99%), making it difficult for the "Hold Change Notice" to occur.

In the reserved change table 222e, for the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode when a win occurs, two display modes are available for selection: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue", in which the color changes to blue, and the value of the reserved change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. Note that in the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode when a win occurs, the "super reach or higher" and "jackpot display" do not appear, just like the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a win occurs. For this reason, the value of the reserved change counter 223c is not associated so that the display modes of "red", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol changes to red, and "rainbow", in which the color of the rainbow symbol changes to rainbow, cannot be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the reserve change counter 223c in the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode when a miss occurs is associated with the "reserve change notice" as "0-98" for "none" and "99" for "blue." Note that since no value is assigned to "red" and "rainbow," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is selected for a miss, the "hold change notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "none" 99% of the time, "blue" 1%, and "red" and "rainbow" 0% of the time.

Therefore, when the "Hold Change Notice" is selected during the "Non-Reach (Normal)" presentation mode when you lose, the "None" display mode is selected most likely (99%), making it difficult for the "Hold Change Notice" to occur.

In the reserved change table 222e, for the "normal reach" presentation mode when a win is lost, two display modes are available for selection: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue", in which the color changes to blue, and the value of the reserved change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. Note that in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a win is lost, the "super reach or higher" and "jackpot display" do not appear, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode when a win is lost. For this reason, the value of the reserved change counter 223c is not associated so that the display modes of "red", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol changes to red, and "rainbow", in which the color changes to rainbow, cannot be selected.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserve change counter 223c in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs is associated with the "reserve change notice" as "0 to 79" for "none" and "80 to 99" for "blue." Note that since no value is assigned to "red" and "rainbow," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected for a miss, the "hold change notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "none" display mode 80%, "blue" display mode 20%, and "red" and "rainbow" display modes 0%.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is on a miss, the "None" display mode is more likely to be selected (80%), but the "Blue" display mode is more likely to be selected (1% → 20%) than the "Non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode on a miss and the "Non-reach (normal)" presentation mode on a miss.

In the reserved change table 222e, three display modes are available for the "Super Reach" performance mode when a win occurs: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), "blue", in which the color changes to blue, and "red", in which the color changes to red. The reserved change counter 223c value is associated with each display mode. In the "Super Reach" performance mode when a win occurs, as in the "Non-reach (shortened)" performance mode when a win occurs, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the reserved change counter 223c value is not associated so that the display mode of the reserved or executed symbol changing to rainbow colors is not selected. On the other hand, in the "Super Reach" performance mode when a win occurs, the variable element of the "Super Reach" is executed, so the reserved change counter 223c value is associated so that the display mode of "red", which suggests "Super Reach or higher", is selected.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the correspondence between the value of the reserved change counter 223c and the "reserved change notice" in the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a win is missed is "0-19" for "none," "20-89" for "blue," and "90-99" for "red." Note that since no value is assigned to "rainbow," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a miss, the "Hold Change Notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "None" display mode 20%, "Blue" display mode 70%, "Red" display mode 10%, and "Rainbow" display mode 0%.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Super Reach" performance mode when a miss occurs, the "Blue" display mode is set to be more likely to be selected (70%) than the "None" display mode. In addition, the "Red" display mode, which has a higher chance of winning than the "Blue" display mode, is also set to be selectable.

In the reserved change table 222e, three display modes are available for the "special reach" performance mode when a miss occurs: "none (white)" in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change, "blue" in which the color changes to blue, and "red" in which the color changes to red. The reserved change counter 223c value is associated with each display mode. In the "special reach" performance mode when a miss occurs, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode when a miss occurs, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the reserved change counter 223c value is not associated so that the display mode of the reserved or executed symbol changing to rainbow colors, "rainbow," is not selected. On the other hand, in the "special reach" performance mode when a miss occurs, the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, so the reserved change counter 223c value is associated so that the display mode of "red," which suggests "super reach or higher," is selected.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserved change counter 223c in the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a win occurs corresponds to the "reserved change notice" as follows: "0-9" for "none," "10-49" for "blue," and "50-99" for "red." Note that since no value is assigned to "rainbow," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a miss, the "Hold Change Notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "None" display mode 10%, "Blue" display mode 40%, "Red" display mode 50%, and "Rainbow" display mode 0%.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Special Reach" presentation mode when you lose, the "red" display mode is set to be more likely (50%) to be selected than the "blue" or "none" display modes.

In the reserved change table 222e, three display modes are available for selection for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), "blue", in which the color changes to blue, and "rainbow", in which the color changes to rainbow. Each display mode is associated with a reserved change counter 223c value. Note that in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, since "super reach or higher" does not appear, no reserved change counter 223c value is associated so that the "red" display mode, in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol changes to red, is not selected.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserved change counter 223c in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot corresponds to the "reserved change notice" as follows: "0-9" for "none," "10-89" for "blue," and "90-99" for "rainbow." Note that since no value is assigned to "red," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected for the big win, the "hold change notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "none" display mode 10%, "blue" display mode 80%, "red" display mode 0%, and "rainbow" display mode 10%.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Normal Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the "Blue" display mode is likely to be selected (80%), and the "Rainbow" display mode is also likely to be selected (10%), so the "Hold Change Notice" is set to occur easily.

In the reserved change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection as the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs: "None", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"); "Blue", in which the color changes to blue; "Red", in which the color changes to red; and "Rainbow", in which the color changes to rainbow. Each display mode is associated with a value of the reserved change counter 223c.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserved change counter 223c in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot is associated with the "reserved change notice" as follows: "0-9" for "none," "10-39" for "blue," "40-89" for "red," and "90-99" for "rainbow."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a jackpot, the "Hold Change Notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "None" display mode 10%, "Blue" display mode 30%, "Red" display mode 50%, and "Rainbow" display mode 10% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the "red" display mode is likely to be selected (40%), the "blue" display mode is also likely to be selected (30%), and the "rainbow" display mode is also likely to be selected (10%), so the "Hold Change Notice" is set to occur easily.

In the reserved change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection as the "special reach" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"); "blue", in which the color changes to blue; "red", in which the color changes to red; and "rainbow", in which the color changes to rainbow. Each display mode is associated with a value of the reserved change counter 223c.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserve change counter 223c in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot corresponds to the "reserve change notice" as follows: "0-9" for "none," "10-19" for "blue," "20-89" for "red," and "90-99" for "rainbow."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a jackpot, the "Hold Change Notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "None" display mode 10%, "Blue" display mode 10%, "Red" display mode 70%, and "Rainbow" display mode 10% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot, the "red" display mode is likely to be selected (70%), and also the "blue" display mode is likely to be selected (10%), and furthermore, the "rainbow" display mode is also likely to be selected (10%), so the "Hold Change Notice" is set to occur easily.

In the reserved change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection as the "special change" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs: "none", in which the color of the reserved or executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white"); "blue", in which the color changes to blue; "red", in which the color changes to red; and "rainbow", in which the color changes to rainbow. Each display mode is associated with a value of the reserved change counter 223c.

In the example shown in Figure 16, the value of the reserved change counter 223c in the "special change" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot corresponds to the "reserved change notice" as follows: "0-69" for "none," "70-79" for "blue," "80-89" for "red," and "90-99" for "rainbow."

In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected during a jackpot (when a "2R special jackpot" is won), the "hold change notice" is set to be selected in the following proportions: "none" display mode 70%, "blue" display mode 10%, "red" display mode 10%, and "rainbow" display mode 10%.

Therefore, in the "Hold Change Notice" that is selected during the "Special Change" presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, the "none" display mode is selected most often (70%), and the "blue," "red," and "rainbow" display modes are also set to be selected equally often (10%), so that the "Hold Change Notice" is unlikely to occur, but when it does occur, it is set to be selected almost equally often.

Therefore, the probability of the "reserve change notice" appearing when a player misses is, for example, when the number of reserved balls during the "normal game state" is one, i.e., when the presentation mode is selected by table A 202d1, the "reserve change notice" is selected at a rate of 91.05% for "none" (no change), 7.65% for "blue", and 1.3% for "red". Also, the probability of the "reserve change notice" appearing when a player wins a jackpot is, for example, when a "15R special jackpot" is won, i.e., when the presentation mode is selected by table C 202d3, the "reserve change notice" is selected at a rate of 10% for "none" (no change), 20.5% for "blue", 59.5% for "red", and 10% for "rainbow". Therefore, if the third symbol is selected as the jackpot, then "red" or "rainbow" will likely be selected from the "reserve change notice" and "none" or "blue" will likely be selected, whereas if the jackpot is lost, then "none" or "blue" will likely be selected and "red" will likely be selected (if the jackpot is lost, "rainbow" will not be selected).

In this way, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the success or failure of the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball number command and the performance mode when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, and to determine whether or not to execute the "reserved change notice" and the display mode based on the success or failure and the performance mode. By configuring it in this way, the result of the variable performance is suggested to the player by the reserved pattern before the variable performance is executed, and the player can predict whether the reserved variable performance will be a jackpot until the variable performance is executed, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The reserved ball change information of the "reserved ball change notice" determined (selected) based on the reserved ball change table 222e and the value of the reserved ball change counter 223c is stored in the reserved ball change information storage area 223e5 (see FIG. 19) of the reserved ball information storage area 223e described later, which is indicated by the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "reserved ball change notice" is executed on the reserved ball pattern or the execution ball pattern based on the reserved ball change information stored in the reserved ball change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data described later.

Returning to FIG. 15 for further explanation, the scenario counter 223d is a counter for determining the execution timing of the determined "reserve change notice." As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether to execute the "reserve change notice" and the display mode based on the reserved ball count command received from the main control device 110. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is determined to execute the "reserve change notice," the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f.

In the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, this scenario counter 223d is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values of "0 to 99"). The value of the scenario counter 223d is updated (e.g., incremented by one) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the presentation mode of the variable presentation indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and the execution of the "reserved change notice" and the display mode are determined based on the presentation mode. Then, when the execution of the "reserved change notice" is determined, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f are referenced to determine the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

Now, referring to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the scenario table 222f will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the execution of the "reserve change notice" is decided, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f to determine the execution timing of the "reserve change notice". In this case, even if it is the same "reserve change notice (e.g., "blue")", the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" at the time of a miss is made different from the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" at the time of a jackpot, so that the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the execution timing of the "reserve change notice". FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot scenario table 222f1.

In the scenario table 222f1 for big wins in FIG. 17, the vertical rows are divided into a total of 12 situation patterns, which are divided into the display mode of the "reserve change notice" for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of reserved balls "1" to "4") at the time when the "reserve change notice" is determined, and the three patterns are "blue", "red", and "rainbow". In addition, the horizontal rows are divided into a total of eight timing patterns, which are four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4") and four patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reaching", "after reaching", or "after clearing reserved" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the execution of the corresponding variable performance). The possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, the "Hold Change Notice" is set so that the display mode of the determined "Hold Change Notice" is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns.

Specifically, for example, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is "0" reserved balls and "at the start" is selected, the "reserve change notice" is executed at the start of the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice." Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is "0" reserved balls and "before reach" is selected, the "reserve change notice" is executed during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" and before the "reach display" appears (for example, during the execution of the variable element of "high-speed change" or when the left pattern row Z1 stops during the execution of the variable element of "slow-speed change"). Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is "0" reserved balls and "after reach" is selected, the "reserve change notice" is executed during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" and during the execution of the "reach display" (for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach"). In addition, if the timing for executing the "Hold Change Notice" is "0" reserved balls and "After Reserve Clearance" is selected, the "Hold Change Notice" will be executed during the variable performance in the variable performance in which the "Hold Change Notice" was determined and at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the variable element of the "Special Reach" is executed (before the variable element of the "Re-Change" is executed).

Also, for example, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "1", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 or when it is shifted. Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "2", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the second reserved pattern display area Db2 or when it is shifted. Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "3", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3 or when it is shifted. In addition, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected to be the number of reserved balls "4", the "reserve change notice" will be executed when the reserved pattern indicating the change performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a "reserved change notice" is held in the sound lamp control device 113, and it is decided whether or not to execute the "reserved change notice". When it is decided to execute the "reserved change notice", first, the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "reserved change notice" are grasped. Then, when the change performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is a jackpot, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "reserved change notice" at the time of the jackpot is decided by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" and each display mode of the "reserved change notice," and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 17).

First, as shown in the example of Figure 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5 to 9" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "15 to 49" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, and "50 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 35%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed symbol or reserved symbol corresponding to the variable performance of the jackpot is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the timing when the reserved symbol is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%), followed by the timing when the reserved symbol is redisplayed after being erased in the cockpit display area Db due to a variable element of the "super reach" or the like (35%).

In the first embodiment, when the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is determined, the presentation mode of the corresponding variable performance is not determined. Therefore, for example, even if the execution timing of "after the reserve is cleared" is selected, if the variable performance is a "normal reach" presentation mode, a situation may occur in which the "reserve change notice" cannot be performed at the execution timing of "after the reserve is cleared". However, in such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the presentation mode is such that the "reserve change notice" cannot be performed at the determined execution timing, it is configured to change to another execution timing that can be performed (for example, "after reach") (see FIG. 32). Therefore, if the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" is won, the "reserve change notice" can be reliably executed at any timing. Therefore, even if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is determined without understanding the presentation mode of the variable performance, the "reserve change notice" can be reliably executed, which can increase the interest of the game. Details of the change control will be described later.

Next, as shown in the example of Figure 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 89" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 60%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the changing performance of the jackpot is set to be most likely to be selected (60%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "red" and when the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db is erased by a "super reach" or the like and then redisplayed.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5-9" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "10-49" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" does not appear with the reserved symbol, and can only appear with the executed symbol, so in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing with "1" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 40%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 50%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed) 0%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "reserved change notice" of the executed pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set to be most likely to be selected (50%) when the reserved pattern is redisplayed after being erased in the cockpit display area Db by a "super reach" or the like, and next most likely to be selected (40%) when the "reach display" is in progress. Note that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserved change notice" at the time of a jackpot is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time of determination of the "reserved change notice". Therefore, a description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserved change notice" at the time of a jackpot when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination of the "reserved change notice" is "2" to "4" will be omitted.

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "2". In this case, reserved balls of "3" or "4" do not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, reserved patterns for "3" or "4" reserved balls will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of Figure 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5 to 9" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "15 to 39" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 49" for "1" reserved ball, and "50 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 25%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set to be most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue" at the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed, and next most likely to be selected (25%) when the reserved pattern is redisplayed after being erased in the cockpit display area Db by a "super reach" or the like.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "30-79" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "80-89" for "1" reserved ball, and "90-99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 50%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the changing performance of the jackpot is set so that it is most likely (50%) to be selected when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", and when the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db is erased by a "super reach" or the like and then redisplayed.

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5-9" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "10-14" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "15-29" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "1" reserved ball, "40-49" for "2" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 15%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%), followed by the timing when the reserved pattern is redisplayed after being erased in the cockpit display area Db by a "super reach" or the like (15%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "30-69" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "70-79" for "1" reserved ball, "80-89" for "2" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 40%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the changing performance of the jackpot is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "red," and when the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db is erased by a "super reach" or the like and then redisplayed.

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5-9" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "10-14" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "15-19" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "1" reserved ball, "30-39" for "2" reserved balls, "40-49" for "3" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reservation is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing of the reserved pattern display is most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of decision is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "30-59" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "60-69" for "1" reserved ball, "70-79" for "2" reserved balls, "80-89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 10% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 30% after the reservation is cleared with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "3" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), and 10% for "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the changing performance of the jackpot is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", and when the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db is erased by a "super reach" or the like and then redisplayed.

In this way, when a "reserved change notice" is made for the reserved symbols and execution symbols that indicate a variable performance that will generate a jackpot, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased by a "super reach" or the like, and the "reserved change notice" is configured to appear (execute) at the timing when the performance of the "super reach" ends and the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object, and makes it possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object, compared to when a notice is given by directly changing the notice object (change object; in the first embodiment, the execution symbol) that is always visible, or when a notice object is given by making a new notice object appear. By temporarily making the predicted object invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly related to the game value (for example, a jackpot), providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by allocating the timing of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the variable presentation (after "reach" or "after hold deletion"), the player can be made to play while hoping for the occurrence (appearance) of the "hold change notice" which increases the likelihood of a jackpot even in the latter half of the variable presentation. Therefore, the player can be made to play while hoping for a jackpot until the latter half of the variable presentation, which can provide interest to the player for a long period of time.

Next, the failure scenario table 222f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the failure scenario table 222f2. In the failure scenario table 222f2 in FIG. 18, similar to the big win scenario table 222f1, for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) in the variable performance at the time when the vertical row determines the "reserved change notice", each number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 situation patterns divided according to the display mode of the "reserved change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "reserved change notice" is divided into a total of eight different timing patterns: four patterns at the time of display or shift for each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4"), and four patterns at the time of "start (shift)", "before reaching", "after reaching", or "after clearing reserved balls" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the corresponding change performance). Each of these divided groups is then associated with a possible value of the scenario counter 223d.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the scenario table for losses 222f2, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice" and each display mode of the "reserve change notice", and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserve change notice" suggests the occurrence of a jackpot when it appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table for losses 222f2, a scenario counter 223d value is not assigned to any of the reserved ball numbers in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice", and therefore a description thereof is omitted.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of Figure 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved balls" with "0" reserved balls, and "30 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have a selection rate of 10% for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 0% for "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls, and 70% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (70%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of decision is "1" and the display mode is "blue."

In the scenario table 222f2 for losing, the scenario counter 223d is not allocated to the execution timing of "after the reserved balls are cleared" when the number of reserved balls is "0". This is because, in order to perform the "reserved ball change notice" at the execution timing of "after the reserved balls are cleared", some kind of performance, such as a variable element of "re-change", must be performed after the performance of "reach display". In the first embodiment, after the "reach display" is performed, the performance of the variable element of "re-change" is not performed except in the case of a jackpot, and the "losing display" is confirmed. Therefore, in the losing change performance, since the variable element of "re-change" that confirms the jackpot is not performed after the performance of "reach display", if the "reserved ball change notice" is executed at the timing of the re-display of the execution pattern (reserved pattern) after the "reach display", a discrepancy in the performance will occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, it is set not to allocate the scenario counter 223d to the execution timing of "after the reserved balls are cleared".

Next, as shown in the example of Figure 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved balls" with "0" reserved balls, and "60 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have a selection rate of 20% for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, 20% for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 20% for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 0% for "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls, and 40% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "1" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "2". In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of Figure 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "1" reserved ball, and "40 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 0%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 60%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (60%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "2" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 18 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, and "70 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 0%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 30%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "2" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "1" reserved ball, "40-49" for "2" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reservation is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 0%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "3" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, "70 to 79" for "2" reserved balls, and "80 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reserve is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 0%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of the display of the reserved pattern, or the "start," "before the reach," or "after the reach" of the relevant variable performance is set to be easily selected (20% each) for the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the variable performance when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined to be a miss is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "1" reserved ball, "40-49" for "2" reserved balls, "50-59" for "3" reserved balls, and "60-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 10% for "start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, 0% for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), 10% for "3" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), and 40% for "4" reserved symbol (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20-39" for "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "40-59" for "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "-" for "after clearing reserved" with "0" reserved balls, "60-69" for "1" reserved ball, "70-79" for "2" reserved balls, "80-89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reservation is cleared" with "0" reserved balls 0%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "3" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved patterns are displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variable performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red," the "start," "before the reach" or "after the reach" of the variable performance is likely to be selected (20% each).

In this way, by varying the execution timing (appearance timing) of the same "hold change notice (e.g., "blue") when the variable presentation fails and when a jackpot occurs, the likelihood of a jackpot can be made different by the display mode of the "hold change notice" and the timing at which it appears. Therefore, the suggestion of the likelihood of a jackpot by the "hold change notice" can be diversified depending on the display mode and appearance timing of the "hold change notice," making the game more interesting.

Returning to FIG. 15 for further explanation, the reserved information storage area 223e is an area for storing information for performing the look-ahead process, i.e., the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1, which are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, reserved change information indicating the display mode of the "reserved change notice," scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "reserved change notice," reserved deletion information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the change performance, and re-change information indicating whether a "re-change" is performed in the change performance.

The voice lamp control device 113 executes a look-ahead process (a hold display setting process (see FIG. 30)) using the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a-222d stored in the ROM 222. The voice lamp control device 113 also stores the hold change information, scenario data, hold deletion information and re-change information obtained by the look-ahead process in the hold change information storage area 223e5, scenario data storage area 223e6, hold deletion information storage area 223e7 and re-change information storage area 223e8 of the hold information storage area 223e, respectively, and executes a "hold change notice" based on the values stored in each of the areas 223e5-223e8.

The execution information storage area 223f is an area for storing information for performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, namely, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1, which are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, reserved change information indicating the display mode of the "reserved change notice," scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "reserved change notice," reserved deletion information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable performance, and re-change information indicating whether a "re-change" is performed in the variable performance.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the information for performing the variable performance (the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage area of the pending information storage area 223e described above to this execution information storage area 223f in order to execute the settings for the variable performance, etc.

Here, the details of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f will be described with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. The pending information storage area 223e has four areas, pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first to fourth reserved information storage areas includes at least a first winning random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, a first winning type counter storage area 223e2 in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a change type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the change type counter CS1 is stored, a reserved change information storage area 223e5 in which reserved change information indicating the display mode of the "reserved change notice" is stored, a scenario data storage area 223e6 in which scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is stored, a reserved deletion information storage area 223e7 in which reserved deletion information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the change performance is stored, and a re-change information storage area 223e8 in which re-change information indicating whether or not a "re-change" is performed in the change performance is stored.

The execution information storage area 223f is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the currently executing change performance, pending change information indicating the display mode of the "pending change notice," scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "pending change notice," pending clearing information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is cleared in the change performance, and re-change information indicating whether a "re-change" is performed in the change performance.

The first to fourth reserved information storage areas are areas for storing the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to up to four reserved change effects, reserved change information indicating the display mode of the "reserved change notice," scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "reserved change notice," reserved deletion information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the change effect, and re-change information indicating whether a "re-change" is performed in the change effect.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed, the first pending information storage area is an area corresponding to the first pending variable performance in terms of time among the pending variable performances, the second pending information storage area is an area corresponding to the second oldest pending variable performance in terms of time among the pending variable performances, the third pending information storage area is an area corresponding to the third oldest pending variable performance in terms of time among the pending variable performances, and the fourth pending information storage area is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest pending variable performance in terms of time among the pending variable performances.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 from the reserved ball number command. The voice lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 in the random number counter storage area 223e1, the first winning type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variable type counter storage area 223e4, which are areas among the first to fourth reserved information storage areas that correspond to the reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball count command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects reserved at that time is X, and the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command correspond to the variable effect that was reserved Xth in time among the reserved variable effects, so the values of counters C1-C3, CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area 223e1-223e4 in the reserved information storage area X are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the reserved area X of the reserved ball storage area 203b. In other words, the same values as the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the reserved area X of the main control unit 110 are stored in the reserved information storage area X.

The voice lamp control device 113 also performs a look-ahead process (a hold display setting process (see FIG. 30)) based on the values stored in the counter storage areas 223e1-223e4 of the hold information storage X area, and stores the hold change information, scenario data, hold deletion information, and re-change information generated based on the results of this look-ahead process in the storage areas 223e5-223e8 of the same hold information storage X area. That is, in each hold information storage X area, it is stored whether or not a "hold change notice" will be executed in each change performance, the execution timing if a "hold change notice" is executed, whether or not each change performance includes a performance in which the cockpit display area Db is deleted, and whether or not a "re-change" will be executed in each change performance.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a change performance from the main control device 110, it executes a shift process in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. In other words, the number of pending change performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first pending change performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage first area corresponding to the first pending change performance are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the currently executing change performance.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the first pending information storage area, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the second pending information storage area, and the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control unit 110. Also, the first to fourth reserved information storage areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. In other words, in the voice lamp control unit 113, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and on hold in the main control unit 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (reserved display setting process (see FIG. 30)), it obtains the number of reserved variable effects (reserved ball count) from the sub reserved ball count counter 223b. Then, based on the reserved ball count, it reads ahead the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 in which the variable effects are reserved, and judges whether or not the variable effects will be a jackpot, the variable time, etc. For example, if the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b is "1", the number of reserved balls for the variable effects is one, so it reads ahead the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved information storage area 1 and makes a judgment. Also, if the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b is "4", the number of reserved balls for the variable effects is four, so it reads ahead the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved information storage area 4 and makes a judgment.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 cannot access the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. In contrast, the voice lamp control device 113 provides a reserved information storage area 223e, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable performance reserved in the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. By referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in this reserved information storage area 223e, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process. In other words, if a reserved variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big win or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) can be judged before the variable performance is executed, and the execution of various performances can be decided, and the voice lamp control device 113 can execute control regarding the execution mode and execution timing of the "reserved change notice".

The above-mentioned shift process in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f moves (shifts) data only for the areas corresponding to the pending variable performance among the pending information storage areas 1 to 4, based on the number of pending balls when the variable pattern command and the stop type command are received (the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b before the update based on the reception of the variable pattern command and the stop type command).

For example, assume that the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4" and data is stored in all areas of the reserved information storage area 223e (reserved information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, the data in the reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the reserved information storage area 1, the data in the reserved information storage area 3 is shifted to the reserved information storage area 2, and the data in the reserved information storage area 4 is shifted to the reserved information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and the data in the reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the reserved information storage area 1, and the data shifting is completed. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the reserved information storage areas 3 and 4, where no variable performance is reserved, so that the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each data in the first to fourth pending information storage areas may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223f or the first to third pending information storage areas). In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (pending) in each of the first to fourth pending information storage areas, which makes it easier to create programs.

Referring back to FIG. 15 for further explanation, the RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to those commands is performed.

The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern variation and continuous preview performances on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input port 238 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 receives from the voice lamp control device 113 a command indicating the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The input port 238 is also connected to the MPU 231, program ROM 232, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via a bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a video RAM 236 and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different probability of winning a jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third pattern display device 81 based on commands input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs.

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite, such as the designs (background designs and decorative designs) displayed on the third design display device 81, is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the image data is stored in a compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of approximately 1024 MB, and this approximately 1024 MB of image data is compressed to approximately 768 MB and stored in the character storage area 234a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having a frame buffer area for storing one frame of an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the area being equivalent to two frames.

The image controller 237 generates one frame's worth of image data according to the drawing list and writes it to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, while reading out the one frame's worth of image data written to the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and outputs the read out image data to the third pattern display device 81 via the output port 239, thereby causing multiple frame images to be displayed consecutively on the third pattern display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprites specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, processes it according to the drawing information specified in the drawing list, and writes the image data of the sprites to one of the frame buffer areas of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing the image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, the image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

The writing of one frame's worth of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame's worth of image data from the other frame buffer area are carried out in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, once the reading of one frame's worth of image data from the other frame buffer area is completed, the reading of the one frame's worth of image data that was previously written from one frame buffer area is carried out, while the next frame's worth of image data is written to the other frame buffer area.

In this way, by alternately writing image data to and reading image data from one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, multiple frame images can be displayed consecutively on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 20 to 26. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up process (see Figure 25) that is started when the power is turned on, main process (see Figure 26) that is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process (see Figure 20) that is started periodically (every 4 millisecond period in the first embodiment), and NMI interrupt process (see Figure 24) that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, followed by the start-up process and main process.

Figure 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Timer interrupt processing is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt processing by the MPU 201, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and main processing, commands to be sent to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. In the external output process of S101, output data of commands, etc. stored in this command transmission ring buffer is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, the reserved ball count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 21) described below is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 22) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), which is one process of the fluctuation process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the process of S111 described below is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, a large opening opening/closing process is executed to open or close the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when either of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the second symbol display device 83 executes a display control process for the second symbol (for example, a "circle" or "x" symbol) (S105). In simple terms, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the time of passing through, and a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric device associated with the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Also, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of won balls to be sent to the payout control unit 111 is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control unit 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "899", "99", "99", "198", and "250", respectively), they are each cleared to "0". In addition, when the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C4 has completed one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C4, and the initial value is set to the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a process for performing dynamic display by the first symbol display device 37 and a change process for setting a change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then a start winning process associated with winning at the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S110). Details of the change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

After executing the start winning process (S110), the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. Then, when the ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 21, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b. It also executes a process to send the reserved values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 together with the number of reserved balls to the voice lamp control unit 113.

In this initial winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning) (S201). Here, the MPU 201 detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 over three timer interrupt processes based on the output signal of the first ball entry port switch (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball (winning) into the first ball entry port 64, which was read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 20).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there has been an initial entry) (S201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N for the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, if there has been no entry into the first ball entry port 64 (S201: No), or if there has been a entry into the first ball entry port 64 but the number of reserved balls N for operation is not less than 4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if a winning ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N is less than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7), and are reserved (stored) in the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4, which correspond to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a, among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 1. Also, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 2, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "3", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 3, and if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "4", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 4.

Next, in order to send a reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 (reserved ball number N) and the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the process of S204 to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, the reserved ball number command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204, or the values stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the processing of S204 may be read.

Next, referring to FIG. 22, we will explain the variable processing (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this variable processing (S109). The variable processing (S109) controls the dynamic display in the first pattern display device 37 and the variable presentation performed in the third pattern display device 81.

In this variation process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being won (S301). The jackpot period includes the period during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the period during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. If the determination results in a jackpot being won (S301: Yes), this process ends.

If the jackpot is not being won (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is in a dynamic display mode (S302), and if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is not in a dynamic display mode (S302: No), it is then determined whether a predetermined time has passed since the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed since the dynamic display stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). This causes the stopped patterns in the dynamic display (variable performance) to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 for a predetermined time, allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped patterns.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable performance, and first the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is decremented by one (S305). This is because the variable performance start processing (S307) starts the execution of one of the reserved variable performances, thereby decreasing the number of reserved balls by one.

Then, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process shifts the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area 203b sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203c, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203c, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, a change start process is executed for the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process (S307), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball count N) is "0" (S304: No), it is determined whether or not a demo performance is being performed in the third pattern display device 81, i.e., whether or not a demo is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that a demo is in progress until it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball count N) is greater than "0".

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S101 in FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance based on the reception of the display demo command.

As described above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation performance does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a process may be further executed to determine whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation has stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo performance.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S311) and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

In the first embodiment, from the start of dynamic display until the change time has elapsed, the display mode is set so that, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on; if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on; if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the variation process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed, and when the counter reaches "100", the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to "0" when the LED color is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopping symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stopping symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. 23. In the variation start process, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if there is a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 determines whether the symbol will be a "15R certain jackpot", a "2R certain jackpot", or a "15R normal jackpot" after the jackpot.

In the first embodiment, if a jackpot is followed by a "15R guaranteed jackpot", a blue LED is turned on, if a jackpot is followed by a "2R guaranteed jackpot", a red LED is turned on, and if a jackpot is followed by a "15R normal jackpot", a red LED and a blue LED are turned on. If a jackpot is missed, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next dynamic display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

When the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopping pattern is set in the processing of S312, a confirmation command is set (S313) to confirm and display the stopping pattern of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the lighting of the LED in the first pattern display device 37, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being executed in the third pattern display device 81. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 and confirm and display the stopping pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the change start process (S307), which is one of the change processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). This change start process (S307) draws a lottery for a jackpot or miss (jackpot lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, and determines the dynamic display and dynamic pattern (change pattern and stop type) of the change presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the fluctuation start process (S307), first, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed (S401) to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see Figure 8 (b)).

Whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 and its relationship to the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state ("normal gaming state" or "time-shortened state"), "7,307,582" is specified as the jackpot random number value. Additionally, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state ("variable probability state"), the following are defined as the jackpot random number values: "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892."

In the process of S401, the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that there is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot as a result of the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8(b)) (S402).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, i.e., whether it is a "15R guaranteed jackpot" that transitions to a "probability variable state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, a "15R normal jackpot" that transitions to a "time-shortened state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, or a "2R guaranteed jackpot" that transitions to a "probability variable state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) at the time of a jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in order to stop displaying various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot type on the third pattern display device 81, the display mode at the time of a jackpot on the third pattern display device 81 is set by setting the jackpot type ("15R special jackpot", "2R special jackpot", "15R normal jackpot") as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a presentation mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time, and from among the selected presentation modes, the variation time of the variation presentation is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a) or (b)) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

If the jackpot type is set to "15R guaranteed jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" in the process of S402, the presentation mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected. That is, in this case, one of the presentation modes of "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" is selected (see FIG. 11(a)).

When the "normal reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E5: normal reach" group in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). That is, in this case, one of the following variation patterns is selected (see FIG. 12): "normal reach only", "pseudo fake + normal reach", "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-variation", or "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-variation". Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 12).

When the "Super Reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E6: Super Reach" group in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). That is, in this case, one of the following variation patterns is selected (see FIG. 12): "Super Reach only", "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach", "Super Reach + Re-variation", "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach + Re-variation", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach + Re-variation", or "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach + Re-variation". Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 12).

When the "Special Reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E7: Special Reach" group in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). That is, in this case, one of the following variation patterns is selected (see FIG. 12): "Special Reach Only", "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach", "Special Reach + Re-Variation", "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach + Re-Variation", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach + Re-Variation", or "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach + Re-Variation". Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 12).

In addition, if the "2R variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the presentation mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4) is selected. In other words, if a "2R variable jackpot" is won, "special variation" is selected without fail. Then, by referring to the selected presentation mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. In the first embodiment, in this case, only "movie" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, if the process of S401 determines that the winning combination is not a jackpot (S401: No), the display mode for a losing combination is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to a losing combination, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a, and the current game state, one of the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, and "special reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the first embodiment, as described above, the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each presentation mode is different depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability variable state", a "time shortened state", or a "normal game state".

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, the variation time until the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 stop and display a loss symbol is determined. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal game state", either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a is selected. Also, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or the "probability variation state", either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a is selected.

If the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in the processing of S404, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E0: non-reach (shortened)" group in the miss variation pattern table 202e2. That is, in this case, "only non-reach (shortened)" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in the processing of S404, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E1: non-reach (normal)" group in the miss variation pattern table 202e2. That is, in this case, "non-reach (normal) only", "pseudo-fake + non-reach (normal)", or "pseudo-consecutive 1 + non-reach (normal)" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "normal reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in the processing of S402, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E2: normal reach" group in the miss variation pattern table 202e2. That is, in this case, "normal reach only", "pseudo false + normal reach" or "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "Super Reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in the processing of S402, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E3: Super Reach" group of the miss variation pattern table 202e2. That is, in this case, "Super Reach only", "Pseudo Fake + Super Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Super Reach" or "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Super Reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "Special Reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in the processing of S402, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "E4: Special Reach" group of the miss variation pattern table 202e2. That is, in this case, "Special Reach Only", "Pseudo Fake + Special Reach", "Pseudo Consecutive 1 + Special Reach" or "Pseudo Consecutive 2 + Special Reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a jackpot occurs and the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a miss occur are determined by the same judgment program using the same random number values C3 and CS1, making it possible to standardize the programs and reduce development man-hours.

In the process of S406, based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 (S406). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and a 30-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E601H" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if a jackpot is not won and a 30-second fluctuation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E301H" is set as the fluctuation pattern command. In this way, even if the fluctuation performance has the same fluctuation time, by setting the success or failure of the fluctuation performance and the rough content of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the content of the performance mode including success or failure and the fluctuation time, and can determine the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance based on that information.

Also, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S407), and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 22). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is a "15R sure-variant jackpot", a stop type command indicating that it is a "15R sure-variant jackpot" is set without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, a "7" symbol, etc.). Also, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is a "15R normal jackpot", a stop type command indicating that it is a "15R normal jackpot" is set without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, a "4" symbol, etc.). Furthermore, if a jackpot is not won and the "super reach" performance mode is selected, a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" performance mode at the time of a miss (so-called a miss before and after) is set without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.). Also, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "737", etc.) is not specified, and a stop type command is set indicating that the "normal reach" presentation mode is a miss (so-called a miss other than before and after). Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" presentation mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "258", etc.) is not specified, and a stop type command is set indicating that the "non-reach" presentation mode is a miss (so-called a complete miss). In this way, by setting the stop type command to a rough stop type based on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the hit or miss, and can determine the detailed stop result of the variable presentation based on that information.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 20) that is executed next, these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command or display type command based on the command and sends it to the display control device 114.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power outage information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S611.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S605: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S607: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S611.

As will be described in S706 of FIG. 26, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in a working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S612, S613).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613) is executed. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power outage information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S607: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S608) while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203. Then, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S609), and processing proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it is ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in RAM 213.

In the process of S610, the interrupt is permitted (S610). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 26) described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S701). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S701: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "899" and "250"), the counter is cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S108 (see FIG. 20) (S703), and the processing proceeds to S701.

While this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 20 is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the display control of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired first jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high probability or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at each time.

The above-mentioned processes of S702 and S703, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using this remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to provide randomness to the update of the first hit random number counter C1 and the second hit random number counter C2, which use these as the initial values for update.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S701 (S701: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 24 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S704 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S704), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S705). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S706), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S701 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processing of S702 and S703, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power outage occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is completed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S701 after the start-up processing (see FIG. 25) is completed. In other words, the processing can be started from the processing of S701, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up processing.

Therefore, in processing when the power is cut off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer saved; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S601), and processing can start from S701. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

In the first embodiment, the periodically executed processes are executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. However, some or all of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 4 milliseconds) in the main process. For example, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), large opening opening/closing process (S103), second pattern control process (S105), and switch reading process (S106) executed by the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step may be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at the predetermined time is executed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the processing to be executed at the predetermined time, but since the time required to execute the processing to be executed at the predetermined time changes depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figs. 27 to 32. The processes of the MPU 221 are broadly divided into start-up processes (see Fig. 27) that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Fig. 28) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S1115 (see FIG. 28) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 28), it executes the power-off processing of S1115. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1115 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1115 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S1115 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No) and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1115 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1115 is executed (see S1114 in FIG. 28). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1115 is executed, so the process of S1008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S1008, this occurs because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S1010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 28, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the processing of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No), the processing of S1102 to S1108 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S1109. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S1101 is that, while S1102 to S1108 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable performance processing of S1109 and the command determination processing of S1110 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1110 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1109 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that one millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1111 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying the user by the power-on notification process.

Next, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1105). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the fluctuation performance is not being executed or during a "high-speed fluctuation" period, a process to change the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114 instead of the frame button operation command. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 performs a process to change the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the fluctuation performance, pressing the frame button 22 can display the expected value of a jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display" can change the performance to one that gives a sense of expectation for a jackpot, or the frame button 22 can be used as a decision button to select one of multiple reach performances. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1105) is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S1106), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1107, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1107 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S1109, in order to display a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable performance process is executed, which is a process for starting a variable performance based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Details of this variable performance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After the variable performance process, a command determination process is executed (S1110) in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In S1111, a counter update process is executed to update the pending change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1111). Specifically, the pending change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are reset to their maximum values (in the first embodiment, both are set to "99").
"), each counter 223c, 223d is cleared to "0". As described above, the pending change counter 223c is used to execute the "pending change notice" and select the display mode, and the scenario counter 223d is used to select the execution timing of the "pending change notice".

After the processing of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1112). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S1114), and the power outage processing is executed (S1115). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S1116), and the processing is then executed in an infinite loop. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1113), and if RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1113: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred, and he or she can call a hall attendant or the like and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S1110), the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is first read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed to determine whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1202). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on that variation pattern, a display variation pattern command is set that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern (S1203), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation performance of the variation pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). Then, if it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S1203: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on that stop type, a display stop type command is set that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation performance (S1206), the fluctuation start flag 223a is set to ON (S1207), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the variable performance executed by the display variable pattern command set by the process of S1206, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

The stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends a fluctuation pattern command when starting a fluctuation performance, as a command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation performance whose fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a on by the processing of S1206, in the fluctuation performance processing that is executed later, a determination is made as to whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. Also, a determination is made as to whether or not the stop type of the fluctuation performance extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the fluctuation performance extracted from the received stop type command. If, as a result of these determinations, in one variation presentation, the variation pattern based on the reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, or the stop type based on the reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality has occurred (for example, an abnormality in command reception due to noise), and a display error command indicating the abnormality is generated and processing is performed to send it to the display control device 114 (see Figure 31).

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1204 that a stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1208). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (S1208: Yes), a reserved display setting process is performed (S1209) and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In this reserved display setting process (S1209), control is performed regarding the "reserved change notice" based on various information contained in the received reserved ball count command (e.g., the value of the first winning random number counter C1, etc.). Details of this reserved display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1208 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S1208: No), it is then determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1210). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being executed by the third pattern display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1210: Yes), a display confirmation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the confirmation command has been received (S1211), and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1002 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variable presentation being performed by the third pattern display device 81, and displays the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command, thereby displaying the confirmation.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1210 (S1210: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 28). For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1212, temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1002 in FIG. 28).

Now, referring to FIG. 30, the pending display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pending display setting process (S1209). In this pending display setting process (S1209), first, the value of the pending ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110 contained in the received pending ball count command (i.e., the number of pending balls for the pending variable performance) is extracted, and this is stored in the sub pending ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1301).

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), so that each time there is an initial entry, the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to match the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 by processing in S1301. Therefore, even if the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 when the initial entry is detected.

Next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball number command are extracted and stored in the reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 (see FIG. 19) of the reserved information storage area 223e corresponding to the reserved ball number extracted from the reserved ball number command by the processing of S1301 (S1302). That is, when the reserved ball number is X (1≦X≦4), the extracted values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 are stored in the first winning random number counter storage area 223e1, the first winning type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the change type counter storage area 223e4 of the reserved information storage area X, respectively.

The values of counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), and if the reserved ball count included in the reserved ball count command is X, it is the value stored in the reserved Xth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. In other words, the reserved information storage area 223e of the voice lamp control unit 113 stores the same information (the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) as the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. The voice lamp control unit 113 is able to perform look-ahead processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in this reserved information storage area 223e. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine before the execution of the pending change performance what the result of the change performance will be if it is executed (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.), and can control the execution of various types of performance, determine whether or not to execute a "pending change notice" and the display mode, and determine the timing of execution (start) of the "pending change notice."

Next, in the process of S1303, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command (S1303). As described above, the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" extracts the winning or losing of the variable presentation indicated by the reserved ball count command and the presentation mode based on the values of each counter C1-C3 and CS1 stored in each counter storage area 223e1-223e4 of the reserved information storage area X. Then, based on the extracted winning or losing and presentation mode, the value of the reserved change counter 223c at that time and the reserved change table 222e (see Figure 16) are referenced to determine whether or not to execute the "reserve change notice" and the display mode.

If the result of the processing of S1303 is that the lottery for executing the "Hold Change Notice" has been won (S1303: Yes), the hold change information indicating the display mode (e.g., "blue") that is the result of the lottery for executing the "Hold Change Notice" is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the hold information storage area X (S1304). This makes it possible to store whether or not to execute the "Hold Change Notice" for each hold information storage area X.

Next, in the process of S1304, in order to determine the execution timing of the "reserved change notice", i.e., the display timing at which the "reserved change notice" is reflected in the executed symbol or reserved symbol, the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is determined by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d at that time and the scenario table 222f, and the scenario data indicating the determined execution timing is stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserved information storage area X (S1305). This makes it possible to store the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" for each reserved information storage area X.

Next, in the process of S1306, it is determined whether the variable presentation indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command includes a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" (S1306). As described above, for the variable element of "Super Reach", the variable element of "Special Reach" or the variable element of "Special Variable", the execution pattern and the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 are erased during the execution of the variable element. Therefore, if the variable presentation includes a variable element of "Super Reach", a variable element of "Special Reach" or a variable element of "Special Variable", it can be executed even if the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" includes "after reserved deletion". Therefore, based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the reserved information storage area X, it is determined whether the variable presentation includes a variable element of "Super Reach or higher".

If the result of the processing of S1306 is that the variable performance includes a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" (S1306: Yes), reserved erasure information indicating that the execution pattern and reserved pattern of the cockpit display area Db will be erased in the variable performance is stored in reserved erasure information storage area 223e7 of reserved information storage area X (S1307), and processing proceeds to S1309. On the other hand, if the variable performance does not include a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" (S1306: No), the execution pattern and reserved pattern of the cockpit display area Db will not be erased in the variable performance, so data indicating that no information is stored (it is blank) (hereinafter referred to as "Null data") is stored in reserved erasure information storage area 223e7 of reserved information storage area X (S1308), and processing proceeds to S1309. In the processing of S1308, by writing null data to the reserved deletion information storage area 223e7, it is possible to prevent duplicate use of reserved deletion information related to "reserved change notice" that was stored in the reserved information storage area X before writing, for example.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether or not the variable effect indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command includes a variable element of "re-change" (S1309). If "after reserved clearing" is selected as the execution timing of the "reserved change notice", even if the variable effect is that the cockpit display area Db is cleared due to a variable element of the "super reach", etc., there is no point in performing the "reserved change notice" "after reserved clearing" unless there is some effect after the variable element of the "super reach", etc.

Specifically, for example, even if a "hold change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, it will not add any interest to the player, and will instead ruin the fun with a meaningless presentation. Also, for example, even if a "hold change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed and the "miss display" is confirmed, if the "miss display" is confirmed as it is and the next variable presentation starts, the inconsistency in the presentation will make the player distrust the game. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a "re-change" variable element, which is a variable element executed after the variable element of "Super Reach", etc., and it is confirmed whether or not it is possible to execute a "hold change notice" after "reservation is cleared".

If the result of the processing of S1309 is that the change performance includes "re-change" (S1309: Yes), the re-change information indicating that the change element of "re-change" will be performed in the change performance is stored in the re-change information storage area 223e8 of the pending information storage area X (S1310), and the processing proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the change performance does not include the change element of "re-change" (S1309: No), Null data is stored in the re-change information storage area 223e8 of the pending information storage area X (S1311), and the processing proceeds to S1313. The processing of S1307 and S1310 allows the user to recognize that the "reserved change notice" can be executed at the execution timing "after the reservation is cleared". In addition, by writing Null data to the re-change information storage area 223e8 in the processing of S1311, for example, it is possible to prevent duplicate use of the re-change information stored in the pending information storage area X before writing.

In the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "reserve change notice" will not be executed, and therefore, in order to erase information related to the "reserve change notice", null data is stored in the reserve change information storage area 223e5, scenario data storage area 223e6, reserve deletion information storage area 223e7, and re-change information storage area 223e8 of the reserve information storage area X (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. By writing null data to each storage area 223e5-223e8 in the process of S1312, for example, it is possible to prevent duplicate use of information related to the "reserve change notice" that was stored in the reserve information storage area X before writing, and to prevent inconsistencies in the presentation (for example, the "reserve change notice" being "rainbow" despite the change presentation being a "miss display").

In the process of S1313, a display reserved ball count command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b updated in the process of S1301 (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314. In the process of S1314, in the variable presentation indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command, it is determined whether the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is when the reserved pattern is displayed (the acquired reserved change timing) or not (S1314). This determination is made by determining that the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is when the reserved pattern is displayed if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserved information storage area X is the same as the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b.

If the result of the determination in S1314 is that the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is when the reserved pattern is displayed (S1314: Yes), a display lit-on reserve change command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the display mode of the determined "reserve change notice" will be performed when the reserved pattern is displayed (S1315), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is not when the reserved pattern is displayed (S1314: No), the process of S1315 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

The display reserved ball count command and display light on reserved change command set in S1313 and S1315 are temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and are then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). In response to this, the display control device 114 executes processing to display the reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the reserved ball count on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the display control device 114 receives the display light on reserved change command, and when displaying the reserved pattern, performs display control to display the reserved pattern in the determined "reserved change notice" display mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, the variable performance process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variable performance process (S1109).

This variable performance process (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and in order to check whether the variable performance is displayed normally on the third symbol display device 81, first, various information stored in the reserved information storage area 1 of the reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3. Also, if the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated, and a process is performed to set this command for sending to the display control device 114. Furthermore, if it is the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern and the reserved pattern, various commands related to each execution timing of the "reserved change notice" are generated, and a process is performed to set these commands for sending to the display control device 114.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not immediately start the display process related to the variation performance based on the command, but waits for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 millisecond) to see whether a command indicating a change in the variation performance, such as the above-mentioned display error command, is sent. If the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113 and immediately executes the display process related to the variation performance based on the command, if a display error command is subsequently sent from the sound lamp control device 113, it must stop the display process related to the variation performance and replace it with a display (e.g., default variation) corresponding to the error based on the display error command. Therefore, even if the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, it does not immediately execute the display process related to the variation performance based on the command, but waits for the execution of the display process related to the variation performance based on the command for a predetermined time during which the display error command may be sent from the sound lamp control device 113. By configuring it in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent the processing burden caused by executing unnecessary processing in the display processing related to the variable performance.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined time during which the display control device 114 may transmit a display error command from the voice lamp control device 113 is exemplified as 1 millisecond, but this waiting time may be any time within a range in which the display processing in the display control device 114 is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the variation performance processing (see FIG. 31) within a few milliseconds after executing the above-mentioned command determination processing (see FIG. 29). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably generate and transmit the display error command if there is at least a few milliseconds until it generates and transmits the display error command in the variation performance processing after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Therefore, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to receive the display error command, if there is one, by waiting at least the above-mentioned few milliseconds after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time it takes to process the display and drawing of one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute the display process related to the variable performance without delay, thereby preventing an event that would cause a clear delay in the display process of the variable performance on the third pattern display device 81.

In the fluctuation performance process (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation performance process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation performance (S1402), and then the data included in the pending information storage first area provided in the pending information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f (S1403), and further the data included in the pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the pending information storage area 223e is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

In other words, in this case, the number of pending variable performances is reduced by one and execution of the first pending variable performance is commenced, so the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1 and various information (data) stored in storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information first area corresponding to the first pending variable performance are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. In addition, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the first pending information storage area, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the second pending information storage area, and the values and various information (data) of the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e8 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control unit 110, and the reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110.

Next, in the process of S1405, the change pattern of the change performance to be executed is obtained based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f (S1405). Then, it is determined whether or not the change pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the change pattern in the change performance extracted from the change pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) (S1406). If the information on the change performance indicated by the change pattern command received this time differs from the information on the change performance previously stored in the execution information storage area 223f (pending information storage area 223e), a normal change performance (change pattern) cannot be executed due to the influence of some abnormality (noise, etc.). For this reason, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by this determination process, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal change performance can be executed.

If it is determined in S1406 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 (S1406: No), some abnormality has occurred with the fluctuation performance being executed, so a display error command is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 of the abnormality (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some kind of abnormality has occurred with the variable performance, switches the third pattern display device 81 to a display corresponding to the error (for example, default variation), and begins display control of the error display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1406 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 (S1406: Yes), no abnormality has occurred with respect to the fluctuation performance being executed, so the processing of S1407 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1408.

Next, in the process of S1408, the stop type of the variable performance to be executed is obtained based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f (S1408). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) (S1409). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the stop type command received this time differs from the information on the variable performance previously stored in the execution information storage area 223f (hold information storage area 223e), a normal variable performance (stop type) cannot be executed due to the influence of some abnormality (noise, etc.). For this reason, this determination process is used to determine whether or not there is an abnormality and to confirm whether or not a normal variable performance can be executed.

If it is determined in S1409 that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the stop type stored in the RAM 223 (S1409: No), some abnormality has occurred with the variable performance being executed, so a display error command is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 of the abnormality (S1410), and processing proceeds to S1411.

In the first embodiment, a display error command is generated and transmitted when the fluctuation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and a display error command is generated and transmitted when the stop type based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the stop type indicated by the stop type command, so that a maximum of two display error commands are transmitted. Alternatively, one display error command may be transmitted when either the fluctuation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, or the stop type based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the stop type indicated by the stop type command. This configuration can reduce the number of command transmissions, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some kind of abnormality has occurred regarding the variable performance, switches the third pattern display device 81 to an error display (e.g., default variable), and begins display control of the error display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1409 that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the stop type stored in the RAM 223 (S1409: Yes), no abnormality has occurred with respect to the variable performance being executed, so the processing of S1410 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1411.

The display control device 114 may be configured to wait a predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command to see if a display error command is received, and then start the variation performance. By configuring it in this way, an error display can be performed immediately without preparing the display control related to the variation performance (such as expanding the character pattern), thereby reducing the processing burden on the display control device 114.

Next, in the process of S1411, as the variable presentation starts and the reserved balls are consumed (i.e., the variable presentation corresponding to the reserved balls is set), the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1411), a reserved ball number display command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the updated value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413.

Next, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to make the "reserve change notice" appear in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by checking the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and determining whether the scenario data indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and that the data indicates "at the start", "before the reach", "after the reach", or "after the reserve is cleared" (hereinafter abbreviated as "at the start" to "after the reserve is cleared").

If the result of the determination in S1413 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and that the data indicates any of "at the start" to "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1413: Yes), an execution symbol change process is performed (S1414) to execute a "reserved ball change notice" in the execution symbol, and the process proceeds to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and is not data indicating any of "at the start" to "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The execution symbol change process of S1414 will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether it is the timing to display a "reserved change notice" in the reserved symbols displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is made for each of the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 provided in the reserved information storage first to third areas of the reserved information storage area 223e. In other words, it is determined whether each of the scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223e6 is the timing to execute a "reserved change notice" in the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 after shifting (for example, whether the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 shifted and stored in the reserved information storage first area indicates the number of reserved balls "1").

If, as a result of the processing of S1415, there exists a reserved information storage area 1 to 3 that stores scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), in order to execute a "reserved change notice" for the corresponding reserved symbol in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223e5, a display shift-time reserved change command including information on the corresponding reserved symbol is set for the display control device 114 (S1416), and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

Specifically, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserved information storage first area is data indicating the reserved number "1", a display shift-time reserved change command is generated and set to notify that the "reserved change notice" will be executed in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223e5 of the reserved information storage first area. Also, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserved information storage second area is data indicating the reserved number "2", a display shift-time reserved change command is generated and set to notify that the "reserved change notice" will be executed in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223e5 of the reserved information storage second area. Furthermore, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserved information storage third area is data indicating the reserved number "3", a display shift-time reserved change command is generated and set to notify that the "reserved change notice" will be executed in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223e5 of the reserved information storage third area.

The display shift pending change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). When the display control device 114 receives the display shift pending change command, it performs display control so that the corresponding pending pattern is displayed in the determined "pending change notice" display mode when shifting the pending pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S1415, if scenario data corresponding to the execution timing is not stored in each of the scenario data storage areas 223e6 of the first to third reserved information storage areas of the reserved information storage area 223e (S1415: No), the process of S1416 is skipped and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

In this way, when the execution pattern and reserved pattern are shifted as the variable performance begins, the scenario data stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e, respectively, are checked, and if there is scenario data corresponding to the execution timing of the "reserved change notice," it is possible to make the "reserved change notice" appear when the reserved pattern and execution pattern are shifted. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the "reserved change notice" appears, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, the execution pattern change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this execution pattern change process (S1414).

This execution symbol change process (S1414) is executed in the variable performance process (see FIG. 31) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and is performed to execute a "reserved change notice" in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. In this execution symbol change process, first, the timing of the execution symbol change, i.e., the execution timing for making the "reserved change notice" appear in the execution symbol, is determined (S1501). This determination is made by checking the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f.

If, as a result of the judgment in S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates the number of reserved balls is "0" and is data indicating "start time" (S1501: "start time"), in order to execute a "reserved change notice" in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223f5 at the timing when the execution pattern is displayed (shifted) in the execution pattern display area Db0, a display start time change command is set to the display control device 114 (S1502), this execution pattern change process is terminated, and the process returns to the change performance process (see FIG. 31).

The display start time change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display start time change command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the execution pattern is displayed in the determined "pending change notice" display mode when shifting the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0.

If the result of the judgment in S1501 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating "before reach" with the number of reserved balls being "0" (S1501: "before reach"), in order to execute a "reserve change notice" in the display mode stored in the reserved change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f at the timing before the "reach display" of the variable performance appears (for example, during the variable element of "high speed change" or when the left pattern row Z1 stops during the variable element of "low speed change"), a display pre-reach change command is set to the display control device 114 (S1503), and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 31).

The display pre-reach change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). The display control device 114, which has received the display pre-reach change command, performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") at a timing before the "reach display" of the variable performance appears (for example, during a "high-speed variable" variable element or when the left pattern row Z1 stops during a "low-speed variable" variable element).

If, as a result of the determination in S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f shows the number of reserved balls to be "0" and indicates "after reach" (S1501: "after reach"), in order to confirm whether or not a "reserve change notice" can be executed at the timing after the "reach display" of the variable performance appears (for example, during the execution of a variable element of a "normal reach"), it is determined whether or not the "reach display" appears in the variable performance (S1504). This determination is made by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

If it is determined in S1504 that a "reach display" will appear in the variable performance (S1504: Yes), a "hold change notice" can be executed at the timing after the "reach display" of the initially set variable performance appears (for example, while the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed). Therefore, in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-reach change command is set for the display control device 114 (S1505), and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 31).

The display post-reach change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-reach change command, the display control device 114 performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (e.g., from "normal (white)" to "blue") after (during) the appearance of the "reach display" of the variable performance (e.g., during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach").

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1504 that the "reach display" will not appear in the variable performance (S1504: No), the "hold change notice" cannot be executed "after reach" due to the absence of the "reach display" in the variable performance. Therefore, in order to change the "hold change notice" that is set to "after reach" to "before reach", which is the timing when it can be executed, the processing proceeds to S1503, and a pre-reach change command for display is set for the display control device 114 (S1503), and the processing returns to the variable performance processing (see FIG. 31).

By configuring it in this way, even if the variable performance cannot execute the "hold change notice" that was initially set to "after reaching a target", it can be changed to the execution timing "before reaching a target" when it is possible to execute the "hold change notice". This reduces the number of cases where the "hold change notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, and increases the execution rate of the "hold change notice", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, even if the lottery process for the "hold change notice" and the lottery process for the variable performance are performed by separate systems of processing, adjustments can be made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of each performance, so by performing each lottery process by a separate system of program, it is possible to simplify the design of each program while executing a consistent performance.

If the result of the determination in S1501 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and that the data indicates "after reservation is cleared" (S1501: "after reservation is cleared"), this determination is made based on the processing of S1309 of the reservation display setting process (see FIG. 30) to determine the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f.

If the result of the determination in S1506 is that re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), this is a change performance in which "re-change" is executed after "reach display", so next, in order to confirm whether or not a "hold change notice" can be executed at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the change performance (for example, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or after the execution of the variable element of "special reach"), it is determined whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" in the change performance (S1507). This determination is made by determining the hold erase information stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f in the process of S1307 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the determination in S1507 is that hold deletion information is stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), then the "hold change notice" can be executed "after hold deletion", so in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-deletion change command is set for the display control device 114 (S1508), and the process returns to the change performance process (see FIG. 31).

The display post-clearance change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-clearance change command, the display control device 114 performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") after the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach" of the variable performance has ended, but before the variable element of the "re-variation" is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when a "reserved change notice" is made for the reserved symbols and executed symbols that indicate a variable performance that will generate a jackpot, the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased by the variable elements of the "super reach", etc., and the "reserved change notice" is configured to appear (execute) at the timing when the variable elements of the "super reach" end and the executed symbol is redisplayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the predicted object, while subtly changing the display mode of the predicted object, compared to when a notice is given by directly changing the predicted object (change object; in the first embodiment, the executed symbol), which is always visible, or when a notice is given by making a new predicted object appear. By temporarily making the predicted object invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly connected to the game value (for example, a jackpot), providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db and the execution and reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db are constantly displayed except when the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is being executed, and inform the player of the execution suggestion of the current variable effect and the presence or absence of a waiting variable effect. In addition, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach or higher", it is configured to be redisplayed immediately as soon as the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" ends, so the player does not feel strange about the redisplay. In other words, the player recognizes that the execution and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db are the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 as the ones that should be displayed originally, and even if they are erased due to an exceptional event (execution of "Super Reach or higher"), they immediately return to the way they should be when the exceptional event ends. In the first embodiment, the display mode of the execution symbol is subtly changed from before it was erased at the timing when it returns to its original form, intentionally making the change difficult to notice, and increasing the surprise when the player notices the change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by allocating the timing of the execution of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the variable presentation (after "reach" or "after hold deletion"), the player can be made to play while hoping for the occurrence (appearance) of the "hold change notice" which increases the likelihood of a jackpot even in the latter half of the variable presentation. Therefore, the player can be made to play while hoping for a jackpot until the latter half of the variable presentation, which can provide interest to the player for a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, if it is determined that the re-change information is not stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), there is no point in executing the "re-change" variable element in the variable performance, so there is no point in executing the "reserve change notice" "after the reserve is cleared". Specifically, for example, even if the "reserve change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of the "super reach" is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, no performance occurs after the variable element of the "super reach", so the player cannot be interested in anything and will lose interest due to the meaningless performance. Also, for example, even if the "reserve change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of the "super reach" is executed and the "miss display" is confirmed, if the "miss display" is confirmed as it is and the next variable performance starts, the inconsistency in the performance will cause the player to distrust the game.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S1507 that the hold deletion information is not stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the cockpit display area Db is not erased in the change performance, and therefore the "hold change notice" after "hold deletion" cannot be executed.

Therefore, if it is determined in S1506 that no re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1507 that no hold deletion information is stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), since the "hold change notice" cannot be executed "after hold deletion", the processing proceeds to S1504 to check the timing at which the "hold change notice" can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the variable performance cannot execute the "Hold Change Notice" initially set "after hold clearing", it can be changed to an executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") and execute the "Hold Change Notice". This reduces the number of cases where the "Hold Change Notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, and increases the execution rate of the "Hold Change Notice", improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, even if the lottery process for the "Hold Change Notice" and the lottery process for the variable performance are performed by separate systems of processing, adjustments can be made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of each performance, so by performing each lottery process by a separate system of program, it is possible to simplify the design of each program while executing a consistent performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, an example of the execution of the "reserved change notice" after the "reserved clearing" will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a situation in which the "reserved change notice" after the "reserved clearing" is performed in the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81. Specifically, FIG. 33(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "reach display" is about to appear in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. 33(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is cleared from the state of FIG. 33(a) and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area Db is cleared from the state of FIG. 33(b) and the variable element of the "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33(d) is a diagram showing a state in which a performance is executed suggesting that the "miss display" will appear in the variable element of the "super reach" from the state of FIG. 33(c). FIG. 33(e) shows the state in which the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 33(d), and the "miss display" appears in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33(f) shows the state just before the "re-change" is performed from the state of FIG. 33(e) and the "big win display" appears. Note that in FIG. 33(a) to FIG. 33(f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 33(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still "high-speed fluctuating" and cannot be seen. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 33(b) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 33(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a variable element of the "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. This is because, as described above, the sub-display area Ds mainly functions to indicate whether or not a "reach display" will occur in the variable presentation in the main display area Dm, and when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the existence of the sub-display area Ds becomes meaningless. Also, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player focuses on whether the result of the "reach display" is a "jackpot display" or a "miss display", and attention is less paid to the display content of the sub-display area Ds, which indicates the occurrence of a "reach display". Therefore, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display contents of the main display area Dm are enlarged and displayed, and the secondary display area Ds is erased in conjunction with the enlargement, so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "reach display" that the player is focusing on.

In the state of Fig. 33(b), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of Fig. 33(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, as in Fig. 33(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display of the cockpit display area Db is configured to continue to be displayed without being erased during the variable element of the "normal reach". This is because the variable element of the "normal reach" often results in a missed jackpot selection in a variable presentation that is only the variable element of the "normal reach", and there is a high possibility that a "miss display" will appear. When the variable element of the "normal reach" becomes a "miss display", the next variable presentation starts immediately, so it is necessary to indicate to the player whether or not the next variable presentation is pending. Therefore, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuous display) during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach", and the device is configured to indicate to the player how many balls are pending for the variable presentation.

In addition, because the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the secondary display area Ds, even if it continues to be displayed during the execution of a variable element of the "normal reach", it does not impede the presentation of the variable element of the "normal reach". Therefore, there is no actual harm in continuing to display the cockpit display area Db during the execution of a variable element of the "normal reach".

Furthermore, the reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-mentioned "reserved change notice", and are configured to inherit (take over) the display mode of the reserved symbols changed by the "reserved change notice" even in the execution symbols that suggest the content of the variable performance being executed. In other words, the display mode of the execution symbols is configured to be able to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot being won in the variable performance being executed. Therefore, by having the player check the display mode of the execution symbols while the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed, the player can predict whether the variable element of the "normal reach" being executed will develop into a variable element of the "super reach" and result in a jackpot, and interest is added based on this prediction.

Figure 33(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 33(b). In this variable element of "Super Reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed in the variable element of "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced form in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 33(c), a "battle effect" (a "competition effect" in the variable element of "Special Reach") is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in which multiple character symbols compete for victory or defeat. In this "battle effect", an effect (kickboxing in the first embodiment) is executed in which the player's character symbol (e.g., the left character symbol) and the enemy's character symbol (e.g., the right character symbol) fight. In the "battle effect", if the player's character symbol wins, it is a jackpot, and a "jackpot display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "Super Reach". On the other hand, if the enemy's character symbol wins in the "battle effect", it is a loss, and a "loss display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "Super Reach".

Also, as shown in FIG. 33(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, a new number pattern (in the first embodiment, "4") indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

When a "Super Reach" variable element occurs during a variable effect that has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than a "Normal Reach" variable element, the player focuses on whether the variable effect being executed will be a "jackpot display" or a "miss display" rather than on how many variable effects are pending (on hold). For this reason, the player does not focus on the reserved symbol that indicates the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. Rather, if the reserved symbol is displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of a "Super Reach" variable element, the player will not be able to concentrate on the performance of the "Super Reach" variable element, and the player may find the display of the reserved symbol annoying.

In addition, the reserved patterns displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship to the variable performance currently being performed. Furthermore, the reserved patterns displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 are displayed and controlled by a process separate from the display control of the variable performance currently being performed (the voice lamp control device 113 performs the reserved display setting process (see FIG. 30)). During the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", many additional performances are performed for many sprites by making various character patterns appear and performing many effect displays on each character pattern, etc., and the processing load of the display control is increasing. In such a situation, if the display control of multiple reserved patterns that are not directly related to the variable performance currently being performed is performed, the processing load related to the display control of the entire third pattern display device 81 increases by the number of sprites of each reserved pattern, and there is a risk of display abnormalities such as so-called frame drops.

Furthermore, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db inherits (takes over) the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by the "reserved change notice" and indicates the jackpot expectation of the variable performance being performed in that display mode, so it has a direct relationship with the variable performance being performed. However, the "reserved change notice" suggests the expectation of the appearance of the "jackpot display" as well as the expectation of the appearance of the "reach display". For this reason, when the "super reach" appears, it is a state in which the suggestion of the expectation of the appearance of the "reach display" as the "reserved change notice" is fulfilled to a certain extent (for example, half) by the execution of the "reach display" with a high expectation of a jackpot, which is the "super reach". Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the "super reach" appears, the player focuses on the performance content of the "super reach" and is less interested in the display mode of the "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern.

Therefore, during the execution of a "Super Reach", the reserved symbols and executed symbols that attract little attention from the player are erased, and the "Super Reach" presentation is mainly executed on the display screen, allowing the player to focus (attention) on the "Super Reach" presentation. Furthermore, by erasing the reserved symbols and executed symbols that attract little attention from the player, the burden on the display control is removed in advance, and display abnormalities such as dropped frames can be prevented without making the player feel uncomfortable about the game.

In the state of FIG. 33(c), the "7" symbol that caused the "Super Reach" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The "Super Reach" presentation indicates whether the variable presentation being performed will be a "jackpot display" or a "miss display", but since it is performed by a character symbol that has no direct relationship to the display mode of the third symbol, if the player focuses only on the character symbol during the "Super Reach" when the third symbol is not displayed at all, it may not be possible to recognize whether the presentation is a "reach display" or not (for example, it may be mistaken for a "demo screen"). In addition, since the "Super Reach" presentation is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player may forget which third symbol caused the "reach display" during the "Super Reach". On the other hand, if the reach-forming symbols are displayed large while a "Super Reach" is being executed, the "Super Reach" effect may become difficult to see, and the third symbol may end up interfering with the "Super Reach" effect itself.

Therefore, during a "Super Reach", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a small version of the reach-forming symbol of the third symbol that caused the "Super Reach" to occur in the upper left corner of the display area. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that a "reach display" has occurred without impeding the performance of the "Super Reach", and it is also possible to clearly indicate to the player the type of third symbol that caused the "reach display".

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 33 (c), a number symbol (in the first embodiment, "4") indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (below the "reach display"). As mentioned above, while the "super reach" is being executed, the display in the cockpit display area Db is erased, so the player may not be able to recognize the number of variable performances that are reserved from the display content of the cockpit display area Db.

Therefore, instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db while the "Super Reach" is being performed, a number pattern indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, the number of balls reserved for the variable performance can be shown to the player during the "Super Reach" performance without interfering with the "Super Reach" performance.

Figure 33(d) shows a state in which the player's character image (left character image) has lost to the enemy's character image (right character image) in the "battle performance" of the "Super Reach" from the state of Figure 33(c). Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of Figure 33(d), he or she predicts that the "Super Reach" will not show a "jackpot display" but a "miss display" because the player's character image has lost in the "battle performance" of the "Super Reach".

Also, in FIG. 33(d), as in FIG. 33(c), a "super reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db remains erased.

Figure 33(e) shows a state in which the "Super Reach" effect from the state of Figure 33(d) has failed (the enemy character symbol has won), and a "miss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm, while the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the execution symbol and reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. Note that the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the "miss display." In other words, the main part of the third symbol display device 81 displays a state in which the chances are down.

In FIG. 33(e), the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode ("red") that has changed from the display mode ("white"; see FIG. 33(b)) before it was erased by the execution of the "Super Reach". In other words, a "reserve change notice" is issued at the execution timing "after the reserve is erased". That is, a chance up state is displayed in the non-major part (i.e., the non-major part) of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a chance down state is displayed in the major part (main display area Dm and secondary display area Ds) and a chance up state is displayed in the non-major part (cockpit display area Db) at the same time.

When the player first sees the state of Figure 33(e), due to the appearance of the "miss display (787)" in the main display area Dm and the impression of having lost the "battle effect" in the "super reach", the player assumes that, as predicted at the time of Figure 33(d), the "jackpot display" will not appear in this variable effect, but rather the "miss display" will appear and the "miss display" will be confirmed, and his interest shifts to the next variable effect. Then, when the player looks at the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the content of the next variable effect, he recognizes that a "reserved change notice" has been made in the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0, which indicates the current variable effect, and that the execution pattern has changed to "red".

At this point, when a player sees this "hold change notice" for the first time "after the hold is cleared," he or she will first notice the difference in the way the execution pattern is displayed from before the "battle effect" of the "Super Reach" is executed, and will feel something is off. The player will then realize that the source of this offense is the "red" execution pattern. The player will then use their own memory to consider when the "hold change notice" for the "red" execution pattern was made. After considering this, the player will realize that the "hold change notice" was not made before the "Super Reach" was executed, but was executed after the "Super Reach" had ended. At this moment, the player will predict that some kind of event will occur due to the "red" execution pattern in the ongoing change effect.

Figure 33(f) shows a state in which a "re-change" is being performed in the main display area Dm from the state in Figure 33(e). In this "re-change", the main display area Dm is enlarged and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "miss display" that was displayed as a static "787" in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 starts to change again, eventually stopping at the "jackpot display" of "777". The player is surprised that a "re-change" has occurred, and feels happy and satisfied that the change presentation does not end with a "miss display" but develops to reveal the "jackpot display", as inferred at the stage in Figure 33(e).

Furthermore, once a player has experienced this "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion," they will check whether the execution pattern has changed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db during the next "Super Reach," even if a "miss display" appears during that "Super Reach." This creates interest in checking the display state of the execution pattern that is re-displayed even after the execution of a "Super Reach," and allows the player to play while hoping for the "jackpot display" to appear until the variable presentation is confirmed and displayed. This allows the player to maintain interest in the game until the variable presentation is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when executing a "reserved change notice" "after the reserved is erased" in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db, first, a performance of erasing the cockpit display area Db (for example, "super reach") is performed. Then, the "reserved change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the performance is executed and the execution pattern is redisplayed in the execution pattern display area Db0. After that, if the "reserved change notice" is executed at the time of redisplay, a "re-change" is performed in which the "miss display" changes to a "jackpot display". By configuring in this way, the player is surprised that a jackpot is awarded in the change performance that he initially predicted to be a miss, and can feel happy and satisfied that the change performance does not end with a "miss display" but develops into a "jackpot display" as expected at the stage when the change in the execution pattern is recognized. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, once a player has experienced this "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion," in the next performance in which the cockpit display area Db is deleted (for example, "Super Reach"), even if a "miss display" appears in that performance, the player will check whether the execution pattern has changed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db. This creates an interest in checking the display state of the execution pattern that is re-displayed even after the performance described above has been executed, and the player can play while hoping for the "jackpot display" to appear until the variable display is confirmed. This allows the player to maintain interest in the game until the variable display is confirmed.

Furthermore, when a "reserved change notice" is made in the execution pattern after "reserved deletion", the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is deleted, and the "reserved change notice" is configured to be made to appear (execute) at the timing when the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object, compared to when the notice object (change object; in the first embodiment, the execution pattern) that is always visible is directly changed to notify, or when a new notice object is made to appear to notify, and the display mode of the notice object can be changed casually. By making the notice object invisible once and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), and this provides the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db and the execution and reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db are constantly displayed except when the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is being executed, and inform the player of the execution suggestion of the current variable effect and the presence or absence of a waiting variable effect. In addition, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach or higher", it is configured to be redisplayed immediately as soon as the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" ends, so the player does not feel strange about the redisplay. In other words, the player recognizes that the execution and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db are the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 as the ones that should be displayed originally, and even if they are erased due to an exceptional event (execution of "Super Reach or higher"), they immediately return to the way they should be when the exceptional event ends. In the first embodiment, the display mode of the execution symbol is subtly changed from before it was erased at the timing when it returns to its original form, intentionally making the change difficult to notice, and increasing the surprise when the player notices the change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by allocating the timing of the execution of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the variable presentation (after "reach" or "after hold deletion"), the player can be made to play while hoping for the occurrence (appearance) of the "hold change notice" which increases the likelihood of a jackpot even in the latter half of the variable presentation. Therefore, the player can be made to play while hoping for a jackpot until the latter half of the variable presentation, which can provide interest to the player for a long period of time.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the "hold change notice" and the execution timing is "after the hold is cleared", it is checked whether the "hold change notice" can be executed at that execution timing, and if it is determined that it cannot be executed, it is changed to an executable execution timing ("after the reach" or "before the reach") and the "hold change notice" is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce cases where the "hold change notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, and it is possible to increase the execution rate of the "hold change notice", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, even if the lottery process for the "hold change notice" and the lottery process for the variable performance are performed by different (separate) processes, it is possible to adjust the contents of each performance so that there is no discrepancy, so that by performing each lottery process by a different (separate) program, it is possible to simplify the design of each program and execute a consistent performance.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 34 to Fig. 37. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when executing the "reserve change notice" after "reserve deletion", it is determined whether or not the change performance can execute the "reserve change notice" at the execution timing initially set ("after reserve deletion"), and if it is an executable change performance, the "reserve change notice" is executed at the execution timing as initially set ("after reserve deletion"), while if it is an executable change performance, the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" that was initially set is changed, and the timing at which the "reserve change notice" can be executed is determined, and then the "reserve change notice" is executed.

However, even if the "Hold Change Notice" "After Hold Cleared" is selected, unless the change presentation allows for the "Hold Change Notice" "After Hold Cleared" to be executed (including "re-change"), it will be difficult to execute the "Hold Change Notice" at that timing, even though the "Hold Change Notice" "After Hold Cleared" has been selected, and the conventional "Hold Change Notice" will occur frequently, which may not increase the interest of the game.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when executing a "hold change notice" "after hold clearing", it is determined whether or not the change presentation allows the "hold change notice" to be executed at the execution timing that was initially set, and if the change presentation does not allow the "hold change notice" to be executed, the change presentation is changed to one in which the "hold change notice" "after hold clearing" can be executed, and the initially set "hold change notice" is executed.

Specifically, when "Hold Change Notice" is selected "after hold is cleared" in the variable performance, and it is determined that the variable performance mode (variable element) does not allow the "Hold Change Notice" to be executed at the execution timing of "after hold is cleared" in the variable performance, the presence or absence of a variable element related to the variable element of "pseudo fake" or the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" (hereinafter, the variable elements of "pseudo fake" and the variable elements of "pseudo consecutive 1" may be collectively referred to as "pseudo performance" variable elements). Then, if it is determined that the variable elements of "pseudo performance" are included, all (or part) of the variable elements of "pseudo performance" are converted to the variable elements of "super reach" or "special reach", which are variable elements that clear the cockpit display area Db.

The main control device 110 of this pachinko machine 10 determines only the rough fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the variable performance and transmits the determined contents to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the variable performance based on the rough fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the variable performance received from the main control device 110, so that the variable elements can be changed. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to freely select and determine the fine variable elements, etc., as long as it is possible to execute a variable performance that is consistent within the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110. Specifically, for example, when trying to change the variable elements of the variable performance in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, when there are two variable elements with the same fluctuation time, even if one variable element is changed to the other variable element, the variable time in the variable performance can be consistent. Therefore, there is no problem even if the variable elements are changed in the audio lamp control device 113 to correspond to the variable time determined by the main control device 110, and appropriate variable performance can be performed within the variable time determined by the main control device 110.

In the second embodiment, when "after hold clearing" is initially selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", if there is no variable that clears the cockpit display area Db, the cockpit display area Db can be cleared by changing the part corresponding to the variable of the "pseudo performance" to a variable that clears the cockpit display area Db (for example, a variable of "Super Reach"). Therefore, by adding a variable that clears the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" "after hold clearing". By configuring in this way, when the "hold change notice" "after hold clearing" is selected, it is possible to easily execute the "hold change notice" at the execution timing of the "after hold clearing". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance and increase the interest of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 34, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment. The configuration of the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in that the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f are provided with pseudo performance information storage areas 223e9 and 223f9, respectively, which store pseudo performance information indicating that a "pseudo performance" is being executed. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so their description will be omitted.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it performs a look-ahead process (reserved display setting process (see FIG. 36)) based on the values stored in each counter storage area 223e1-223e4 of the reserved information storage X area, and stores the reserved change information, scenario data, reserved deletion information, re-change information and pseudo performance information generated based on the results of this look-ahead process in each storage area 223e5-223e9 of the same reserved information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a change performance from the main control device 110, it executes a shift process in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. In other words, the number of pending change performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first pending change performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage first area corresponding to the first pending change performance are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the currently executing change performance.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the first pending information storage area, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the second pending information storage area, and the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e9 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control unit 110. Also, the first to fourth reserved information storage areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. In other words, in the voice lamp control unit 113, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and on hold by the main control unit 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, we will explain the pre-change change performance that includes a "pseudo performance" and does not erase the cockpit display area Db, and the post-change change performance that has the same change time as the pre-change change performance and erases the cockpit display area Db. FIG. 35(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-change (C605H)", and FIG. 35(b) is a time chart showing the relationship between "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-change (C705H)".

As shown in FIG. 35(a), both "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-change (C605H)" have a total change time of 40 seconds. Specifically, "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" is a change pattern that is performed for a total of 40 seconds, and is composed of a 7-second "high-speed change" change element, a 3-second "slow change" change element, a 10-second "pseudo fake" change element, a 10-second "normal reach" change element, and a 10-second "re-change" change element, which are sequentially combined. Therefore, in "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)," the "pseudo fake" change element, which is a "pseudo performance" change element, is executed, but the "super reach" change element that erases the cockpit display area Db, etc., is not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo false + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" is a change pattern in which the "reserve change notice" cannot be executed "after the reserve is cleared."

On the other hand, "Normal Reach + Super Reach + Re-Change (C605H)" is a change pattern that is composed of a combination of a 7-second "high-speed change" change element, a 3-second "slow change" change element, a 10-second "normal reach" change element, a 10-second "super reach" change element, and a 10-second "re-change" change element, and lasts for a total of 40 seconds. Therefore, "Normal Reach + Super Reach + Re-Change (C605H)" does not include a "pseudo performance" change element, but does include a "super reach" change element, which has the same change time as the "pseudo fake" change element, and the cockpit display area Db is erased by the execution of the "super reach" change element. Therefore, this "Normal Reach + Super Reach + Re-Change (C605H)" is a change pattern that can execute a "hold change notice" "after hold is erased".

As a result, although the fluctuation elements of "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" are different, the overall fluctuation time is the same (40 seconds), so consistency is maintained even if one fluctuation pattern is replaced with the other fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, even if a command (e.g., a confirmation command) is later sent from the main control device 110, no problem occurs with the control timing of the command. In other words, "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" are fluctuation patterns that can be replaced with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(b), both "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-change (C705H)" have a total change time of 50 seconds. Specifically, "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" is a change pattern that is performed for a total of 50 seconds, and is composed of a 7-second "high-speed change" change element, a 3-second "low-speed change" change element, a 20-second "pseudo consecutive 1" change element, a 10-second "normal reach" change element, and a 10-second "re-change" change element, which are sequentially combined. Therefore, in "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)", the "pseudo consecutive 1" change element, which is a "pseudo performance" change element, is executed, but the "super reach" change element that erases the cockpit display area Db, etc., is not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" is a change pattern in which the "reserve change notice" cannot be executed "after the reserve is cleared."

On the other hand, "Normal reach + Special reach + Re-change (C705H)" is a change pattern that is composed of a combination of a 7-second "high-speed change" change element, a 3-second "slow change" change element, a 10-second "normal reach" change element, a 20-second "special reach" change element, and a 10-second "re-change" change element, and lasts for a total of 50 seconds. Therefore, "Normal reach + Special reach + Re-change (C705H)" does not include a "pseudo performance" change element, but does include a "special reach" change element, which has a change time equivalent to that of "pseudo consecutive 1", and the cockpit display area Db is erased by the "special reach". Therefore, this "Normal reach + Special reach + Re-change (C705H)" is a change pattern that can execute a "hold change notice" after "hold erasure".

Therefore, although the fluctuation elements of "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-fluctuation (C705H)" are different, the overall fluctuation time is the same (50 seconds), so consistency is maintained even if one fluctuation pattern is replaced with the other fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, even if a command (e.g., a confirmation command) is later sent from the main control device 110, no problems will arise with the control timing of the command. In other words, "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-fluctuation (C705H)" are fluctuation patterns that can be replaced with each other.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the hold display setting process (S1209) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold ball number command, it performs this hold display setting process, and when it is decided to execute the "hold change notice", it stores the hold change information, scenario data, hold deletion information, and re-change information in each storage area 223e5 to 223e8 of the hold information storage Xth area indicated by the hold ball number command. In addition, in the hold display setting process, it is determined whether or not the variable performance indicated by the hold ball number command includes a variable element of the "pseudo performance". If the result of the determination is that the variable element of the "pseudo performance" is included, the pseudo performance information indicating the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo performance" is stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223e9.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the reserve display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command (S1303). If the result of the determination is that the execution lottery for the "reserve change notice" has not been won (S1303: No), the "reserve change notice" will not be executed, and therefore, in order to erase information related to the "reserve change notice", null data is stored in the reserve change information storage area 223e5, scenario data storage area 223e6, reserve deletion information storage area 223e7, re-change information storage area 223e8 and pseudo performance information storage area 223e9 of the reserve information storage area X (S1354), and the process proceeds to S1313.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "reserved ball change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processes of S1304 to S1311 are carried out as in the first embodiment, and the reserved ball change information, scenario data, reserved ball deletion information, or re-change information is stored in each of the storage areas 223e5 to 223e8 of the reserved ball storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command, and the process proceeds to S1351.

In the process of S1351, it is determined whether the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball count command received this time includes a variable element of "pseudo performance" (S1351). If the result of the determination is that the variable element of "pseudo performance" is included (S1351: Yes), pseudo performance information indicating that the variable element of "pseudo performance" is performed in the variable performance is stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223e9 of the reserved information storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1313. By the process of S1352, it is possible to recognize that the variable element of "pseudo performance" can be replaced with the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the variable element of "pseudo performance" is not included (S1351: No), Null data is stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223e9 of the reserved information storage area X (S1353), and the process proceeds to S1313. In the processing of S1353, by writing null data to the pseudo performance information storage area 223e9, it is possible to prevent, for example, duplicate use of pseudo performance information related to the variable elements of the "pseudo performance" that was stored in the pending information storage area X before writing.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the execution pattern change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the execution pattern change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This execution pattern change process is executed in the variable performance process (see FIG. 31) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and is performed to execute a "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the third pattern display device 81.

In the execution symbol change process (S1414) of the second embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1501 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating "after reservation deletion" with the number of reserved balls being "0" (S1501: "after reservation deletion"), in order to confirm whether a "re-change" variable element is executed in the variable performance (S1506), it is determined whether or not a "re-change" variable element is executed in the variable performance. This determination is made based on the processing of S1309 of the reservation display setting process (see FIG. 30), and the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

In the process of S1506, if it is determined that the re-change information is not stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), there is no point in executing the "re-change" variable element in the variable presentation, so there is no point in executing the "reserve change notice" "after the reserve is cleared". Specifically, for example, even if the "reserve change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of the "super reach" is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, it will not provide any interest to the player, and will instead ruin the interest with a meaningless presentation. Also, for example, even if the "reserve change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the variable element of the "super reach" is executed and the "miss display" is confirmed, if the "miss display" is confirmed as it is and the next variable presentation starts, the inconsistency in the presentation will cause the player to distrust the game.

Therefore, if it is determined in S1506 that no re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), since the "pending change notice" cannot be executed "after the pending is deleted", the process proceeds to S1504 to check the timing at which the "pending change notice" can be executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1506 is that re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), this is a change performance in which the variable element of "re-change" is executed after the "reach display", so next, in order to confirm whether or not a "hold change notice" can be executed at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the change performance (for example, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed or after the variable element of "special reach" is executed), it is determined whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" in the change performance (S1507). This determination is made by determining the hold erase information stored in the hold erase information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f in the process of S1307 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the determination in S1507 is that hold deletion information is stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), then the "hold change notice" can be executed "after hold deletion", so in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-deletion change command is set for the display control device 114 (S1508), and the process returns to the change performance process (see FIG. 31).

The display post-clearance change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-clearance change command, the display control device 114 performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the change performance has ended and before the "re-change" is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1507 that the hold deletion information is not stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the "reach display" performed in the variable performance is a "normal reach", and since no performance is performed to erase the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" "after hold deletion" cannot be executed. Therefore, processing transitions to S1551 to check whether it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" "after hold deletion" by changing the variable element of the variable performance.

In the process of S1551, it is determined whether or not a variable element of "pseudo performance" is selected in the variable performance (S1551). This determination is made by determining the pseudo performance information stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f in the process of S1352 of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 36).

If the result of the determination in S1551 is that pseudo performance information is not stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), this execution pattern change process (S1414) is terminated without setting a command to change the execution pattern, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 31). That is, when the "reserve change notice" for "after reserve deletion" is selected, in the variable performance in which "re-change", "super reach or higher", and "pseudo performance" are not performed, the "reserve change notice" is not executed in the execution pattern. By configuring in this way, when the performance is not appropriate for the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice", a consistent performance can be provided to the player without any inconsistencies in the performance content.

In the process of S1551, if it is determined that no pseudo performance information is stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), for example, the process may proceed to S1504 to determine whether or not there is an execution timing at which a "reserve change notice" can be performed for the execution symbol. By configuring in this way, the selected "reserve change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing, reducing cases where the "reserve change notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, increasing the execution rate of the "reserve change notice", and improving the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S1551 is that pseudo performance information is stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: Yes), in order to confirm the variable elements that change depending on the content of the "pseudo performance", it is judged whether the "pseudo performance" stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 is a "pseudo fake" or not (S1552). If the result of the determination is that "pseudo fake" is stored as the pseudo performance information stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 (S1552: Yes), the display variable pattern command currently sent to the display control device 114 is canceled, and a pseudo fake change super command is set to the display control device 114 to change the variable elements of the "pseudo fake" to the variable elements of the "super reach" in order to execute a variable performance that can execute a "hold change notice" "after hold deletion" (S1553), and processing proceeds to S1508.

When the display control device 114 receives the pseudo-fake change super command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is configured to replace the previously received display change pattern command with the pseudo-fake change super command and execute display control of the variable performance. As described above, when the display control device 114 receives a display change pattern command and a display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is configured not to immediately start display processing related to the variable performance based on the commands, but to wait a predetermined time (e.g., 1 millisecond) to see whether a command indicating a change in the variable performance, such as the above-mentioned display error command or pseudo-fake change super command, is sent.

If the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113 and immediately executes display processing related to the variation performance based on the commands, if a display error command is subsequently sent from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 must stop the display processing related to the variation performance and replace it with a variation display based on a pseudo-fake change super command or the like. Therefore, even if the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command, it does not immediately execute display processing related to the variation performance based on the commands, but waits to execute display processing related to the variation performance based on the commands for a predetermined time during which a display error command or a pseudo-fake change super command or the like may be sent from the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent processing burdens caused by executing unnecessary processing in the display processing related to the variation performance.

In the second embodiment, 1 millisecond is exemplified as the predetermined time during which the display control device 114 may receive a pseudo-fake change super command from the voice lamp control device 113, but this waiting time may be any time within a range that does not delay the display process in the display control device 114. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the execution pattern change processing (S1414) in the variable performance processing (see FIG. 31) within a few milliseconds after executing the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) described above.

Therefore, if the voice lamp control device 113 has at least a few milliseconds to wait before generating and transmitting the pseudo-false change super command in the execution pattern change process after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the pseudo-false change super command can be generated and transmitted reliably. Therefore, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to receive the pseudo-false change super command, if present, by waiting at least the above-mentioned few milliseconds after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for the display process and drawing process for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute the display process related to the variation performance without delay, and it is possible to prevent an event in which the display process of the variation performance to the third pattern display device 81 is obviously delayed.

In addition, in the process of S1552, if "pseudo fake" is not stored as the pseudo performance information stored in the pseudo performance information storage area 223f9 (S1552: No), "pseudo consecutive 1" is stored as the pseudo performance information, so the display variable pattern command currently sent to the display control device 114 is canceled, and a pseudo consecutive 1 change special command that changes "pseudo consecutive 1" and executes "special reach" is set to the display control device 114 (S1554) in order to execute a variable performance that can change the variable element of "pseudo consecutive 1" to the variable element of "special reach" and execute a "hold change notice" "after hold deletion", and the process proceeds to S1508.

The pseudo-fake change super command or pseudo-consecutive 1 change special command set in the processing of S1553 or S1554 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28).

The display control device 114, which received the pseudo-fake change super command, initially attempted to execute the "pseudo-fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" change presentation indicated by the display change pattern command, but upon receiving the pseudo-fake change super command, it changes (replaces) the "pseudo-fake + normal reach + re-change (C505H)" to "super reach + re-change (C605H)" and performs display control.

In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the pseudo consecutive 1 change special command, it initially attempts to execute the "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" change presentation indicated by the display change pattern command, but upon receiving the pseudo consecutive 1 change special command, it changes (replaces) the "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach + re-change (C506H)" to "special reach + re-change (C705H)" and performs display control.

In the second embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo performance" can be changed to another variable element that has the same variable time (for example, "super reach" instead of "pseudo fake"). The variable element of the "pseudo performance" is performed in the first half of the variable performance, and does not cause a "jackpot display" to appear. On the other hand, the "super reach" and "special reach" are variable elements that can cause a "jackpot display" to appear. Therefore, among the variable elements of the variable performance, players tend to focus on the "super reach" and "special reach", and do not pay attention to the display results of the "pseudo performance", but only pay attention to whether or not any "pseudo performance" is executed. In other words, in terms of the importance of the performance, the importance of the "pseudo performance" is low, and the importance of the "super reach" and "special reach" is high.

As in the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" "after hold removal" is selected, if the "hold change notice" "after hold removal" cannot be executed with the initially selected variable effect, a check is made to see if a "pseudo effect" with a lower importance is present. If a "pseudo effect" is present, it is changed to a "super reach" or "special reach" with a higher importance than the "pseudo effect", so that the "hold change notice" "after hold removal" can be executed. By configuring in this way, a low-importance effect is changed to a high-importance effect, drawing the player's attention to the result of the variable effect, while the "hold change notice" "after hold removal" is performed, providing the player with an unexpected effect, diversifying the effects and increasing the interest of the game.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in the command determination process in the main process (see S1110 in FIG. 28), and then transmit a pseudo-fake change super command or a pseudo-ream 1 change special command to the display control device 114 in the variation performance process in the next main process (see S1109 in FIG. 28). Even when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command, as described above, the display control device 114 is configured to wait for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 millisecond) for the display control of the variation performance based on the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, and not immediately perform display based on the display variation pattern command in the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to receive the pseudo-fake change super command or the pseudo-ream 1 change special command within the above-mentioned predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 can receive a pseudo false change super command or a pseudo consecutive 1 change special command before starting the variation performance based on the display variation pattern command in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in the variation performance of the third pattern display device 81, the variation performance can be executed without the player being aware that the variable element has been changed. As a result, a smooth variation performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The main processing variable performance process (see S1109 in FIG. 28) may be configured to be executed after the main processing command judgment process (S1110 in FIG. 28). By configuring in this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can transmit the pseudo-fake change super command or the pseudo-consecutive 1 change special command to the display control device 114 immediately after transmitting the display variable pattern command to the display control device 114. Therefore, the display control device 114 can receive the pseudo-fake change super command or the pseudo-consecutive 1 change special command immediately after receiving the display variable pattern command, and can recognize early that the content of the variable performance is to be changed. As a result, the display control after the change can be performed without performing the display control of the variable performance before the change, thereby reducing the burden on the display control of the display control device 114.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the execution pattern change process (see FIG. 37) that generates the pseudo-fake change super command and the pseudo-1 consecutive change special command is configured to be executed after the display change pattern command and the display stop type command are generated in the command determination process (see FIG. 29) and the change start flag 223a is turned on. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured not to transmit the pseudo-fake change super command or the pseudo-1 consecutive change special command unless the display change pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114. Therefore, for example, the display control device 114 does not receive the pseudo-fake change super command without receiving the display change pattern command, which makes it easier to create a display control program in the display control device 114.

In the processing of S1508, since it is possible to execute a "hold change notice" "after the hold is cleared" based on the processing of S1507, S1553, or S1554, in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-clearance change command is set for the display control device 114 (S1508), and the process returns to the change performance processing (see FIG. 31).

The display post-clearance change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-clearance change command, the display control device 114 performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the change performance has ended and before the "re-change" is executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when "Hold Change Notice" after "Hold Clear" is selected in the variable performance, if it is determined that the performance mode (variable element) does not allow the "Hold Change Notice" to be executed at the execution timing of "After Hold Clear" in the variable performance, first, it is determined whether there is a variable element that can be changed to a variable element that clears the cockpit display area Db (for example, a variable element related to "pseudo performance"). Then, if it is determined that the variable element includes a changeable variable element (for example, a variable element of "pseudo performance"), the changeable variable element (for example, all or part of "pseudo performance") is converted to a variable element that clears the cockpit display area Db (for example, "super reach").

Therefore, by adding a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db, it becomes possible to execute a "hold change notice" "after hold is cleared." By configuring it in this way, when a "hold change notice" "after hold is cleared" is selected, it becomes easier to execute the "hold change notice" at the execution timing of the "after hold is cleared." Therefore, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the "reserved change notice" "after the reserved deletion" is selected, if the "reserved change notice" "after the reserved deletion" cannot be executed with the initially selected variable effect, the system checks whether a variable element with low importance (e.g., "pseudo effect") is present. If a variable element with low importance (e.g., "pseudo effect") is present, the variable element with low importance (e.g., "pseudo effect") is changed to a variable element with high importance (e.g., "super reach" or "special reach"), so that the "reserved change notice" "after the reserved deletion" can be executed. By configuring in this way, a variable element with low importance is changed to a variable element with high importance, and the variable element with high importance is used to draw the player's attention to the result of the variable effect, while the "reserved change notice" "after the reserved deletion" is performed after the variable element with high importance has ended, providing the player with a surprising effect, diversifying the effects and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit a display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in the command determination process in the main process (see S1110 in FIG. 28), and then transmit a pseudo-fake change super command or a pseudo-consecutive 1 change special command to the display control device 114 in the variation performance process in the next main process (see S1109 in FIG. 28). Even if the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 is configured not to display based on the display variation pattern command in the third pattern display device 81 for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 milliseconds) due to preparation for the display control process, etc. Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to receive the pseudo-fake change super command or the pseudo-consecutive 1 change special command within the above-mentioned predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 can receive a pseudo false change super command or a pseudo consecutive 1 change special command before starting the variation performance based on the display variation pattern command in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in the variation performance of the third pattern display device 81, the variation performance can be executed without the player being aware that the variable element has been changed. As a result, a smooth variation performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 38 to Fig. 52. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when "reserved change notice" after "reserved clearing" is selected in the variable performance, when it is determined that the variable performance is a variable performance of a variable element that cannot execute "reserved change notice" at the execution timing of "after reserving clearing" in the variable performance, the presence or absence of a variable element related to the variable element of the "pseudo performance" is determined. Then, when it is determined that the variable element of the "pseudo performance" is included, all (or a part) of the variable element of the "pseudo performance" is converted into the variable element of the "super reach" that clears the cockpit display area Db or the variable element of the "special reach".

However, in the variable performance, if the variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db does not include a changeable variable element, the variable element cannot be changed, so the variable element of the variable performance is not changed and the "hold change notice" is not performed "after the hold is cleared". Specifically, if the variable element of the "pseudo performance" that is the source of the change is not included in the variable performance, the variable element of the "pseudo performance" cannot be replaced with the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach", so the "hold change notice" is not performed "after the hold is cleared" in the execution pattern. Therefore, even if the "hold change notice" "after the hold is cleared" is selected, the "hold change notice" cannot be performed at that timing, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will not be increased.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to be able to drive the cockpit display area Db to a state where it cannot be seen (is difficult to see) by using a movable part that can cover a part of the third pattern display device 81. Then, while the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable part, a "reserved change notice" is executed in the execution pattern. After that, when the movable part returns from covering the cockpit display area Db to its original state, the player is able to see the execution pattern again and is able to recognize that the "reserved change notice" is being executed in the execution pattern.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a left movable part 87 (see FIG. 38) capable of reciprocating on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the left side of the display screen, and a right movable part 88 (see FIG. 38) capable of reciprocating on the display screen is arranged on the right side of the display screen. The left movable part 87 and the right movable part 88 are configured so that the presence or absence of driving and the driving pattern are determined by a driving lottery in the variable performance. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be displayed at all times for any variable element during the execution of the variable performance. Furthermore, when the left movable part 87 is driven in a predetermined driving mode (in the third embodiment, a "strong pattern". Hereinafter, the predetermined driving mode will be expressed as a "strong pattern".), the left movable part 87 covers the cockpit display area Db, and the left movable part 87 makes the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player. Then, when the left-side movable device 87 is operating in the "strong pattern," a "reserved change notice" is executed with the executed symbol (hereinafter, the timing of the execution of the "reserved change notice" during the "strong pattern" is referred to as "after the strong pattern is activated"). After that, when the left-side movable device 87 returns to its original position, the executed symbol for which the "reserved change notice" has been executed becomes visible again to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the "reserved change notice" after "strong pattern drive" is selected in the variable performance, if the "strong pattern" of the left movable role 87 is not selected in the variable performance, it is determined whether the content of the variable performance can drive the left movable role 87 in the "strong pattern". If the result of the determination is that the content (variable element) can drive the left movable role 87 in the variable performance, the left movable role 87 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the left movable role 87 covers the cockpit display area Db. Then, in the state where the left movable role 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", that is, in the state where the left movable role 87 covers the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db, the "reserved change notice" after the strong pattern drive is executed with the execution pattern, and then, when the left movable role 87 returns to its original position, the execution pattern for which the "reserved change notice" has been executed becomes visible again to the player.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the forecast object while making it more difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the forecast object, compared to when the always visible forecast object (changing object; in the third embodiment, the execution pattern) is directly changed to notify the player, or when a new forecast object is made to appear to notify the player. By temporarily making the forecast object invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when making the execution pattern that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible, it is possible to make the execution pattern that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible by changing the drive pattern of a movable part (left movable part 87) different from the third pattern display device 81, rather than changing the performance content (variable element) of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution pattern invisible without sending additional commands, etc. to the display control device 114 that controls the third pattern display device 81 to replace the performance content, and then to perform the "reserve change notice". Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected performances without increasing the control burden on the display control device 114, and to diversify the performances to increase the interest of the game.

In the third embodiment, a "weak pattern" drive pattern having a smaller drive range than the "strong pattern" drive pattern is provided as a drive pattern other than the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88. Specifically, the "strong pattern" drive pattern is configured so that each movable part 87, 88 tilts from the upright state (90°) of the initial position to a horizontal state (0°) so that the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable part 87. On the other hand, the "weak pattern" drive pattern is configured so that each movable part 87, 88 tilts from the upright state of the initial position to a slightly inclined state (60°) so that the cockpit display area Db is not covered by each movable part 87, 88.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first or second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first or second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 38, we will explain the transition of the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 when the variable elements of "normal reach" and "super reach" appear in the variable presentation of the third embodiment.

Figure 38(a) is a diagram showing the state immediately before the "reach display ("normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Figure 38(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the occurrence of the variable element of the "normal reach" from the state of Figure 38(a) is confirmed, the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 38(c) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable element of the "super reach" occurs from the state of Figure 38(b), and the variable element of the "super reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. Figure 38(d) is a diagram showing the state in which the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed from the state of Figure 38(c), and the "miss display" of the third symbol appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 38(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is being executed while the third symbol is still not visible. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

A left movable part 87 resembling a sword is disposed on the left side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a right movable part 88 resembling a sword is disposed on the right side of the display screen. These left movable part 87 and right movable part 88 (hereinafter, the left movable part 87 and the right movable part 88 may be abbreviated as "each movable part 87, 88") are normally in the origin position as the initial position, and are disposed upright on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81.

When each of the movable parts 87, 88 is in its initial position, the front side of each of the movable parts 87, 88 is visible to the player, and the third pattern display device 81 is hardly covered by each of the movable parts 87, 88, so that most of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is visible.

When each of the movable parts 87, 88 wins the drive lottery in the variable performance, it is configured to be driven back and forth on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by a drive motor (not shown). Specifically, when each of the movable parts 87, 88 is in its initial position, which is when it is not driven, each of the movable parts 87, 88 is held in an upright position (90°) on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81.

Now, referring to Figure 39, the drive mode of each movable part 87, 88 will be specifically explained. Figure 39(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the drive pattern of the left movable part 87 and the right movable part 88 in the "weak pattern" in the third embodiment, and Figure 39(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the drive pattern of the left movable part 87 and the right movable part 88 in the "strong pattern".

When the left-side movable device 87 is driven from its initial position (left side position of the third pattern display device 81; upright position (90°)), it rotates to the right (clockwise) on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 around the lower end of the left-side movable device 87 as an axis. In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, it rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60°)) which is the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 and stops (see Figure 39(a)), and in the "strong pattern" drive mode, it rotates to the bottom of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 (0°) and stops (see Figure 39(b)), and maintains this stopped state for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 or 2 seconds). After that, the left-side movable part 87, which is stopped at each of the above stopping positions, is rotated to the left (counterclockwise) on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 around the lower end of the left-side movable part 87 as an axis, and is configured to return to the initial position (left side position of the third pattern display device 81; upright state (90°)).

When the right-side movable device 88 is driven from its initial position (the right-side position of the third pattern display device 81; upright position (90°)), it rotates to the left (counterclockwise) on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, with the lower end of the right-side movable device 88 as an axis. In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, it rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60°)) which is the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 and stops (see Figure 39(a)), and in the "strong pattern" drive mode, it rotates to the bottom of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 (0°) and stops (see Figure 39(b)), and maintains this stopped state for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 or 2 seconds). After that, the right-side movable part 88, which is stopped at each of the above stopping positions, is rotated to the right (clockwise) on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 around the lower end of the right-side movable part 88 as an axis, and is configured to return to the initial position (the right-side position of the third pattern display device 81; upright state (90°)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each movable part 87, 88 is configured to be driven in a drive pattern selected by lottery when any of the "reach displays" are being executed. In other words, when the "reach display" is being executed, the expectation of a big win is configured to differ depending on which drive pattern each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in, and the player plays the game while paying attention to which drive pattern each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in during the execution of the "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the left movable part 87 and the right movable part 88 are configured to be driven simultaneously regardless of whether the driving pattern is the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern." Therefore, when the movable parts 87, 88 are driven in the "strong pattern," the trajectories of the movable parts 87, 88 interfere with each other. However, in the third embodiment, the left movable part 87 is driven slightly earlier than the right movable part 88, and the drive control is performed so that they do not collide with each other.

Returning to FIG. 38 for further explanation. FIG. 38(b) shows a state in which, from the state shown in FIG. 38(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a variable element of the "normal reach", and the secondary display area Ds is in an unviewable state. This is because, when a "reach display" occurs in the primary display area Dm, the display contents of the primary display area Dm are enlarged and displayed, and the secondary display area Ds is erased as it expands, so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "reach display" that the player is focusing on.

In the state of Fig. 38(b), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of Fig. 38(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, as in Fig. 38(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In addition, in FIG. 38(b), similar to FIG. 38(a), the movable parts 87, 88 are not driven and are stopped in their initial positions (upright positions).

Figure 38 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 38 (b). In this variable element of "Super Reach", the reach forming symbol of the "7" symbol displayed in the variable element of "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced form in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 38(c), a "battle performance" in which multiple character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle performance", a performance is executed in which the player's character symbol (e.g., the left character symbol) and the enemy's character symbol (e.g., the right character symbol) fight. In the "battle performance", if the player's character symbol wins, it is a jackpot, and a "jackpot display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, if the enemy's character symbol wins in the "battle performance", it is a loss, and a "loss display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of Fig. 38(c), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display states of Fig. 38(a) and Fig. 38(b), an execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, similar to Fig. 38(a) and Fig. 38(b), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the secondary display area Ds, so even if it continues to be displayed when the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, it does not significantly impede the presentation of the variable element of the "Super Reach" compared to when the secondary display area Ds is continuously displayed. Therefore, it is configured to continue to display the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed.

The reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can also execute a "reserved change notice", and are configured to inherit (take over) the display mode of the reserved symbols changed by the "reserved change notice" even in the execution symbols that suggest the content of the variable performance currently being executed. In other words, the display mode of the execution symbols is configured to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable performance currently being executed. Therefore, by having the player check the display mode of the execution symbols while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, the player is able to predict whether or not the variable element of the "Super Reach" currently being executed will result in a jackpot, providing an interest based on that prediction.

In addition, in FIG. 38(c), similar to FIG. 38(a) and FIG. 38(b), each of the movable parts 87, 88 is not driven and is stopped in its initial position (upright position).

In the state shown in FIG. 38(c), a reduced version of the reach-forming symbol, the "7" symbol that caused the "super reach", is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 38(c), the number symbol indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance (in the first embodiment, "4" is displayed) is not displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (below the "reach display") This is because in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is always displayed, so the player can recognize the number of variable performances by checking the display contents of the cockpit display area Db.

Figure 38 (d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 38 (c), the variable element of the "Super Reach" has failed (the enemy character pattern has won), and a "miss display" appears in the main display area Dm, while the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this state, the character pattern in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is once again visible. Note that the character pattern in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the "miss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends and the variable performance is stopped (confirmed), the display state of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be the initial state, that is, the state in which the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the variable performance has stopped (confirmed), and to smoothly execute the next variable performance if there is a variable performance on hold (waiting).

As shown in Figures 38(a) to 38(d), the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to make it easier for the player to recognize the display contents that are of high importance at each timing by enlarging, reducing, erasing or redisplaying the display state of the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds at each timing in the variable performance. Also, by constantly displaying the execution pattern and the reserved pattern to the player in the cockpit display area Db, the player can clearly recognize how many variable displays are on hold.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the movable parts 87, 88 are provided with two drive patterns: a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern." The lottery ratios for the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 will be described later.

In the "weak pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, the cockpit display area Db is not covered, and the execution pattern and the reserved pattern are visible. Although not shown, when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern", the third pattern display device 81 is configured to perform a predetermined first performance (for example, a performance in which the character pattern, etc. fights while avoiding each movable part 87, 88) in conjunction with the driving of the movable part 87, 88. Therefore, when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern", the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to send a display weak pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. When the display control device 114 receives the display weak pattern command, it recognizes that each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern", and is configured to execute the display control of the first performance according to the timing of driving of each movable part 87, 88 by the "weak pattern".

In the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable part 87, and the execution pattern and the reserved pattern cannot be seen. Although not shown, when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern", the third pattern display device 81 is configured to perform a predetermined second performance (for example, a performance in which the character pattern is cut by each movable part 87, 88) in conjunction with the driving of the movable part 87, 88. Therefore, when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern", the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to send a display strong pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. When the display control device 114 receives the display strong pattern command, it recognizes that each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern", and is configured to execute the display control of the second performance according to the timing of driving of each movable part 87, 88 by the "strong pattern".

In this way, each of the movable parts 87, 88 is configured so that the "weak pattern" drive pattern is extended and driven to become a "strong pattern" drive pattern. In other words, the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven with content that includes the "weak pattern" drive pattern. Therefore, when each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven, the player pays attention to the drive pattern of each of the movable parts 87, 88, i.e., whether the drive pattern ends in a "weak pattern" or whether the drive is extended and driven to a "strong pattern," and interest is generated as to which drive pattern the drive pattern will become.

In addition, the drive patterns of each movable part 87, 88 may be three or more types instead of two types, a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern." Specifically, a "medium pattern" may be provided, and the three-stage drive pattern may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

The drive patterns of each movable part 87, 88 may be configured to be completely different. Specifically, each movable part 87, 88 may be configured to rotate around the tip of the sword as an axis and rotate around the tip of the handle as an axis.

Furthermore, each of the movable parts 87, 88 may be initially positioned in a position that is not visible to the player. By configuring it in this way, each of the movable parts 87, 88 that were initially invisible will appear and disappear on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, surprising the player with their appearance and creating a powerful performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment stores a scenario table 222f different from the scenario table 222f of the ROM 222 in the first or second embodiment, and further stores at least a role selection table 222g.

Here, the scenario table 222f of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "reserve change notice" at the execution timing after the "strong pattern" is driven for the execution pattern. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to select the execution timing "after the strong pattern is driven" as the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" for the execution pattern. Specifically, when the execution of the "reserve change notice" is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f and determines one execution timing from among the execution timings of the "reserve change notice" including the execution timing "after the strong pattern is driven". FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of the third embodiment.

In the scenario table 222f1 for big wins in FIG. 41, the vertical rows are divided into a total of 12 situation patterns, which are divided into the display mode of the "reserve change notice" for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of reserved balls "1" to "4") at the time when the "reserve change notice" is decided, and the three patterns are "blue", "red", and "rainbow". In addition, the horizontal rows are divided into a total of eight timing patterns, which are four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4") and four patterns of "start (at shift)", "before reaching", "after reaching", or "after clearing reserved" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the execution of the corresponding variable performance). The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each divided group.

In the third embodiment, the "Hold Change Notice" is set so that the display mode of the determined "Hold Change Notice" is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns.

Specifically, for example, if "after strong pattern activation" when there are "0" reserved balls (during the corresponding variable performance) is selected as the timing to execute (start) the "reserve change notice," the "reserve change notice" is executed "after strong pattern activation" with the execution pattern during the variable performance in which the "reserve change notice" was determined and the left movable device 87 is activated in the "strong pattern," i.e., the left movable device 87 is covering the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db, and then, when the left movable device 87 returns to its original position, the execution pattern for which the "reserve change notice" has been executed becomes visible again to the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a reserved ball count command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and a lottery is held in the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to execute the "reserved change notice". When it is decided to execute the "reserved change notice", the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "reserved change notice" are first grasped. Then, if the change performance indicated by the reserved ball count command is a jackpot, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "reserved change notice" at the time of the jackpot is decided by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the scenario table 222f1 for big wins, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" and each display mode of the "reserved change notice," and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of Figure 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 14" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "15 to 49" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, and "50 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls 35%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%), followed by the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again (35%).

Next, as shown in the example of Figure 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 89" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserve change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserve change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls 60%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the timing when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is the most likely to be selected (60%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5-9" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "10-49" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" does not appear with the reserved symbol, and can only appear with the executed symbol, so in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing with "1" reserved balls.

That is, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 40%, "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls 50%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 0%. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" does not appear with the reserved pattern, and can only appear with the executed pattern, so in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, a value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing with "1" reserved balls.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed pattern and reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is most likely to be selected (50%), and the timing when the "reach display" is being executed is next most likely to be selected (40%). Note that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserved change notice" at the time of a jackpot is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time of determination of the "reserved change notice". Therefore, the explanation of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserved change notice" at the time of a jackpot when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination of the "reserved change notice" is "2" to "4" is omitted.

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "2". In this case, the reserved balls "3" or "4" do not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, the reserved patterns for the "three" or "four" reserved balls will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the reserved balls of "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of Figure 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 14" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "15 to 39" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 49" for "1" reserved ball, and "50 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls 25%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%), and next, the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again (25%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-79" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, "80-89" for "1" reserved ball, and "90-99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls 50%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is the most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of Figure 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5 to 9" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 14" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "15 to 29" for "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "1" reserved ball, "40 to 49" for "2" reserved balls, and "50 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls 15%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%), and next, the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again (15%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-69" for "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "70-79" for "1" reserved ball, "80-89" for "2" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls 40%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved symbols corresponding to the jackpot variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-4" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "5-9" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "10-14" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "15-19" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "1" reserved ball, "30-39" for "2" reserved balls, "40-49" for "3" reserved balls, and "50-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls 5%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of decision is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-59" for "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "60-69" for "1" reserved ball, "70-79" for "2" reserved balls, "80-89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 10% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 30% after the strong pattern is activated with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "3" reserved patterns (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), and 10% for "4" reserved patterns (i.e. when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the executed or reserved symbols corresponding to the jackpot variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red," the timing when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" and the executed and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is the most likely to be selected (30%).

In this way, when a "reserved change notice" is made for the reserved symbols and execution symbols that indicate a variable performance that generates a jackpot, the "reserved change notice" is configured to be made to appear (execute) at the timing when the execution symbols and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible after each movable role 87, 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" and then become visible again. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object (change object; in the third embodiment, the execution symbol), which is always visible, and makes it possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object. In other words, by making the notice object invisible once and then casually changing it, first, the player is made to feel strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the strange feeling is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), and thus it is possible to provide the player with a surprising performance while diversifying the performance and increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the loss scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment. In the loss scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 42, similar to the big win scenario table 222f1, for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the variable performance at the time when the vertical row determines the "reserved change notice", each reserved ball number is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns divided according to the display mode of the "reserved change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "reserved change notice" is divided into a total of eight different timing patterns: four patterns at the time of display or shift for each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4"), and four patterns at the time of "start (shift)", "before reaching", "after reaching", or "after clearing reserved balls" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the corresponding change performance).The value of the scenario counter 223d is then associated with each of these divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the scenario table for losses 222f2, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice" and each display mode of the "reserve change notice", and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserve change notice" suggests the occurrence of a jackpot when the "rainbow" display mode appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table for losses 222f2, a scenario counter 223d value is not assigned to any of the reserved ball numbers in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice", and therefore a description thereof is omitted.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of Figure 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, and "40 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have a selection rate of 10% for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls, and 60% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (60%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "1" and the display mode is "blue."

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the scenario counter 223d value was not assigned to "after pending deletion" in the scenario table 222f2 for losses, but in the scenario table 222f2 for losses in the third embodiment, the scenario counter 223d is set to be assigned to the execution timing "after the strong pattern is activated". This is because each movable part 87, 88 can also be executed in a loss variable performance, and the "big win display" is not confirmed even if the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is executed.

Next, as shown in the example of Figure 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, and "70 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the strong pattern is activated" with "0" reserved balls 10%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 30%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "1" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "2". In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of Figure 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10 to 19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 49" for "1" reserved ball, and "50 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "2" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 42 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "after strong pattern activation" with "0" reserved balls, "70 to 79" for "1" reserved ball, and "80 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection ratios: "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red," the timing of the display of the reserved pattern, or the "start," "before the reach," or "after the reach" of the relevant variable performance is set to be easily selected (20% each) for the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the variable performance when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "40-49" for "1" reserved ball, "50-59" for "2" reserved balls, and "60-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 10% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the strong pattern is activated with "0" reserved balls, 10% with "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), 10% with "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), and 40% with "3" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "3" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "70 to 79" for "1" reserved ball, "80 to 89" for "2" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 20% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 20% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 20% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the strong pattern is activated with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), and 10% for "3" reserved patterns (i.e. when the reserved pattern is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variable performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red," the "start," "before the reach" or "after the reach" of the variable performance is likely to be selected (20% each).

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined to be a miss is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "10-19" for "before reach" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "after reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "after strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "40-49" for "1" reserved ball, "50-59" for "2" reserved balls, "60-69" for "3" reserved balls, and "70-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 10% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 10% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the strong pattern is activated with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), and 30% for "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-19" for the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "20-39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40-49" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "50-59" for "after the strong pattern drive" with "0" reserved balls, "60-69" for "1" reserved ball, "70-79" for "2" reserved balls, "80-89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 20% at the "start" with "0" reserved balls, 20% before the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the reach with "0" reserved balls, 10% after the strong pattern is activated with "0" reserved balls, 10% for "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% for "3" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved pattern shifts), and 10% for "4" reserved patterns (i.e., when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variable performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red," the "start" or "before the reach" of the variable performance is likely to be selected (20% each).

In this way, by varying the execution timing (appearance timing) of the same "hold change notice (e.g., "blue") when the variable presentation fails and when a jackpot occurs, the likelihood of a jackpot can be made different by the display mode of the "hold change notice" and the timing at which it appears. Therefore, the suggestion of the likelihood of a jackpot by the "hold change notice" can be diversified depending on the display mode and appearance timing of the "hold change notice," making the game more interesting.

Returning to FIG. 40, the explanation will continue. In addition to the RAM 223 of the first or second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment is provided with at least a drive lottery counter 223g, a normal weak flag 223h, a super weak flag 223i, and a super strong flag 223j.

The drive selection counter 223g is a counter that selects whether or not each movable role object 87, 88 is driven and the drive pattern. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute a look-ahead process based on the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 according to the reserved ball number command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the change pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead process, the presentation mode of the change presentation indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and the drive selection counter 223g and the role selection table 222g select whether or not each movable role object 87, 88 is driven and the drive pattern based on the presentation mode.

The drive lottery counter 223g is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values of "0 to 99"). The value of the drive lottery counter 223g is updated (e.g., incremented by one) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the presentation mode of the variable presentation indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the role selection table 222g are referenced based on the presentation mode to determine whether or not each movable role 87, 88 is driven and the drive pattern (see S1363 in FIG. 48).

Now, referring to Figure 43, the feature selection table 222g will be described. Figure 43 is a diagram showing a schematic example of the feature selection table 222g. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it refers to the feature selection table 222g based on the value of the drive selection counter 223g at that time, and determines whether or not each movable feature 87, 88 is driven and the drive pattern. As shown in Figure 43, the feature selection table 222g is divided into groups based on the selected performance mode.

Specifically, there is the "non-reach" type, which is referenced when the "non-reach (shortened and normal)" presentation mode is determined when a miss occurs, the "normal reach: normal time" type, which is referenced when the "normal reach" presentation mode is determined when a miss occurs, the "super reach: normal time" and "super reach: super time" types, which are referenced when the "super reach" presentation mode is determined when a miss occurs, and the "special reach: normal time" and "special reach" types, which are referenced when the "special reach" presentation mode is determined when a miss occurs. The groups are divided into "normal reach: special", "normal reach: normal", which is referenced when the "normal reach" presentation mode is determined at the time of a jackpot, "super reach: normal" and "super reach: super", which are referenced when the "super reach" presentation mode is determined at the time of a jackpot, "special reach: normal" and "special reach: special", which are referenced when the "special reach" presentation mode is determined at the time of a jackpot, and "special variation" at the time of a jackpot. The divided groups are then associated with the possible values of the drive lottery counter 223g.

In addition, in the role selection table 222g, the "non-reach" performance mode when a win is not selected is not assigned a value of the drive selection counter 223g. This is because when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern", a certain drive time is required from the start of the drive to the end of the drive in either drive pattern. The "non-reach" performance mode when a win is not selected has a relatively short change time (for example, 3 seconds for the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode and 10 seconds for the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode), and does not have the performance width to drive each movable role 87, 88.

Here, referring to FIG. 44, the presentation time for each variable element in the variable presentation will be described. FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation time for each variable element in the variable presentation, and FIG. 44(b) is a diagram showing an example of the driving time of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable role 87, 88. The variable elements constitute a part of one variable presentation, and one variable presentation is composed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variable elements are a "high-speed variation" variable element, a "low-speed variation" variable element, a "pseudo fake" variable element, a "pseudo consecutive 1" variable element, a "pseudo consecutive 2" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, a "re-variation" variable element, and a "movie" variable element.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" in the third embodiment is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable performance if the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode is selected, and is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the variable performance if a performance mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode (for example, the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode) is selected.

The "slow fluctuation" variable element of the third embodiment is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected, and is executed for 3 seconds after the "fast fluctuation" variable element when a presentation mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode (for example, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode) is selected.

In the third embodiment, the variable elements of the "pseudo fake" are performed for 10 seconds after the first "slow fluctuation" variable elements, the variable elements of the "pseudo consecutive 1" are performed for 20 seconds together with the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" after the first "slow fluctuation" variable elements, and the variable elements of the "pseudo consecutive 2" are performed for 30 seconds together with the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" after the first "slow fluctuation" variable elements.

The "normal reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 5 seconds after the "slow fluctuation, etc." variable element. The "super reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after the "normal reach" variable element is executed. The "special reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 20 seconds after the "normal reach" variable element is executed. The "re-fluctuation" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display". The "movie" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 40 seconds after the "slow fluctuation" variable element.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the "weak pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is a drive pattern that requires three seconds to drive from the initial position (standing position) to the drive position (tilted position) and then return to the initial position (standing position). Specifically, the "weak pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is a drive pattern that requires one second to move from the initial position to the drive position, one second to maintain the drive position, and one second to move from the drive position to the initial position, for a total of three seconds.

The "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is a drive pattern that requires 8 seconds to drive from the initial position (standing position) to the drive position (tilted position) and then return to the initial position (standing position). Specifically, the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is a drive pattern that requires 2 seconds to move from the initial position to the drive position, 4 seconds to maintain the drive position, and 2 seconds to move from the drive position to the initial position, for a total of 8 seconds.

Therefore, the operating time of the "weak pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is short at 3 seconds, so it can be executed with each variable element such as the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the "super reach" shown in Figure 44 (a). On the other hand, the operating time of the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is long at 8 seconds, so it is an operating pattern that cannot be executed with the variable elements of the "high-speed fluctuation", the variable elements of the "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable elements of the "normal reach".

Now, referring to FIG. 45, the drive patterns and drive timings of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable performance will be described. FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the drive times and drive timings of each movable part 87, 88 in each variable performance, where FIG. 45(a) is a time chart showing the relationship of the "weak pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable element of the "normal reach" in the third embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a time chart showing the relationship of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable element of the "super reach", and FIG. 45(c) is a time chart showing the relationship of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable element of the "special reach".

As shown in FIG. 45(a), "normal reach only (E201H or E501H)" is composed of variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", and "normal reach". The driving pattern and driving timing of each movable part 87, 88 in "normal reach only (E201H or E501H)" is set to only one type, a "weak pattern" when the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed. This is because in the variable performance of "normal reach only (E201H or E501H)", the variable element of the "normal reach" is only executed for 5 seconds, so the "strong pattern (8 seconds)" of each movable part 87, 88 cannot be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 45 (b), "Super Reach only (E301H or E601H)" is composed of the following variable elements: a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, and a "super reach" variable element. The drive patterns and drive timings of each movable part 87, 88 in "Super Reach only (E301H or E601H)" are of three types: a "weak pattern" when the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, and a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" when the variable element of the "super reach" is executed. This is because in the variable presentation of "Super Reach only (E301H or E601H)", the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" cannot execute the "Strong Pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, but the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are executed for 10 seconds, so the "Strong Pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 can be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 45 (c), "Special reach only (E401H or E701H)" is composed of variable elements including a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, and a "special reach" variable element. The drive patterns and drive timings of each movable part 87, 88 in "Special reach only (E401H or E701H)" are of three types: a "weak pattern" when the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, and a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" when the variable element of the "special reach" is executed. This is because in the variable presentation of "Special Reach Only (E401H or E701H)", the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" cannot execute the "Strong Pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, but the variable elements of the "Special Reach" are executed for 20 seconds, so the "Strong Pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 can be executed.

Therefore, the "weak pattern" drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 can be driven when the variable elements of the "normal reach", the variable elements of the "super reach" and the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed, but the "strong pattern" drive pattern is configured to be driven only when the variable elements of the "super reach" and the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed.

In this way, the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is completed within each variable element (initial position → drive position → initial position), so it is possible to execute a performance in which the performance content of each variable element and the drive content of each movable part 87, 88 are linked, and an easy-to-understand and powerful performance can be executed by the third pattern display device 81 and each movable part 87, 88.

The driving patterns of the movable parts 87, 88 may be set to drive patterns that span variable elements. By configuring it in this way, the start of driving of each movable part 87, 88 can be freely set, making it difficult to predict when each movable part 87, 88 will start moving, providing an unexpected presentation and making the game more interesting.

Returning to Figure 43, the explanation will continue. As described above, in the role selection table 222g, the value of the drive selection counter 223g is not assigned to the "non-reach" presentation mode when a miss occurs. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the movable role pieces 87, 88 are set not to be driven in the "non-reach" presentation mode.

Next, in the role selection table 222g, in the "normal reach" presentation mode in the event of a miss, only "normal" is available as a selectable drive timing. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive selection counter 223g in the "normal reach" presentation mode is associated with the drive pattern as "0 to 89" for "none" and "90 to 99" for the "weak pattern" in "normal". Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern", it is represented as "-".

In other words, when the "normal reach" performance mode is selected when a win is lost, the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate is selected 90%, the "weak pattern" operation pattern in "normal" is selected 10%, and the "strong pattern" operation pattern in "normal" is selected 0%. Therefore, when selecting the operation pattern for the movable parts 87, 88 when the "normal reach" performance mode is lost, the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate is set to be selected most likely (90%).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode in the event of a miss, "Normal" and "Super" are available as selectable drive timings. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive selection counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "Super Reach" presentation mode is "0-69" for "none," "70-79" for the "weak pattern" in "normal," "80-89" for the "weak pattern" in "Super," and "90-99" for the "strong pattern" in "Super." Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" in "normal," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" performance mode is selected when a win is lost, the following ratios are set to be selected: 70% for the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate, 10% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern in "normal", 0% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern in "normal", 10% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern in "super", and 10% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern in "super". Therefore, the operation pattern of the movable parts 87, 88 selected when the "Super Reach" performance mode is lost is set to be the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate (70%).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, in the "special reach" presentation mode in the event of a miss, "normal" and "special" are available as selectable drive timings. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive selection counter 223g in the "special reach" presentation mode is associated with the drive pattern as follows: "0-49" for "none", "50-79" for the "weak pattern" in "normal", "80-89" for the "weak pattern" in "special", and "90-99" for the "strong pattern" in "special". Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" in "normal", it is indicated as "-".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" performance mode is selected when a win is lost, the following ratios are set to be selected: 50% for the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate, 30% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern in "normal", 0% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern in "normal", 10% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern in "special", and 10% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern in "special". Therefore, the operation pattern of the movable parts 87, 88 selected when the "Special Reach" performance mode is lost is set to be the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate (50%).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, only "normal" is available as a selectable drive timing for the "normal reach" presentation mode during a jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive selection counter 223g in the "normal reach" presentation mode is associated with the drive pattern as "0-29" for "none" and "30-99" for the "weak pattern" of "normal." Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode during a jackpot is selected, the following ratios are set: 30% for the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate, 70% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern during "normal time," and 0% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern during "normal time." Therefore, the operation pattern of the movable parts 87, 88 selected during the "normal reach" presentation mode during a jackpot is set to tend to select the operation pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 operate in the "weak pattern" during "normal time" (70%).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, for the "Super Reach" presentation mode during a jackpot, "Normal" and "Super" are available as selectable drive timings. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive selection counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "Super Reach" presentation mode is "0-19" for "none," "20-49" for the "weak pattern" during "normal," "50-69" for the "weak pattern" during "Super," and "70-99" for the "strong pattern" during "Super." Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" during "normal," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode during a jackpot is selected, the following ratios are set to be selected: 20% for the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate, 30% for the "weak pattern" drive pattern during "normal", 0% for the "strong pattern" drive pattern during "normal", 20% for the "weak pattern" drive pattern during "super", and 30% for the "strong pattern" drive pattern during "super". Therefore, the drive patterns of the movable parts 87, 88 selected during the "Super Reach" presentation mode during a jackpot are set to be such that the drive pattern that operates in the "weak pattern" during "normal" and the drive pattern that operates in the "strong pattern" during "super" are more likely to be selected (30% each).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, for the "special reach" presentation mode during a jackpot, "normal" and "special" are available as selectable drive timings. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the correspondence between the value of the drive selection counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "special reach" presentation mode is "0-9" for "none," "10-19" for the "weak pattern" during "normal," "20-49" for the "weak pattern" during "special," and "50-99" for the "strong pattern" during "special." Note that since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" during "normal," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode during a jackpot is selected, the following ratios are set to be selected: 10% for the "none" pattern in which the movable parts 87, 88 do not operate, 10% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern during "normal", 0% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern during "normal", 30% for the "weak pattern" operation pattern during "special", and 50% for the "strong pattern" operation pattern during "special". Therefore, the operation pattern of the movable parts 87, 88 selected during the "Special Reach" presentation mode during a jackpot is set to make it easier to select the "strong pattern" operation pattern during "special" (50%).

Next, in the role selection table 222g, the value of the drive selection counter 223g is not assigned to the "special variation" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the "special variation" presentation mode is set so that the movable roles 87, 88 are not driven. This is because, in the "special variation" presentation mode, the "movie" variable element is executed, and the presentation of the "movie" variable element is not a presentation corresponding to the drive mode of the movable roles 87, 88, such as the "battle presentation" of the "super reach" variable element and the "race presentation" of the "special reach" variable element. Therefore, when the "special variation" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot is selected, the movable roles 87, 88 are configured not to be driven.

In this way, by using the device selection table 222g and the drive selection counter 223g to select the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable device 87, 88 from a number of preset patterns and by differentiating the selection ratios for when a jackpot is hit and when a miss occurs, the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable device 87, 88 can diversify the indications of the likelihood of a jackpot when each movable device 87, 88 is driven, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 40, the explanation will continue. The reserved information storage area 223e is an area for storing information for performing the look-ahead process, namely, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1, which are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the start winning occurs and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, reserved change information indicating the display mode of the "reserved change notice," scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "reserved change notice," and drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of each movable role 87, 88.

The voice lamp control device 113 executes a look-ahead process (a hold display setting process (see FIG. 48)) using the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a-222d stored in the ROM 222. The voice lamp control device 113 also stores the hold change information, scenario data and drive pattern information obtained by the look-ahead process in the hold change information storage area 223e5, scenario data storage area 223e6 and drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the hold information storage area 223e, respectively, and executes a "hold change notice" based on the values stored in each area 223e5, 223e6 and 223e10.

Here, referring to FIG. 46, the details of the reserved information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the reserved information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment. The configuration of the reserved information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the third embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the reserved information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f are provided with the drive pattern information storage areas 223e10 and 223f10 that store the drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of each movable role object 87 and 88, respectively, and that the reserved deletion information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8 are not provided. The other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, so their description will be omitted.

The pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the third embodiment do not have the pending deletion information storage area 223e7, 223f7 and the re-change information storage area 223e8, 223f8, so the storage capacity is reduced compared to the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the first embodiment.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it performs a look-ahead process (reserved display setting process (see FIG. 48)) based on the values of the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the reserved information storage area X that correspond to the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b updated by the reserved ball count command, among the reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the reserved information storage area 223e, and stores the reserved change information, scenario data and drive pattern information generated based on the results of this look-ahead process in the storage areas 223e5, 223e6 and 223e10 of the same reserved information storage area X.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a change performance from the main control device 110, it executes a shift process in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. In other words, the number of pending change performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first pending change performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the pending information storage first area corresponding to the first pending change performance are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f6 and 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the currently executing change performance.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the first pending information storage area, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the second pending information storage area, and the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6, 223e10 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control unit 110. Also, the first to fourth reserved information storage areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. In other words, in the voice lamp control unit 113, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and on hold in the main control unit 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e.

In the third embodiment, in the pre-reading process when the reserved ball count command is received, the values of the counters C1, etc. indicated by the reserved ball count command are judged, and the drive pattern information of each movable part 87, 88 is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 based on the judgment result. Alternatively, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, each movable part 87, 88 indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command may be judged, and various processes may be executed based on the judgment result. By configuring in this way, it becomes impossible to store the drive patterns of each movable part 87, 88 in the pre-reading process, but there is no need to provide the drive pattern information storage areas 223e10, 223f10 in the reserved information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f, and the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

Returning to Figure 40, the explanation will continue. The normal weak flag 223h, super weak flag 223i, and super strong flag 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment are flags that indicate the drive timing of each movable part 87, 88 when in the on state. The normal weak flag 223h, super weak flag 223i, and super strong flag 223j are each set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on.

In the third embodiment, when the reserved ball count command is received, a drive lottery is performed for each movable role 87, 88 (see S1362 in FIG. 48), and if the drive lottery is won, drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the reserved information storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command. Then, at the start of the variable performance, the winning drive timing is determined, and either the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is turned on for each drive timing (see S1453 to S1455 in FIG. 49). In addition, after each movable role 87, 88 is driven based on the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is set to off (see S1606, S1611, S1615 in FIG. 51).

The audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment is configured to check the variable elements being executed in the variable performance and the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j in the role drive process (see S1151 in FIG. 28) executed in the main process during the execution of the variable performance, and to control the drive of each movable role 87, 88.

Specifically, a timer (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 grasps the fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the variable performance to be executed. Then, when the normal weak flag 223h is on, the MPU 221 sets a value (e.g., "11000") so that the timer times out during the execution of the variable element of the "normal reach" (e.g., one second after the start of the variable element of the "normal reach") based on the grasped fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time. Then, the timer value is updated (decremented) when the variable performance starts, and each movable part 87, 88 is configured to be driven in the "weak pattern" when the timer times out (e.g., "0").

When the Super Weak Flag 223i is on, the MPU 221 sets a value (e.g., "16000") so that the timer times out during the execution of the "Super Reach" variable element or the "Special Reach" variable element (e.g., one second after the start of the "Super Reach" variable element or the "Special Reach" variable element) based on the grasped variable pattern and variable time. The timer value is then updated (decremented) when the variable performance starts, and each movable part 87, 88 is configured to be driven in the "weak pattern" when the timer times out (e.g., "0").

In addition, when the Super Strong Flag 223j is on, the MPU 221 sets a value (e.g., "16000") so that the timer times out during the execution of the "Super Reach" variable element or the "Special Reach" variable element (e.g., 1 second after the start of the "Super Reach" variable element or the "Special Reach" variable element) based on the grasped variable pattern and variable time.Then, the timer value is updated (decremented) when the variable performance starts, and each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" when the timer times out (e.g., "0").

The "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" activation timing of each movable part 87, 88 is set to occur a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) after the start of the variable element of each reach, but instead of this configuration, the start timing may be configured to be different for each activation pattern. With this configuration, the player can play while anticipating whether or not each movable part 87, 88 will activate at each timing, thereby increasing the opportunities for interest.

The input/output port 225 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the left movable part 87, and the right movable part 88.

The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to drive the left movable part 87 with a motor for the left part (not shown) and drive the right movable part 88 with a motor for the right part (not shown) depending on the settings of the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, and the super strong flag 223j.

As mentioned above, the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each movable device 87, 88 is configured to be executed only when the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" is executed. By configuring it in this way, for example, by allocating the execution timing of the "hold change notice" to the latter half of the variable performance ("after reach" or "after strong pattern drive"), the player can play while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "hold change notice" which increases the expectation of a jackpot even in the latter half of the variable performance. Therefore, since the player can play while expecting a jackpot until the latter half of the variable performance, it is possible to provide interest to the player for a long period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform a role drive process (S1151) in the main processing to control the drive of each movable role 87, 88.

Specifically, in the process of S1101 of the main process of the third embodiment, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), similarly to the first embodiment, after the processes of S1102 to S1108 are performed, the process proceeds to S1151. In the process of S1151, a role drive process is performed to drive each of the movable role pieces 87, 88 (S1151), and then the process proceeds to the variable performance process of S1109. Details of this role drive process (S1151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. Also, this variable performance process (S1109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process, which is one process of the command determination process (see S1110 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold ball number command, it performs this hold display setting process, and when it is determined that the "hold change notice" is to be executed, it stores the hold change information and scenario data in each storage area 223e5, 223e6 of the hold information storage Xth area indicated by the hold ball number command. The voice lamp control device 113 also determines whether each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the variable performance indicated by the hold ball number command. If the result of the determination is that each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in the variable performance, drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of each of the movable parts 87, 88 is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the reserve display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the lottery for executing the "reserve change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command (S1303). If the result of the determination is that the lottery for executing the "reserve change notice" has not been won (S1303: No), the "reserve change notice" will not be executed, and therefore, in order to erase information related to the "reserve change notice", null data is stored in the reserve change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserve information storage area X (S1361), and the process proceeds to S1362.

On the other hand, if the "reserved ball change notice" execution lottery is won in the processing of S1303 (S1303: Yes), similar to the first embodiment, the processing of S1304 and S1305 is carried out, the reserved ball change information and scenario data are stored in the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the reserved ball storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command, and the processing proceeds to S1362.

In the process of S1362, it is determined whether or not the drive lottery for driving each movable role 87, 88 in the variable performance indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command has been won (S1362). This determination is made by referring to the drive lottery counter 223g and the role lottery table 222g. If the value of the drive lottery counter 223g corresponds to "none" in the role lottery table 222g corresponding to the performance mode of the variable performance, it is determined that the drive lottery has not been won, whereas if the value of the drive lottery counter 223g corresponds to "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" in the role lottery table 222g, it is determined that the drive lottery has been won.

As a result of the determination, if the drive lottery for each movable part 87, 88 has been won (S1362: Yes), each movable part 87, 88 will be driven in that variable performance, and drive pattern information indicating that drive pattern will be stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the reserved information storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command (S1363), and processing will proceed to S1313. By processing S1363, the drive mode and drive timing of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable performance can be recognized. In addition, in the process of S1362, if it is determined that the driving lottery for each of the movable parts 87, 88 has not been won (S1362: No), each of the movable parts 87, 88 will not be executed, and therefore, in order to erase information regarding the driving of each of the movable parts 87, 88, null data is stored in the driving pattern information storage area 223e10 of the pending information storage area X (S1364), and the process proceeds to S1313.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when a reserved ball count command is received, the reserved clearing information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db will be cleared in the variable performance and the re-change information indicating whether the "re-change" variable element will be performed in the variable performance are not distinguished and stored. This is because in the third embodiment, the "reserved change notice" can be executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is made invisible by each movable part 87, 88, and there is no need to perform a process to determine the reserved clearing information or the re-change information to determine whether the "reserved change notice" can be executed "after the reserved clearing" as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 and also reduces the control burden on the MPU 221.

Next, the variable performance processing (S1109) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variable performance processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment.

This variable performance process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and in order to display the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81, first, various information stored in the reserved information storage area 1 of the reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3. In addition, if the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated, and a process is performed to set this command to be sent to the display control device 114. Furthermore, in the variable performance to be executed, when each movable role 87, 88 is driven, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is set according to the drive pattern. In addition, when it is time to execute the "reserved change notice" for the executed pattern and the reserved pattern, various commands related to the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" are generated, and processing is performed to set up these commands for transmission to the display control device 114.

In the fluctuation performance process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation performance process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, so similar to the first embodiment, the processes of S1402 to S1410 are performed, and the process proceeds to S1451.

In the process of S1451, a determination is made as to whether or not each of the movable parts 87, 88 will be driven in the variable performance to be executed (S1451). This determination is made based on the drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f. If it is determined that each of the movable parts 87, 88 will be driven in the variable performance to be executed (S1451: Yes), then the drive pattern and drive timing of each of the movable parts 87, 88 are determined (S1452).

As a result of the judgment in S1452, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable part 87, 88 are the "weak pattern" in "normal time" (S1452: "weak pattern in normal time"), the normal weak flag 223h is set to on (S1453), and the process proceeds to S1411. Also, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable part 87, 88 are the "weak pattern" in "super time" (S1452: "weak pattern in super time"), the super weak flag 223i is set to on (S1454), and the process proceeds to S1411. Furthermore, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable part 87, 88 are the "strong pattern" in "super time" (S1452: "strong pattern in super time"), the super strong flag 223j is set to on (S1455), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the set flags 223h to 223j are referenced by the reel drive process (see S1151 in FIG. 47) described below, and each movable reel 87, 88 is driven at the set timing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a performance (first performance or second performance) in which each movable role 87, 88 and the character pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are linked at the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven. Therefore, when changing the drive pattern of each movable role 87, 88, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to send a display drive pattern change command indicating that the drive pattern of each movable role 87, 88 has been changed to the display control device 114. By receiving the display drive pattern change command, the display control device 114 recognizes that each movable role 87, 88 has been changed from a "weak pattern" to a "strong pattern" and is configured to execute display control of the second performance according to the drive timing of each movable role 87, 88 by the "strong pattern".

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the execution pattern change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the execution pattern change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This execution pattern change process is executed in the variable performance process (see FIG. 49) executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and is performed to execute a "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the third pattern display device 81.

In the execution symbol change process of the third embodiment, if the result of the judgment in S1501 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating "after strong pattern drive" with the number of reserved balls being "0" (S1501: "after strong pattern drive"), in order to confirm whether or not a "reserved change notice" can be executed after each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern", it is judged whether or not each movable role 87, 88 is executed in the "strong pattern" in the variable performance (S1561). This judgment is made based on the processing of S1363 of the reserved display setting process (see FIG. 48), and the judgment is made on the drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f.

If the result of the judgment in S1561 is that the drive pattern information of the "strong pattern" is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1561: Yes), then the "hold change notice" can be executed after the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 is driven, so in order to execute the "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-strong pattern change command is set to the display control device 114 (S1562), and the process returns to the change performance process (see FIG. 49).

The display strong pattern change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). The display control device 114 that has received the display strong pattern change command performs display control so that the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is changed to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") at the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" in the variable performance and the cockpit display area Db is covered. Specifically, each movable role 87, 88 starts driving one second after the start of the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach", and the cockpit display area Db is covered two seconds after the start of the drive, and the state in which the left movable role 87 covers the cockpit display area Db is maintained for three seconds from that point. Therefore, when the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable device 87, the display mode of the execution pattern is changed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1561 that the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f does not store the drive pattern information for the "strong pattern" (S1561: No), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by each movable part 87, 88 used in the variable performance, so the "pending change notice" after "strong pattern drive" cannot be executed. Therefore, the processing proceeds to S1563 to check whether the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 can be changed to execute the "pending change notice" after "strong pattern drive".

In the process of S1563, it is determined whether or not a variable element of "Super Reach or more" is selected in the variable presentation (S1563). This determination is made by determining the variable pattern in the variable presentation extracted from the variable pattern command stored in RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

If the result of the judgment in S1563 is that the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" has not been selected in the variable presentation (S1563: No), this executed symbol change process (S1414) is terminated without setting a command to change the executed symbol, and the process returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 49). In other words, when the "hold change notice" "after strong pattern drive" is selected, in a variable presentation in which "Super Reach or higher" is not performed, the "hold change notice" is not executed in the executed symbol. By configuring in this way, when the timing for executing the "hold change notice" is not appropriate for the presentation, the "hold change notice" of the executed symbol is not executed, and a consistent presentation can be provided to the player without any inconsistencies in the presentation content.

In the process of S1563, if a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is not selected in the variable presentation (S1563: No), for example, the process may proceed to S1504 to determine whether or not there is an execution timing at which a "reserve change notice" can be performed for the executed symbol. By configuring in this way, the selected "reserve change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing, reducing cases where the "reserve change notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, increasing the execution rate of the "reserve change notice", and improving the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S1563 is that a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is selected in the variable performance (S1563: Yes), since there is a variable element that can drive each movable part 87, 88 in a "strong pattern", the super strong flag 223j is set to ON in order to change the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 (S1564). Next, the normal weak flag 223h and the super weak flag 223i are cleared (set to OFF) (S1565), and the process proceeds to S1562. In S1562, as described above, a display strong pattern post-change command is set to the display control device 114. The display control device 114, which has received the change command after the strong display pattern, performs display control so that the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is changed to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") at the timing when each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" during the variable performance.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a "reserve change notice" is selected "after strong pattern activation" in the variable performance, if the "reserve change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing "after strong pattern activation" in the variable performance, i.e., if each movable part 87, 88 does not activate in the "strong pattern", the presence or absence of a variable element capable of executing the activation pattern of the "strong pattern" (e.g., a variable element related to "super reach or higher") is determined. Then, if it is determined that the variable element capable of executing the activation pattern of the "strong pattern" (e.g., a variable element related to "super reach or higher") is included, the activation pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is changed to the "strong pattern".

Therefore, even if the "strong pattern" is not initially selected as the driving pattern of each movable part 87, 88, and therefore the "after strong pattern drive" is selected as the execution timing of the "reserve change notice", it is not possible to execute it at that execution timing and it is changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reach"), if the variable performance allows the driving of each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern", the driving pattern of each movable part 87, 88 can be changed to the "strong pattern", and the "reserve change notice" after the "strong pattern drive" can be executed after making the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player. By configuring in this way, when the "reserve change notice" after the "strong pattern drive" is selected, it is possible to easily execute the "reserve change notice" at the execution timing of the "after strong pattern drive". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a "reserved change notice" is performed in the execution pattern, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is made invisible by each movable role 87, 88, and the "reserved change notice" can be made to appear (executed) when the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object (change object; in the third embodiment, the execution pattern), which is always visible, and makes it possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object. In particular, since the driving of each movable role 87, 88 is a performance in which an object moves directly, the player pays attention to the movement of each movable role 87, 88. By casually changing the predicted object while the player is paying attention to the movement of each movable device 87, 88 (while the predicted object is hidden from view), the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly connected to the value of the game (for example, a jackpot), providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when making the execution pattern (or reserved pattern) that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible, it is possible to make the execution pattern (or reserved pattern) that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible by changing the drive pattern of each movable role 87, 88 that is different from the third pattern display device 81, rather than changing the performance content of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, when there are no changeable variable elements in the variable performance, the "reserve change notice" can be executed at the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" that was initially set, without changing the execution timing of the "reserve change notice". This can increase the opportunities for players to execute unexpected performances, diversify the performances, and increase the interest of the game.

Now, referring to FIG. 51, the role drive process (S1151) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the role drive process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this role drive process (S1151) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and in order to drive each movable role 87, 88 with a drive pattern set based on the content of the variable performance, first, it is confirmed whether the variable performance is changing (executing) in the third pattern display device 81 (S1601). If the variable performance is not changing in the third pattern display device (S1601: No), this role drive process (S1151) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the third symbol display device 81 is fluctuating (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a "normal reach" is being executed in the fluctuating performance (S1602). This determination is made using a timer or the like as described above. If the result of the determination is that a "normal reach" is being executed in the fluctuating performance (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the normal weak flag 223h is on (S1603), and it is confirmed whether or not each movable role 87, 88 is driven in a "weak pattern" during the execution of the "normal reach". If the result of the determination is that the normal weak flag 223h is on (S1603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing to drive each movable role 87, 88 in a "weak pattern" in the "normal reach" (S1604). This determination is made, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating element of the "normal reach". If a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of the "normal reach" (S1604: Yes), it is time to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in the "normal reach", so each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern" (S1605). After that, the normal weak flag 223h is set to off (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S1602 that the "normal reach" is not being executed (S1602: No), if in the process of S1603 the normal weak flag 223h is not set to on (S1603: No), or if in the process of S1604 it is not the timing to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in the "normal reach" (S1604: No), since it is not the timing to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "weak pattern", the processes of S1605 and S1606 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1607.

In the process of S1607, it is determined whether or not a "Super Reach" or a "Special Reach" is being executed in the variable performance during the change (S1607). If the result of the determination is that a "Super Reach" or a "Special Reach" is being executed in the variable performance (S1607: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the Super Weak Flag 223i is on (S1608), and it is confirmed whether or not each movable role 87, 88 is to be driven in a "weak pattern" during the execution of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach". If the result of the determination is that the Super Weak Flag 223i is on (S1608: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the timing to drive each movable role 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" (S1609). This determination is made, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach". If a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" (S1609: Yes), it is time to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" in the "weak pattern", so each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern" (S1610). After that, the super weak flag 223i is set to OFF (S1611), this part drive process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, if the super weak flag 223i is not on in the processing of S1608 (S1608: No), then it is determined whether the super strong flag 223j is on (S1612), and it is confirmed whether each movable part 87, 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" during the execution of the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach". If the result of the determination is that the super strong flag 223j is on (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing to drive each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" in the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" (S1613). This determination is made, for example, by determining whether a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach". If a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" (S1613: Yes), it is time to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "Strong Pattern" in the "Super Reach" or "Special Reach", so each of the movable parts 87, 88 is driven in the "Strong Pattern" (S1614). After that, the Super Strong Flag 223j is set to OFF (S1615), this part drive process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

In the process of S1607, if it is determined that "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" is not being executed (S1607: No), it is not the timing to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the variable performance, so this part drive process (S1511) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47). In addition, in the process of S1609, if it is not the timing to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" (S1609: No), it is not the timing to drive each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the "weak pattern", so the processes of S1610 and S1611 are skipped, this part drive process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Furthermore, in the process of S1612, if the super strong flag 223j is not set to ON (S1612: No), the movable parts 87, 88 are not selected for driving and the movable parts 87, 88 are not driven, so the process of S1613 to S1615 is skipped, this part driving process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Also, in the process of S1613, if it is not the timing to drive the movable parts 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" in the "super reach" or "special reach" (S1613: No), it is not the timing to drive the movable parts 87, 88 in the "strong pattern", so the process of S1614 and S1615 is skipped, this part driving process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Now, referring to FIG. 52, an example of the execution of the "reserve change notice" after the "strong pattern drive" in which the executed pattern changes after each movable part 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the drive mode of the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 and the situation in which the "reserve change notice" after the "strong pattern drive" is performed in the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 of the third embodiment.

Specifically, FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 52(a) and a "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 52(c) is a diagram showing a state in which a "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(d) is a diagram showing a state in which each movable role 87, 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" from the state of FIG. 52(c) and the cockpit display area Db is covered by each movable role 87, 88. FIG. 52(e) is a diagram showing a state in which each movable role 87, 88 is driven in a "strong pattern" from the state of FIG. 52(d) and then returns to the initial position, and the cockpit display area Db is again visible. FIG. 52(f) shows the state just before the "big win display" appears from the state of FIG. 52(e). Note that in FIG. 52(a) to FIG. 52(f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 52(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still "high-speed fluctuating" and cannot be seen. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Also, since each of the movable parts 87, 88 is stopped in the initial position (standing position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by each of the movable parts 87, 88. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In addition, each of the movable parts 87, 88 maintains its initial position (upright on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81), and almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is visible to the player.

In FIG. 52(b), from the state of FIG. 52(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and a "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", the entire main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

When the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of a "normal reach", the secondary display area Ds is erased and becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state in FIG. 52(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Also, since each of the movable parts 87, 88 is stopped in the initial position (standing position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by each of the movable parts 87, 88. Therefore, similar to FIG. 52(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In addition, each of the movable parts 87, 88 maintains its initial position (upright on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81) as in FIG. 52(a), and almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is visible to the player.

Figure 52 (c) shows a state in which a "Super Reach" has been executed in the main display area Dm from the state shown in Figure 52 (b). In this "Super Reach", the "7" symbol that was displayed in the "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in FIG. 52(c), a "battle effect" ("competition effect" for "special reach") in which multiple character images compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In the state of Fig. 52(c), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display states of Fig. 52(a) and Fig. 52(b), an execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, similar to Fig. 52(a) and Fig. 52(b), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In addition, each of the movable parts 87, 88 maintains its initial position (upright on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81) as in Figures 52(a) and 52(b), and almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is visible to the player.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 52(c), a reduced version of the reach-forming symbol, the "7" symbol that caused this "super reach", is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Figure 52(d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 52(c), the movable parts 87, 88 are driven in a "strong pattern" during a "super reach", and the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable parts 87, 88. In this state, the player hopes that the character design on the player's side will win in the "battle performance" of the "super reach" based on the fact that the movable parts 87, 88 are driven in a "strong pattern", and that a "jackpot display result" will appear in the variable performance.

In addition, the cockpit display area Db is entirely covered by the movable parts 87, 88, and the executed and reserved symbols are not visible to the player. Therefore, the player is paying attention to the execution content of the "Super Reach" and the operation state of the movable parts 87, 88, and is paying less attention to the cockpit display area Db, which is no longer visible.

Figure 52 (e) shows the state in which the operation of each movable reel 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" has ended from the state in Figure 52 (d), and each movable reel 87, 88 has returned to its initial position (upright on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81). In addition, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode ("red") that has changed from the display mode ("white"; see Figure 52 (c)) before the operation of each movable reel 87, 88 in the "strong pattern". In other words, this shows that a "pending change notice" has been made at the execution timing "after the strong pattern operation".

At this point, the player who sees this "reserved change notice" for the first time "after the strong pattern is activated" first notices the difference in the display state of the execution pattern from before the activation of the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, and feels something strange. Then, he realizes that the source of the strange feeling is the "red" execution pattern. Then, he uses his memory to consider when the "reserved change notice" of the "red" execution pattern was made. As a result of this consideration, he realizes that the "reserved change notice" was not made before the activation of each movable part 87, 88, but was executed after the activation of the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 ended. At this moment, the player speculates that the expectation value for the "jackpot display" has increased further because the variable element of the "super reach", the activation of each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern", and the change to the "red" execution pattern are all combined and executed in the variable performance during execution.

Figure 52(f) shows the state just before the "jackpot display" appears in the main display area Dm, from the state in Figure 52(e). In this state, the "jackpot display" "777" is displayed in each display area Dm1 to Dm3. As the player would have guessed at the stage in Figure 52(e), the player can feel a sense of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display" in the variable presentation.

In addition, once a player has experienced this "pending change notice" after "strong pattern activation," the next time each of the movable parts 87, 88 is activated in the "strong pattern," the player will check whether the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db has changed when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again after it has been obscured by each of the movable parts 87, 88. This creates the interest of checking the display state of the execution pattern after each of the movable parts 87, 88 is activated in the "strong pattern," and the player can enjoy the combination of the interest (joy) of each of the movable parts 87, 88 being activated in the "strong pattern" and the interest (joy) of the execution pattern changing without any pause, dramatically increasing the interest in the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is made invisible to the player by driving (for example, driving in the "strong pattern") the movable parts (for example, each movable part 87, 88) in the variable performance, and then a "reserved change notice" is made when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object, compared to when the notice object (change object; in the third embodiment, the execution pattern) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when a new notice object is made to appear and notified. By casually changing the notice object, first, a sense of incongruity is given to the player, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), and thus it is possible to diversify the presentation and increase the interest of the game while providing the player with a surprising presentation.

In particular, since the actuation of the movable parts (each movable part 87, 88) is an effect in which an object moves directly, the player is likely to pay attention to the movement of the movable parts (each movable part 87, 88). Then, while the player is paying attention to the movement of the movable parts (each movable part 87, 88), the predicted object that is no longer visible due to the movable parts is casually changed, first giving the player a sense of incongruity, and then having the player recognize that the source of that incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), providing the player with an unexpected effect while diversifying the effects and increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, once a player has experienced the "pending change notice" after the movable role is driven ("after the strong pattern is driven"), when the next movable role (the "strong pattern" of each movable role 87, 88) is driven, the player will check whether the notice object (execution pattern) of the cockpit display area Db has changed when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again after the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the movable role (each movable role 87, 88). This creates an interest in checking the display state of the notice object after the movable role (the "strong pattern" of each movable role 87, 88) is driven, and the player can enjoy the interest (joy) of the movable role (each movable role 87, 88 is the "strong pattern") driven and the interest (joy) of the notice object changing without any pause, which can dramatically increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, when a "hold change notice" is selected after the movable part is driven ("after strong pattern drive") in the variable performance, if the "hold change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing after the movable part is driven ("after strong pattern drive") in the variable performance, i.e., if the movable part does not drive (each movable part 87, 88 is in the "strong pattern"), the presence or absence of a variable element (e.g., a variable element related to "super reach or higher") that can drive the movable part (the drive pattern of the "strong pattern") is determined. Then, if it is determined that the variable element (e.g., a variable element related to "super reach or higher") that can drive the movable part (the drive pattern of the "strong pattern") is included, the drive pattern is changed to drive the movable part (the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is changed to the "strong pattern").

Therefore, when "after strong pattern drive" is initially selected as the execution timing of the "reserve change notice", the cockpit display area Db is not covered by each movable part 87, 88, so even in a situation where the "reserve change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of the "after strong pattern drive" and is changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reach"), it is confirmed whether or not the variable performance can drive each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern". Then, when the variable performance can drive each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern", it is possible to execute the "reserve change notice" "after strong pattern drive" after changing the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 to the "strong pattern" and making the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player. By configuring in this way, when the "reserve change notice" "after strong pattern drive" is selected, it is possible to easily execute the "reserve change notice" at the execution timing of the "after strong pattern drive". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when making the execution pattern (or reserved pattern) that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible, the drive pattern of each movable role 87, 88 is changed to a "strong pattern" rather than changing the performance content of the third pattern display device 81, thereby making it possible to make the execution pattern (or reserved pattern) that is the target of the "reserve change notice" invisible. Therefore, when there is no variable element that can be changed in the variable performance, the "reserve change notice" can be executed at the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" that was initially set, without changing the execution timing of the "reserve change notice". This can therefore increase the opportunities for unexpected performances to be executed for the player, diversifying the performances and increasing the interest of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, when the "reserved change notice" after "strong pattern drive" is selected in the variable performance, if the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is not initially selected as the "strong pattern" in the variable performance, it is confirmed whether there is a variable element that can execute the drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 in the variable performance. Then, if there is a variable element that can drive each movable part 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" in the variable performance, the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is changed to the "strong pattern" and the "reserved change notice" after the initially set "strong pattern drive" is executed.

However, if the variable presentation does not include a variable element that can execute the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88, the "strong pattern" of each movable part 87, 88 cannot be executed, the drive pattern of each movable part 87, 88 is not changed, and the "reserve change notice" is not executed in the executed pattern. Therefore, even if the "reserve change notice" after "strong pattern drive" is selected, the "reserve change notice" cannot be executed at that timing and a variable presentation is performed, so the presentation ends up being monotonous and there is a risk of not increasing the interest of the game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to be able to display a large character cut-in image Dc2 (see FIG. 54(b)) so that it overlaps with the cockpit display area Db during the variable performance, and the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is configured to be shorter than the execution time of any variable element of the variable performance. Also, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to display any variable element at all times while the variable performance is being executed. Furthermore, during the variable performance, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that it cannot be seen by the player while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. After that, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 disappears and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, a "pending change notice" is executed "after the large cut-in display", in which the display mode of the execution pattern changes.

In this manner, the large character cut-in image Dc2, which has a display time shorter than the execution time of each variable element, conceals the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db, and when the concealment is released, a "reserved change notice" is given to the execution pattern after the reserved change is cleared. This makes it harder for the player to notice the change in the notice object, and changes the display mode of the execution pattern casually, compared to when the notice object (change object) that is always visible is directly changed and a notice is given, or when a new notice object is made to appear and a notice is given. By casually changing the execution pattern, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of the uneasiness is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), which provides the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 53, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when "normal reach" and "super reach" appear in the variable performance of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing the state immediately before the "reach display (normal reach)" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 53(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the occurrence of the "normal reach" is confirmed from the state of FIG. 53(a), the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 53(c) is a diagram showing the state in which the "super reach" occurs from the state of FIG. 53(b), and the "super reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 53(d) is a diagram showing the state in which the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed from the state of FIG. 53(c), and the "miss display" of the third symbol appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 53(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is "high-speed fluctuating" so that it is not yet visible. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In FIG. 53(b), from the state of FIG. 53(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a variable element of the "normal reach", and the secondary display area Ds is in an unviewable state. This is because, when a "reach display" occurs in the primary display area Dm, the display contents of the primary display area Dm are enlarged and displayed, and the secondary display area Ds is erased as it expands, so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "reach display" that the player is focusing on.

In the state of Fig. 53(b), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of Fig. 53(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, as in Fig. 53(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 53 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 53 (b). In this variable element of "Super Reach", the reach forming pattern of the "7" pattern displayed in the variable element of "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced form in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In FIG. 53(c), a "battle performance" in which multiple character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle performance", a performance (kickboxing in the fourth embodiment) is executed in which the player's character symbol (e.g., the left character symbol) and the enemy's character symbol (e.g., the right character symbol) fight. In the "battle performance", if the player's character symbol wins, a jackpot is awarded, and a "jackpot display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, if the enemy's character symbol wins in the "battle performance", a loss is awarded, and a "loss display" is set to appear as the display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of Fig. 53(c), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display states of Fig. 53(a) and Fig. 53(b), an execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, similar to Fig. 53(a) and Fig. 53(b), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the secondary display area Ds, so even if it continues to be displayed during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach", it does not hinder the presentation of the variable element of the "Super Reach" compared to the secondary display area Ds. Therefore, it is configured to continue to display the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach".

The reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can also execute a "reserved change notice", and are configured to inherit (take over) the display mode of the reserved symbols changed by the "reserved change notice" even in the execution symbols that suggest the content of the variable performance currently being executed. In other words, the display mode of the execution symbols is configured to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable performance currently being executed. Therefore, by having the player check the display mode of the execution symbols while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, the player is able to predict whether or not the variable element of the "Super Reach" currently being executed will result in a jackpot, providing an interest based on that prediction.

In the state shown in Figure 53 (c), a reduced version of the reach-forming symbol, the "7" symbol that caused the variable element of this "Super Reach", is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 53(c), the number symbol (in the first embodiment, "4") indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is not displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (below the "reach display"). This is because in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is always displayed, so the player can recognize the number of variable performances by checking the display contents of the cockpit display area Db.

Figure 53 (d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 53 (c), the variable element of the "Super Reach" has failed (the enemy character symbol has won), a "miss display" appears in the main display region Dm, and the sub-display region Ds is redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the small central region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is once again visible. Note that the character symbol in the small central region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the "miss display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends and the variable performance is stopped (confirmed), the display state of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be the initial state, that is, the state in which the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are each displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the variable performance has stopped (confirmed), and to smoothly execute the next variable performance if there is a variable performance on hold (waiting).

As shown in Figures 53(a) to 53(d), the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured to make it easier for the player to recognize the display contents that are of high importance at each timing by enlarging, reducing, erasing or redisplaying the display state of the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds at each timing in the variable performance. Also, by constantly displaying the execution pattern and the reserved pattern to the player in the cockpit display area Db, the player can clearly recognize how many variable displays are on hold.

Next, referring to Figure 54, the character cut-in image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. Figure 54(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of a small character cut-in image Dc1 in the fourth embodiment, and Figure 54(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of a large character cut-in image Dc2 in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the character cut-in images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are of two types: a small character cut-in image Dc1 and a large character cut-in image Dc2. The selection ratio of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is the same as the selection ratio of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable role object 87, 88 of the third embodiment (the small character cut-in image Dc1 corresponds to the "weak pattern", and the large character cut-in image Dc2 corresponds to the "strong pattern").

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the small character cut-in image Dc1 is a display frame image that occupies 1/3 of the vertical width and the entire horizontal width of the display screen of the main display area Dm, with a small female character figure in the center of the display frame image as if cheering. The background of the display frame image is displayed in blue.

This small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed at the forefront of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for one second from when it starts to when it ends (disappears). Therefore, other images (such as character images in the variable elements of a "Super Reach") that are displayed overlapping with the small character cut-in image Dc1 are configured so that the overlapping portions are not visible while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed. In the fourth embodiment, this small character cut-in image Dc1 is not displayed in an area that overlaps with the cockpit display area Db, so that the execution pattern and pending pattern in the cockpit display area Db are visible while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed.

When the audio lamp control device 113 displays a small character cut-in image Dc1, it is configured to send a display small character cut-in command to notify the display control device 114 that the small character cut-in image Dc1 will be displayed. When the display control device 114 receives the display small character cut-in command, it recognizes that the small character cut-in image Dc1 will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and performs display control to additionally display the small character cut-in image Dc1 on the third pattern display device 81 at a specified timing (for example, during the execution of a variable element of "Super Reach").

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed as a display frame image that occupies 4/5 of the vertical width and the entire horizontal width of the display screen of the main display area Dm, with a large female character figure displayed in the center of the display frame image as if cheering. Also, unlike the small character cut-in image Dc1, the background of the display frame image is displayed in red. Therefore, because the display modes of the size and color of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 are clearly different, the player can clearly recognize the difference.

This large character cut-in image Dc2, like the small character cut-in image Dc1, is displayed at the forefront of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 for one second from the start of display to the end of display (erasure). Therefore, other images (for example, the execution and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, and character images in the variable elements of the "Super Reach") that are displayed overlapping with the large character cut-in image Dc2 are configured so that the overlapping portions are invisible while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. In the fourth embodiment, since the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in an area that overlaps with the cockpit display area Db, the execution and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are invisible while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the execution and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become visible again.

When the big character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to send a display big character cut-in command to notify the display control device 114 that the big character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed. When the display control device 114 receives the display big character cut-in command, it recognizes that the big character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and performs display control to additionally display the big character cut-in image Dc2 on the third pattern display device 81 at a specified timing (for example, during the execution of a variable element of "Super Reach").

The display time of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to one second, which is shorter than the execution time of any of the variable elements. In the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to randomly determine the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2. Specifically, when the display control device 114 receives a display small character cut-in command or a display large character cut-in command from the audio lamp control device 113, it is configured to refer to a specified counter and table and determine by lottery whether or not the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2 will be displayed in any of the variable elements.

By configuring in this manner, the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be diversified, making the game more interesting. Also, because the execution timing is not determined by the audio and lamp control device 113, there is no need to send commands related to the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2, and this reduces the processing by the audio and lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Furthermore, by diversifying the timing of the appearance of the "hold change notice" by the large character cut-in image Dc2 "after hold is cleared," it is possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and making the game more interesting.

In addition, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 for any variable element, so there is no need for a process to determine whether the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed or not for the variable elements of the variable performance, compared to the case in which the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving each of the movable parts 87, 88 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control to determine whether or not to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform a "hold change notice" after "hold deletion", so the control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced while providing the player with unexpected performances, diversifying the performances and increasing the interest of the game.

The timing of execution of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be determined by the audio lamp control device 113, or may be configured to be executed at a fixed timing of a specific variable element (for example, one second after the start of the variable element of "Super Reach").

Next, referring to FIG. 55, an example of the execution of a "reserve change notice" "after reserve is cleared" in which the execution pattern changes after the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the display mode of the large character cut-in image Dc2 and the situation in which the "reserve change notice" "after reserve is cleared" is performed for the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 of the fourth embodiment.

Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "reach display" is about to appear in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 55(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 55(a) and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 55(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of the "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed from the state of FIG. 55(c) and the cockpit display area Db is covered. FIG. 55(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased from the state of FIG. 55(d) and the cockpit display area Db is again visible. FIG. 55(f) is a diagram showing a state in which the "big win display" is about to appear from the state of FIG. 55(e). Note that in Figures 55(a) to 55(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 55(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still "high-speed fluctuating" and cannot be seen. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. At this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In FIG. 55(b), from the state of FIG. 55(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

The secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a variable element of the "normal reach", and the secondary display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state in FIG. 55(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Also, similar to FIG. 55(a), at this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, similar to FIG. 55(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 55 (c) shows a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 55 (b). In this variable element of "Super Reach", the reach forming pattern of the "7" pattern displayed in the variable element of "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced form in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

Also, in FIG. 55(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" in which multiple character patterns compete for victory or defeat.

In the state of FIG. 55(c), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display states of FIG. 55(a) and FIG. 55(b), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Also, as in FIG. 55(a) and FIG. 55(b), at this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, as in FIG. 55(a) and FIG. 55(b), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 55(c), a reduced version of the reach-forming pattern of the "7" pattern, which was the cause of the variable element of this "Super Reach", is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 55(d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 55(c), a large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach", and the cockpit display area Db is covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2. In this state, based on the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 that is likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot, the player hopes that the character design on the player's side will win in the "battle performance" of the variable element of the "Super Reach", and that a "jackpot display" will appear in the variable performance.

In addition, the cockpit display area Db is entirely covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the player cannot see either the executed or reserved symbols. Therefore, the player is focusing on the execution content of the variable elements of the "Super Reach" and the large character cut-in image Dc2, and is paying less attention to the cockpit display area Db, which is now hidden from view.

Figure 55 (e) shows the state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 has been erased from the state in Figure 55 (d). In addition, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode ("red") that has changed from the display mode ("white"; see Figure 55 (c)) before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. In other words, this shows that a "reserved change notice" has been made "after reserve erasure" with the appearance and erasure of the large character cut-in image Dc2.

When a player first sees the "reserve change notice" "after reserve removal" caused by the appearance and disappearance of the large character cut-in image Dc2, he or she first notices the difference in the display mode of the execution pattern from before the large character cut-in image Dc2 was displayed, and feels something strange. The player then realizes that the source of this strange feeling is the "red" execution pattern. The player then considers based on his or her own memory when the "reserve change notice" of the "red" execution pattern was made. As a result of this consideration, the player realizes that the "reserve change notice" was not made before the large character cut-in image Dc2 was displayed, but was executed after the large character cut-in image Dc2 was displayed. At this moment, the player speculates that the expectation of a "jackpot display" has increased further because the variable elements of the "super reach", the appearance of the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the change to the "red" execution pattern are all combined and executed in the variable presentation that is being performed.

Figure 55(f) shows the state just before the "jackpot display" appears in the main display area Dm, from the state in Figure 55(e). In this state, the "jackpot display" "777" is displayed in each display area Dm1 to Dm3. As the player would have guessed at the stage in Figure 55(e), the appearance of the "jackpot display" in the variable presentation can give the player a sense of happiness and satisfaction.

Furthermore, once a player has experienced the "reserve change notice" "after the reserve is cleared" by the display of this large character cut-in image Dc2, the next time the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the player will check whether the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db has changed when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again after the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the large character cut-in image Dc2 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is cleared. This creates the interest of checking the display state of the execution pattern after the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, and the player can enjoy the interest (joy) of the large character cut-in image Dc2 being displayed and the interest (joy) of the execution pattern changing in a seamless combination, dramatically increasing the interest in the game.

As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the cockpit display area Db is made invisible to the player by displaying a cut-in image (e.g., a large character cut-in image Dc2) in the change performance, and then a "hold change notice" is made when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to notice the change in the notice object, and the display mode of the execution pattern can be changed casually, compared to when the notice object (change object) that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when a new notice object is made to appear and notified. By casually changing the execution pattern, the player is first made to feel strange, and then the player is made to realize that the source of the strange feeling is directly linked to the game value (e.g., a jackpot), and this provides the player with a surprising performance while diversifying the performance and increasing the interest of the game.

The display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to one second, which is shorter than the execution time of any of the variable elements. Therefore, the large character cut-in image Dc2, which can appear with any of the variable elements, can generate a "hold change notice" after "hold is cleared." This allows the timing of the appearance of the "hold change notice" after "hold is cleared" to be diversified, providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it becomes possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 for any variable element. Compared to the third embodiment, where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving each of the movable parts 87, 88, there is no need for processing to determine whether the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed or not for the variable elements of the variable performance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control to determine whether to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform a "hold change notice" after "hold deletion", so the control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced while providing the player with unexpected performances and diversifying the performances to increase the interest of the game.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 56 to Fig. 62. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the "reserved change notice" was executed "after the reserved deletion" in the execution pattern indicating the variable performance being executed. As described above, since the execution pattern indicates the content of the variable performance being executed, the player plays the game while paying attention to which display mode the execution pattern is during the execution of the variable performance.

Therefore, if the display mode of the execution pattern changes while a variable performance is being performed, there is a risk that the change will be noticed by the player even if the display mode of the execution pattern is changed subtly by the "reserved change notice" after the reserved pattern is cleared.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to execute a "reserved change notice" for the reserved symbols "after the reserved symbols are cleared." Players do not pay as much attention to changes in the reserved symbols as to the executed symbols, and it is difficult for them to notice the change. Therefore, when a "reserved change notice" is executed for the reserved symbols "after the reserved symbols are cleared," the player can delay recognizing the change in the reserved symbols compared to when the executed symbols change, and during that time, a sense of discomfort can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the minimum change mode of the "reserved change notice", that is, the display mode that changes one step from the normal display mode ("white") to the display mode ("blue") at the timing "after cockpit erasure" when the cockpit display area Db is erased in the execution pattern or reserved pattern in which the jackpot change performance is executed, is configured to change. On the other hand, when a display mode other than the above minimum display mode of the "reserved change notice", that is, a display mode that changes multiple steps from the normal display mode ("white") (for example, "red") is executed, the execution timing of the above "after cockpit erasure" is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the "reserved change notice" is the minimum change mode that did not previously allow a jackpot to be expected, it becomes possible to expect a jackpot depending on the timing at which the "reserved change notice" occurs. As a result, the significance of the existence of the one-step "reserved change notice", which is the minimum display mode that was not interesting in the past, is enhanced, and a jackpot can be expected in any performance pattern, and the variety of performances can increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a "reserved change notice" is made for a reserved symbol that performs a jackpot change performance, the reserved symbol is erased by a variable element of the "super reach" and the "reserved change notice" is made to appear (execute) at the timing when the variable element of the "super reach" ends and the reserved symbol is redisplayed. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object while casually changing the display mode of the notice object, compared to when a notice object that is always visible (a change object; in the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbol) is directly changed and notified, or when a new notice object is made to appear and notified. In addition, the reserved symbol that the player is not paying attention to is temporarily made invisible and then casually changed, and the change mode is also a slight change from the normal change (minimal change mode; one-step change), so that the change is difficult for the player to notice, while giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change. Then, by making the player realize that the source of that discomfort is directly related to the value of the game (e.g., a jackpot), it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, the scenario table 222f in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 56 and 57. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to execute a "reserved change notice" not only for the execution symbol but also for the reserved symbol at the timing when the execution symbol and reserved symbol are erased and redisplayed. Therefore, when a performance is executed in which the execution symbol and reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db are erased, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to select an execution timing of "after cockpit erasure" at which a "reserved change notice" can be executed at the timing when the execution symbol or reserved symbol is redisplayed after the performance of the erasure is executed.

In the fifth embodiment, when the execution of the "Hold Change Notice" is decided, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f, and decides one execution timing from among the execution timings of the "Hold Change Notice", including the execution timing of "After cockpit is erased". Figure 56 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a scenario table 222f1 for big wins in the fifth embodiment.

In the fifth embodiment, the big win scenario table 222f1 is divided into a total of 12 situation patterns, each of which is divided into display modes of the "reserve change notice" (three patterns: "blue", "red", and "rainbow") for each number of reserved balls (four patterns: 1 to 4 reserved balls) for the variable performance at the time when the "reserve change notice" is determined. In addition, the horizontal rows are divided into four patterns of the number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4") that execute (start) the "reserve change notice", and during the variable performance (reserved balls "0"), three patterns of "at the start", "before the reach", and "after the reach", and one pattern of "after the cockpit is erased" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. The value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the fifth embodiment, the "Hold Change Notice" is set so that the display mode of the determined "Hold Change Notice" is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns.

Specifically, for example, if "after cockpit disappearance" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in a variable performance based on one start winning, the "hold change notice" is executed when the cockpit display area Db is erased between the time of the start winning and the time the variable performance based on that start winning is confirmed and displayed. In other words, if the "hold change notice" of "after cockpit disappearance" is determined in a variable performance based on one start winning, when a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db is executed in any variable performance (including the variable performance based on that start winning) before the variable performance based on that start winning is confirmed and displayed, the "hold change notice" is executed when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the variable element ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, a lottery is held in the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to execute the "reserve change notice". When it is determined to execute the "reserve change notice", the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the determined "reserve change notice" are first grasped. Then, when the change performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is a jackpot, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "reserve change notice" at the time of the jackpot is determined by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the jackpot scenario table 222f1. On the other hand, when the change performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is a miss, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "reserve change notice" at the time of a miss is determined by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the miss scenario table 222f2. The losing scenario table 222f2 will be described later in Figure 57.

In the scenario table 222f1 for big wins in FIG. 56, the vertical rows are divided into a total of 12 situation patterns, which are divided into the display mode of the "reserve change notice" for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of reserved balls "1" to "4") at the time when the "reserve change notice" is decided, and the three patterns are "blue", "red", and "rainbow". In addition, the horizontal rows are divided into a total of eight timing patterns, which are the four patterns at the time of displaying or shifting to each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4"), the three patterns of "start (at shift)", "before the reach" or "after the reach" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the execution of the corresponding variable performance), and the one pattern of "after the cockpit is erased" at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased regardless of the number of reserved balls. Each of these divided groups is then associated with a possible value of the scenario counter 223d.

In the fifth embodiment, the "Hold Change Notice" is set so that the display mode of the determined "Hold Change Notice" is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above situation patterns.

Specifically, for example, if "after cockpit disappears" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach" is executed before the variable performance is confirmed and displayed, and then the "hold change notice" is executed when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. Also, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" reserved balls and "at start" is selected, the "hold change notice" is executed when the variable performance that determined the "hold change notice" starts. Also, if the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "0" reserved balls and "before reach" is selected, the "hold change notice" is executed during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "hold change notice" and before the "reach display" appears (for example, during the execution of the variable element of the "high-speed change" or when the left pattern row Z1 stops during the execution of the variable element of the "low-speed change"). In addition, if the timing for executing the "Reserve Change Notice" is when the number of reserved balls is "0" and "After Reach" is selected, the "Reserve Change Notice" will be executed during the change presentation in which the "Reach" was determined and while the "Reach Display" is being executed (for example, while the change element of the "Normal Reach" is being executed).

Also, for example, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "1", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 or when it is shifted. Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "2", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the second reserved pattern display area Db2 or when it is shifted. Also, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected as the number of reserved balls "3", the "reserve change notice" is executed when the reserved pattern indicating the variable performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3 or when it is shifted. In addition, if the execution timing of the "reserve change notice" is selected to be the number of reserved balls "4", the "reserve change notice" will be executed when the reserved pattern indicating the change performance that determined the "reserve change notice" is displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a "reserved change notice" is held in the sound lamp control device 113, and it is decided whether or not to execute the "reserved change notice". When it is decided to execute the "reserved change notice", first, the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "reserved change notice" are grasped. Then, when the change performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is a jackpot, the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "reserved change notice" at the time of the jackpot is decided by referring to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the scenario table 222f1 for big wins, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" and each display mode of the "reserved change notice," and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of Figure 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "after cockpit is cleared", which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "20 to 39" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 79" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "80 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 20%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the change performance of the jackpot is set so that any of the execution timings ("after the cockpit is cleared", "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "1" reserved ball) is selected equally (20%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "60 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "After the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "At the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "Before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "After the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 40%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of decision is "1" and the display mode is "red."

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the execution timing "after the cockpit is erased" is not selected when the display mode is "red" or "rainbow" described below. In other words, the "reserved change notice" of the reserved pattern "after the cockpit is erased" corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that it is selected only when the display mode is "blue."

Conventionally, in a "reserved change notice," multiple change patterns (such as the usual "white," "blue," "green," "red," and "rainbow") are prepared in advance from the initial display mode, and the expected value of a jackpot is set to differ depending on the degree of change. Thus, for example, when a "reserved change notice" occurs, the expected value of a jackpot is set to be higher for a "red" display mode, which is a two-step change from the normal display mode, than for a "blue" display mode, which is a one-step change from the normal display mode. In other words, in a "reserved change notice" for an executed or reserved pattern, a jackpot is expected for a display mode that has changed multiple steps from the normal display mode (such as "red"), but a jackpot cannot be expected for a display mode that has changed one step from the normal display mode (such as "blue"), and is set to often result in a miss. Therefore, even if a "hold change notice" occurs, for example, when a one-stage display mode (such as "blue") appears, the one-stage display mode is less likely to result in a jackpot than a display mode that changes in multiple stages (such as "red"), so players judge that they cannot expect a jackpot from the variable presentation that caused the one-stage "hold change notice," and are unable to find interest in the variable presentation that corresponds to the one-stage "hold change notice," and are instead turned off by it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a one-stage "reserve change notice" is executed in the execution pattern or reserved pattern that indicates a jackpot change presentation, it is configured to change to a one-stage display state ("blue") at the timing "after cockpit erasure" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. Also, when a "reserve change notice" that has changed in multiple stages is executed, it is configured to not select the execution timing "after cockpit erasure". By configuring in this way, even with a one-stage "reserve change notice" that previously did not allow a jackpot to be expected, it becomes possible to expect a jackpot depending on the timing at which the "reserve change notice" occurs. As a result, the significance of the one-stage "reserve change notice", which previously did not provide any interest, is increased, and a jackpot can be expected with any presentation pattern, and the variety of presentations can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a "reserved change notice" is made for reserved symbols and execution symbols that indicate a variable performance that generates a jackpot, the reserved symbols or execution symbols are erased by a "super reach" or the like, and the "reserved change notice" is configured to be made to appear (execute) at the timing when the reserved symbols or execution symbols are redisplayed after the performance of the "super reach" ends. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object (change object; in the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbols or execution symbols), which are always visible, and can casually change the display mode of the notice object, compared to when the change is directly changed and notified, or when a new notice object is made to appear and notified. In addition, reserved symbols that the player does not pay attention to are temporarily made invisible, and then casually changed, and the change mode is also a slight change (one-step change) from the normal change, so that the change is difficult for the player to notice, and the change gives the player a sense of discomfort. Then, by making the player realize that the source of that discomfort is directly related to the value of the game (e.g., a jackpot), it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after the cockpit is cleared", "0 to 29" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 59" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "60 to 99" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" does not appear with the reserved symbol, but can only appear with the executed symbol, so no value of the scenario counter 223d is assigned to "after the cockpit is cleared" and the number of reserved balls of "1".

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "After the cockpit is erased" 0%, "At the start" with "0" reserved balls 30%, "Before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 30%, "After the reach" with "0" reserved balls 40%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 0%.

Therefore, the "reserve change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the timing during the execution of the "reach display" is likely to be selected (40%). Note that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserve change notice" at the time of a jackpot is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination of the "reserve change notice". Therefore, we will omit the explanation of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "reserve change notice" at the time of a jackpot when the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination of the "reserve change notice" is "2" to "4".

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "2". In this case, reserved balls of "3" or "4" do not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, reserved patterns for "3" or "4" reserved balls will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of Figure 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 29" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "30 to 39" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 49" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "50 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 79" for "1" reserved ball, and "80 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is cleared" 30%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 20%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, and "70 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 30%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of decision is "1" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 39" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "40 to 49" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "50 to 59" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "70 to 79" for "1" reserved ball, "80 to 89" for "2" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is erased" 40%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 10%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "3" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, "70 to 79" for "2" reserved balls, and "80 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the change performance of the jackpot is set so that the execution timing is selected evenly (20%) from "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls, and "3" reserved balls.

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" of the jackpot is determined is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 49" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "50 to 59" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "70 to 79" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "80 to 84" for "1" reserved ball, "85 to 89" for "2" reserved balls, "90 to 94" for "3" reserved balls, and "95 to 99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is erased" 50%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 5%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 5%, "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 5%, and "4" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 5%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot change performance is set so that the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, "70 to 79" for "2" reserved balls, "80 to 89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 0% "after the cockpit is erased", 20% "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, 20% "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 20% "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), 10% "3" reserved patterns (i.e. when the reserved pattern shifts), and 10% "4" reserved patterns (i.e. when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the change performance of the jackpot is set to be selected evenly (20%) from the "start" with "0" reserved balls, "before reaching" with "0" reserved balls, and "after reaching" with "0" reserved balls.

In this way, when a "reserved change notice" is made for the reserved symbols and execution symbols that indicate a variable performance that will generate a jackpot, the cockpit display area Db is erased before the variable performance corresponding to the "reserved change notice" is confirmed and displayed, and the "reserved change notice" is made visible (executed) at the timing when the execution and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object, and makes it possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object, compared to when a notice is given by directly changing the notice object (change object; in the fifth embodiment, the execution or reserved symbol), which is always visible, or when a notice object is given by appearing a new notice object. In other words, by temporarily making the predicted object invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly connected to the game value (for example, a jackpot), providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" is configured to be more likely to be selected the more reserved balls there are at the time the "reserve change notice" is determined. The more change effects that are executed before the change effect corresponding to the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" is displayed, the more likely it is that the cockpit display area Db will be cleared, so that the opportunities for the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" to be executed can be increased, making the game more interesting.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the failure scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the failure scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment. In the failure scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 57, similar to the big win scenario table 222f1, for each number of reserved balls (four patterns of 1 to 4 reserved balls) of the variable performance at the time when the vertical row determines the "reserved change notice", each reserved ball number is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns divided according to the display mode of the "reserved change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "reserved change notice" is divided into a total of eight different timing patterns: four patterns at the time of display or shift for each number of reserved balls (reserved balls "1" to "4"), and four patterns at the time of "start (shift)", "before reaching", "after reaching", or "after clearing reserved balls" when the number of reserved balls is "0" (during the corresponding change performance). Each of these divided groups is then associated with a possible value of the scenario counter 223d.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the scenario table for losses 222f2, situation patterns are prepared for the number of reserved balls in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice" and each display mode of the "reserve change notice", and the value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each situation pattern. Note that the "rainbow" display mode of the "reserve change notice" suggests the occurrence of a jackpot when it appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the situation pattern of "rainbow" in the scenario table for losses 222f2, a scenario counter 223d value is not assigned to any of the reserved ball numbers in the variable performance at the time of determining the "reserve change notice", and therefore a description thereof is omitted.

First, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "1". In this case, reserved balls "2" to "4" do not exist at the time when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. In other words, reserved patterns for reserved balls "2" to "4" will not be displayed when the "1st" reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "1", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of Figure 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit is cleared", which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "10 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "40 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 10%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 60%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (60%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "1" and the display mode is "blue."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the scenario counter 223d value was not assigned to "after hold clearing" in the scenario table for losses 222f2, but in the scenario table for losses 222f2 of the third embodiment, the scenario counter 223d is set to be assigned to the execution timing of "after cockpit clearing". This is because the cockpit display area Db can also be cleared in the variation performance that is executed before the variation performance corresponding to the "hold change notice" "after cockpit clearing", and even if the cockpit display area Db is cleared in that variation performance, the "jackpot display" is not confirmed.

Next, as shown in the example of Figure 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, and "60 to 99" for "1" reserved ball.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "After the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "At the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "Before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "After the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, and "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved pattern is displayed) 40%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "1" and the display mode is "red."

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "2". In this case, the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" does not exist at the time when the "second" reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the "second" reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this miss scenario table 222f2, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "2", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "3" or "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of Figure 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "10 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 29" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30 to 39" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 49" for "1" reserved ball, and "50 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is cleared" 10%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 50%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (50%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "2" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 57 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, and "70 to 99" for "2" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed) 30%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "2" and the display mode is "red", the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is likely to be selected (30%).

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable performance at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined as a miss is "3". In this case, the number of reserved balls "4" does not exist at the time when the third reserved ball occurs. In other words, when the third reserved ball occurs, the reserved pattern for the number of reserved balls "4" will not be displayed. Therefore, in this scenario table 222f2 for misses, when the number of reserved balls at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined is "3", the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the number of reserved balls "4" at the time when the "reserved change notice" is executed (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "10-19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40-49" for "1" reserved ball, "50-59" for "2" reserved balls, and "60-99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is erased" 10%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 40%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" for the execution pattern or reserved pattern that corresponds to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (40%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "3" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, "70 to 79" for "2" reserved balls, and "80 to 99" for "3" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red," the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to have the following selection rates: "after the cockpit is cleared" 0%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 20%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "3" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 20%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variable performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of its determination is "3" and the display mode is "red," the "start," "before the reach," "after the reach" of the variable performance, or when the reserved pattern is displayed is likely to be selected (20% each).

Next, we will explain the case where the number of reserved balls for the variable effect at the time when the "reserved change notice" is determined to be a miss is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0-9" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "10-19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20-29" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "30-39" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40-49" for "1" reserved ball, "50-59" for "2" reserved balls, "60-69" for "3" reserved balls, and "70-99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be "after the cockpit is erased" 10%, "at the start" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls 10%, "1" reserved ball (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "2" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, "3" reserved balls (i.e., when the reserved symbol shifts) 10%, and "4" reserved symbols (i.e., when the reserved symbol is displayed) 30%.

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the losing variation performance is set so that the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed is most likely to be selected (30%) when the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is "4" and the display mode is "blue."

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the correspondence between the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after cockpit is cleared" which indicates the timing when the cockpit display area Db is cleared, "0 to 19" for "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, "20 to 39" for "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "40 to 59" for "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, "60 to 69" for "1" reserved ball, "70 to 79" for "2" reserved balls, "80 to 89" for "3" reserved balls, and "90 to 99" for "4" reserved balls.

In other words, when the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding on the "reserved change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the timing of execution of the "reserved change notice" is set to be 0% "after the cockpit is erased", 20% "at the start" with "0" reserved balls, 20% "before the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% "after the reach" with "0" reserved balls, 10% "1" reserved ball (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), 10% "2" reserved balls (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), 10% "3" reserved symbols (i.e. when the reserved symbol shifts), and 10% "4" reserved symbols (i.e. when the reserved symbol is displayed).

Therefore, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or reserved pattern corresponding to the jackpot variable performance is set so that when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red," the "start," "before the reach" or "after the reach" of the variable performance is likely to be selected (20% each).

In this way, by varying the execution timing (appearance timing) of the same "hold change notice (e.g., "blue") when the variable presentation fails and when a jackpot occurs, the likelihood of a jackpot can be made different by the display mode of the "hold change notice" and the timing at which it appears. Therefore, the suggestion of the likelihood of a jackpot by the "hold change notice" can be diversified depending on the display mode and appearance timing of the "hold change notice," making the game more interesting.

Next, referring to FIG. 58, the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment. The configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in that the pending deletion information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8, 223f8 are not provided. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so their description will be omitted.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it performs a look-ahead process (reserved display setting process (see Figure 59)) based on the values stored in the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the reserved information storage area X that correspond to the value of the sub reserved ball count counter 223b updated by the reserved ball count command, among the reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the reserved information storage area 223e, and stores the reserved change information and scenario data generated based on the results of this look-ahead process in the storage areas 223e5, 223e6 of the same reserved information storage area X.

In addition, when scenario data for "pending change notice" "after the cockpit is erased" is stored in scenario data storage area 223e6, 223f6, when a variable element of "super reach or above" is executed in the variable performance and the cockpit display area Db is erased, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a "pending change notice" on the pending pattern or execution pattern corresponding to the execution information storage area 223f or the pending information storage area 223e in which the scenario data for "pending change notice" "after the cockpit is erased" is stored, and to rewrite the pending change information stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5, 223e5 of the execution information storage area 223f or the pending information storage area 223e to pending changed information and store it. In this way, when a "pending change notice" is executed "after cockpit erasure," the pending change information stored in the execution information storage area 223f or the pending change information storage area 223f5, 223e5 of the pending information storage area 223e is rewritten to pending change information, so that a "pending change notice" after "cockpit erasure" is not executed twice, and the control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a change performance from the main control device 110, it executes a shift process in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. In other words, the number of pending change performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first pending change performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the pending information storage first area corresponding to the first pending change performance are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the currently executing change performance.

In addition, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the first pending information storage area, the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the third pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the second pending information storage area, and the values and various information (data) of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the fourth pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223e1-223e6 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control unit 110. Also, the first to fourth reserved information storage areas store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control unit 110. In other words, in the voice lamp control unit 113, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and on hold in the main control unit 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e.

The pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment do not have the pending deletion information storage area 223e7, 223f7 and the re-change information storage area 223e8, 223f8, so the storage capacity is reduced compared to the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the first embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, the pending display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the pending display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines in the command determination process (S1110 in FIG. 28) that it has received a pending ball count command, it performs this pending display setting process, and when it is determined that the "pending change notice" is to be executed, it stores the pending change information and scenario data in each storage area 223e5, 223e6 of the pending information storage area X indicated by the sub pending ball count counter 223b updated by the pending ball count command.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the reserve display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the lottery for executing the "reserve change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the currently received reserved ball count command (S1303). If the result of the determination is that the lottery for executing the "reserve change notice" has not been won (S1303: No), the "reserve change notice" will not be executed, and therefore, in order to erase information related to the "reserve change notice", null data is stored in the reserve change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the reserve information storage area X (S1361), and the process proceeds to S1313.

On the other hand, if the "reserved ball change notice" execution lottery is won in the processing of S1303 (S1303: Yes), similar to the first embodiment, the processing of S1304 and S1305 is carried out, the reserved ball change information and scenario data are stored in the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the reserved ball storage area X indicated by the reserved ball count command, and the processing proceeds to S1313.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, when a reserved ball count command is received, the reserved clearing information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db will be cleared in the variable performance and the re-change information indicating whether the "re-change" variable element will be performed in the variable performance are not distinguished and stored. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 and also reduces the control burden on the MPU 221.

Next, the variable performance processing (S1109) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable performance processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment.

This variable performance process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28). In order to display the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81, first, various information stored in the reserved information storage area 1 of the reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3. In addition, if the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and a process is performed to set this command for sending to the display control device 114. In addition, if the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is reached in the execution symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "reserved change notice" are generated and a process is performed to set these commands for sending to the display control device 114. In addition, if the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" is reached in the reserved ... a process is performed to generate various commands related to each execution timing of the "reserved change notice" and a process is performed to set these commands for sending to the display control device 114.

In the fluctuation performance process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation performance process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, so similar to the first embodiment, the processes of S1402 to S1412 are performed, and the process proceeds to S1413.

In the process of S1413, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to display a "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by checking the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and determining whether the scenario data is data indicating "after cockpit is erased", or data indicating "0" reserved balls and indicating "at the start", "before the reach" or "after the reach" (hereinafter abbreviated as "at the start" to "after the reach").

If the result of the determination in S1413 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "after cockpit erasure" or data indicating any of the "start" to "after reach" periods with the number of reserved balls being "0" (S1413: Yes), an execution symbol change process is performed (S1414) to execute a "reserved change notice" in the execution symbol, and the process proceeds to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is not data indicating "after cockpit erasure" or data indicating "0" reserved balls and any of "at the start" to "after reach" (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The execution symbol change process of S1414 will be described later in FIG. 61.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to make the "reserved ball change notice" appear in the reserved patterns displayed in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is made for each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the reserved information storage first to third areas of the reserved information storage area 223e. In other words, it is determined whether each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223f6 is the execution timing of the "reserved ball change notice" in the reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db3 after shifting. For example, this determination is made whether the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 shifted and stored in the reserved information storage first area indicates the number of reserved balls "1", or whether the data is for executing the "reserved ball change notice" in the reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db3 after the cockpit display area Db is erased (i.e., "after cockpit erasure").

If, as a result of the processing of S1415, there are no reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 that store scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: No), there is no need to perform a "reserved change notice" on the reserved pattern, so this variable performance processing (S1109) is terminated and the process returns to the main processing (see Figure 28). On the other hand, if there are reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 that store scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), then it is determined whether the timing of the change in the reserved pattern, i.e., the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" for the reserved pattern, is "at the time of shift" or "after the cockpit is erased" (S1461). If the result of the determination is that the timing of the change of the reserved pattern is when the reserved pattern is shifted (S1461: "shift time"), in order to execute a "reserved change notice" for the corresponding reserved pattern in the display mode stored in the reserved pattern change information storage area 223f5, a display shift time reserved change command including information on the corresponding reserved pattern is set for the display control device 114 (S1462), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display shift pending change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). When the display control device 114 receives the display shift pending change command, it performs display control so that the corresponding pending pattern is displayed in the determined "pending change notice" display mode when shifting the pending pattern.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1461, if the timing of the change of the reserved pattern is the timing when the reserved pattern is erased, i.e., "after the cockpit is erased" (S1461: "after the cockpit is erased"), then it is determined whether or not a variable element of "super reach or more" will be executed in the variable performance that will now be executed by the third pattern display device 81 (S1463). In other words, it is confirmed whether or not there is a timing in the variable performance where the cockpit display area Db is erased by the variable element of "super reach or more" and the reserved pattern becomes invisible. This determination is made by determining the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command stored in RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

In the processing of S1463, if the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is not executed in the variable performance that will be executed from now on by the third pattern display device 81 (S1463: No), the variable performance that will be executed from now on cannot perform the "pending change notice" "after cockpit elimination", so the processing of S1464 to S1466 is skipped, this variable performance processing (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1463, if a variable element of "Super Reach or more" is executed in the variable performance that will now be executed by the third pattern display device 81 (S1463: Yes), then it is determined whether a performance that erases the cockpit display area Db has already been executed and the reserved pattern has changed (S1464). This determination is made by determining whether the reserved change information stored in the reserved change information storage area 223e5 of the reserved information storage area 223e has been rewritten to reserved changed information. If the reserved change information in the reserved change information storage area 223e5 is reserved changed information, then a "reserved change notice" has already been executed on the reserved pattern, so there is no need to perform a "reserved change notice" again. Therefore, if the result of the determination in S1464 is that pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (S1464: Yes), the processing of S1465 and S1466 is skipped, this change performance processing (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S1464 is that the pending change completed information is not stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (S1464: No), the "pending change notice" after "cockpit erasure" has not yet been executed, so that when the cockpit display area Db is erased and then redisplayed, a display post-erasure pending change command including the information of the corresponding reserved pattern is set for the display control device 114 to execute the "pending change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 for the corresponding reserved pattern. Then, the pending change completed information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 for the corresponding reserved pattern (S1466), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

When the "reserved change notice" of "after cockpit is cleared" is executed, the reserved change information storage area 223e5 of the corresponding reserved symbol stores the reserved change information, but instead, the scenario data in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the corresponding reserved symbol may be changed from "after cockpit is cleared" to null data or the like. By configuring in this way, in the process of S1415, it can be determined that there are no reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 that store scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: No), and the "reserved change notice" is not executed for the corresponding reserved symbol thereafter.

The display post-clearance change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-clearance change command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the corresponding reserved pattern is displayed in the determined display mode of the reserved change notice at the timing when the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" in the variable performance is executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" ends, and the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the execution pattern change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the execution pattern change process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. This execution pattern change process is executed in the variable performance process (see FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and is performed to execute a "reserved change notice" in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the third pattern display device 81.

In the execution symbol change process of the fifth embodiment, if the result of the judgment in S1501 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating the number of reserved balls "0" and "after cockpit erasure" (S1501: "after cockpit erasure"), first, it is judged whether or not the performance of erasing the cockpit display area Db has already been executed and the execution symbol has changed (S1571). This judgment is made by judging whether or not the reserved change information stored in the reserved change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f has been rewritten to reserved change information. If the reserved change information in the reserved change information storage area 223f5 is reserved change information, the "reserved change notice" has already been executed in the execution symbol, so there is no need to perform the "reserved change notice" again. Therefore, if the result of the judgment in S1571 is that pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: Yes), the processing of S1572 to S1574 is skipped, this execution pattern change processing (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance processing (see FIG. 60).

On the other hand, in the process of S1571, if the pending change information is not stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: No), the "pending change notice" after "cockpit elimination" has not yet been executed, so next, in order to confirm whether the "pending change notice" after "cockpit elimination" can be executed in the variable performance, it is determined whether a variable element of "super reach or higher" is executed in the variable performance (S1572). This determination is made by determining the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command stored in RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29).

If the result of the judgment in S1572 is that a variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is executed in the variable performance (S1572: Yes), since there is a performance in the variable performance in which the cockpit display area Db is erased, next, in order to confirm whether or not a "pending change notice" can be executed after the "reach display" of the variable performance, it is judged whether or not a variable element of "re-change" is executed in the variable performance (S1573). This judgment is made by judging the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command stored in RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command judgment processing (see FIG. 29).

If the result of the judgment in S1573 is that the "re-change" variable element is executed in the relevant variable performance (S1573: Yes), this is a variable performance in which "re-change" is executed after "reach display", and this is a variable performance in which "pending change notice" can be executed when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, so in order to execute "pending change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a display post-clearance change command is set for the display control device 114 (S1574), and the process returns to the variable performance processing (see FIG. 60).

The display post-clearance change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Having received the display post-clearance change command, the display control device 114 performs display control to change the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the change performance has ended and before the "re-change" is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1572, if the variable element of "Super Reach or higher" is not executed in the variable performance (S1572: No), the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db is not executed in the variable performance, and therefore the "pending change notice" after "cockpit erasure" cannot be executed.

In addition, in the processing of S1573, if the variable element of "re-change" is not executed in the variable presentation (S1573: No), there is no point in executing the "hold change notice" "after cockpit elimination" since the variable element of "re-change" is not included in the variable presentation. Specifically, for example, even if the "hold change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the "super reach" is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, no performance occurs after the "super reach", so the player cannot be interested in anything and will be turned off by the meaningless performance. In addition, for example, even if the "hold change notice" of the execution pattern is executed after the "super reach" is executed and the "miss display" is confirmed, if the "miss display" is confirmed as it is and the next variable presentation starts, the inconsistency in the presentation will cause the player to distrust the game.

Therefore, if in the processing of S1572 it is determined that the variable element "Super Reach or higher" will not be executed in the variable presentation (S1572: No), or if in the processing of S1573 it is determined that the variable element "re-change" will not be executed in the variable presentation (S1573: No), since the "Hold Change Notice" cannot be executed "after the cockpit is erased", the processing transitions to S1504 to check the timing at which the "Hold Change Notice" can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the variable performance cannot execute the "hold change notice" initially set "after the cockpit is erased," it can be changed to an executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") and execute the "hold change notice." This reduces the number of cases where the "hold change notice" is not executed despite winning the execution lottery, and increases the execution rate of the "hold change notice," improving the entertainment value of the game. Furthermore, even if the lottery process for the "hold change notice" and the lottery process for the variable performance are performed using different (separate) processes, adjustments can be made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of each performance. Therefore, by performing each lottery process using a different (separate) program, it is possible to simplify the design of each program while executing a consistent performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, an example of the execution of the "reserved change notice" after the "cockpit is erased" will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a situation in which the "reserved change notice" after the "cockpit is erased" is performed in the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 62(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "reach display" is about to appear in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 62(a) and a "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 62(c) is a diagram showing a state in which a "super reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 62(b). FIG. 62(d) is a diagram showing a state in which a performance is being executed suggesting that a "miss display" will appear in the performance of the "super reach" from the state of FIG. 62(c). FIG. 62(e) shows the state in which the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 62(d), and the "miss display" appears in the main display area Dm. FIG. 62(f) shows the state in which the variable presentation is finished from the state of FIG. 62(e), and the "big win display" is about to appear in the variable presentation corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3 at the stage of FIG. 62(e). Note that the display mode of the third pattern is omitted in FIG. 62(a) to FIG. 62(f).

In FIG. 62(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is "high-speed fluctuating" so that it is still not visible. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

In FIG. 62(b), from the state of FIG. 62(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and a "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a "normal reach," and the secondary display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state in FIG. 62(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, similar to FIG. 62(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 62 (c) shows a state in which a "Super Reach" has been executed in the main display area Dm from the state shown in Figure 62 (b). In this "Super Reach", the "7" symbol that was displayed in the "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Also, in FIG. 62(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" ("competition effect" for "special reach") in which multiple character patterns compete for victory or defeat.

Also, as shown in FIG. 62(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a "super reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, a new number pattern ("4" in the fifth embodiment) indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In Fig. 62(d), a state is displayed in which the player's character image (left character image) has lost to the enemy's character image (right character image) in the "battle performance" of the "Super Reach" from the state of Fig. 62(c). Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of Fig. 62(d), he or she predicts that, because the player's character image has lost in the "battle performance" of the "Super Reach", the "jackpot display" will not appear in the "Super Reach" but rather a "miss display" will appear.

Also, in FIG. 62(d), as in FIG. 62(c), a "super reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db remains erased.

Figure 62 (e) shows a state in which the "Super Reach" effect from the state of Figure 62 (d) has failed (the enemy character symbol has won), and a "miss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm, while the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the execution symbol and reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. Note that the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the "miss display." In other words, the main part of the third symbol display device 81 displays a state in which the chances are down.

In FIG. 62(e), the reserved pattern displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode ("blue") that has changed from the display mode ("white"; see FIG. 62(b)) before it was erased by the execution of the "Super Reach". In other words, a "reserved change notice" is issued at the execution timing "after the cockpit is erased". That is, a chance up state is displayed in the non-main part (secondary part) of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a chance down state in the main part and a chance up state in the non-main part are simultaneously displayed.

When the player sees the state shown in Figure 62 (e), due to the appearance of the "miss display (787)" in the main display area Dm and the impression of having lost the "battle effect" in the "super reach", the player infers that, as predicted at the time of Figure 62 (d), the "big win display" will not appear in this variable effect, but rather the "miss display" will appear and the "miss display" will be confirmed, and his interest shifts to the next variable effect. Then, when the player looks at the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the content of the next variable effect, he recognizes that a "reserved change notice" has been made in the reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display area Db3, which indicates the reserved variable effect, and that the reserved pattern has changed to "blue".

At this point, when a player sees this "Hold Change Notice" "after the cockpit is erased" for the first time, he or she will first notice the difference in the way the reserved symbols are displayed before and after the "battle performance" of the "Super Reach" is executed, and will feel something strange. The player will then realize that the source of this strange feeling is the "blue" reserved symbol. The player will then use their own memory to consider when the "Hold Change Notice" for the "blue" reserved symbol was made. After considering this, the player will realize that the "Hold Change Notice" was not made before the "Super Reach" was executed, but was executed after the "Super Reach" ended. At this moment, the player will predict that some kind of event will occur in the pending change performance for which this "Hold Change Notice" was executed.

Figure 62(f) shows a state in which two variable presentations have been completed from the state of Figure 62(e) (variable presentations corresponding to the reserved patterns displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 and the second reserved pattern display area Db2 at the stage of Figure 62(e) have been executed), and the "jackpot display" is about to appear in the variable presentation corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db3 at the stage of Figure 62(e). In this variable presentation, the "jackpot display" "777" is displayed as a stop. As the player had guessed at the stage of Figure 62(e), the player can feel a sense of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display" in the variable presentation in which the "reserved change notice" had occurred.

Furthermore, once a player has experienced this "reserved change notice" after "clearing the cockpit", he or she will check whether the reserved patterns have changed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 of the redisplayed cockpit display area Db in the next "super reach" or "special reach", even if a "miss display" appears in the "super reach". This creates an interest in checking the display state of the reserved patterns that are redisplayed even after the execution of a "super reach", and even if the variable display being executed is a miss, the player can play the game while hoping that a "reserved change notice" will occur in the reserved patterns and a "jackpot display" will appear in the variable performance corresponding to the reserved patterns. Therefore, the "reserved change notice" can be executed at various times to increase the interest of the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a "reserved change notice" is made for the reserved symbols and execution symbols that indicate a variable performance that will generate a jackpot, the reserved symbols or execution symbols are erased by a "super reach" or the like, and the "reserved change notice" is configured to be made to appear (execute) at the timing when the reserved symbols or execution symbols are redisplayed after the performance of the "super reach" ends. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the notice object, while making it possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object, compared to when a notice is given by directly changing the notice object (change object; in the fifth embodiment, the reserved symbols or execution symbols) that is always visible, or when a notice object is given by making a new notice object appear. In particular, reserved patterns that the player is not paying attention to are temporarily made invisible, and then subtly changed, with the change being only a slight change from the normal change (minimal change; one-stage change). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the change in reserved patterns, while giving the player a sense of incongruity due to the change. Then, by making the player realize that the source of this incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), it is possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation, while diversifying the presentation and increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a one-step "reserve change notice" is executed in the execution pattern or reserved pattern that indicates a jackpot change presentation, it is configured to change to a one-step display state ("blue") at the timing "after cockpit erasure" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. In addition, when a "reserve change notice" that has changed multiple steps is executed, it is configured to not select the execution timing "after cockpit erasure". By configuring in this way, even with a one-step "reserve change notice" that previously did not allow for a jackpot to be expected, it is now possible to expect a jackpot depending on the timing at which the "reserve change notice" occurs. As a result, the significance of the one-step "reserve change notice", which previously lacked interest, is increased, and a jackpot can be expected with any presentation pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game through a variety of presentations.

Furthermore, the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" is configured to be more likely to be selected the more reserved balls there are at the time the "reserve change notice" is determined. The more change effects that are executed before the change effect corresponding to the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" is displayed, the higher the possibility that the cockpit display area Db will be cleared. This increases the opportunities for the "reserve change notice" "after the cockpit is cleared" to be executed, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f do not have the pending deletion information storage areas 223e7, 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8, 223f8, so the storage capacity is reduced compared to the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved clear information indicating whether the cockpit display area Db is cleared in the variable performance and the re-change information indicating whether the "re-change" variable element is performed in the variable performance are not distinguished and stored. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 and also reduces the control burden on the MPU 221.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 63 to Fig. 70. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, in the variable performance during execution, the cockpit display area Db is erased by the appearance of the variable element of "super reach", and when the variable element of the "super reach" ends and the cockpit display area Db is displayed again, "reserved change notice" is performed for the execution pattern "after the reservation is erased". In addition, in the variable performance of the first embodiment, three types of "reserved display" with different variable elements of "normal reach", variable elements of "super reach", and variable elements of "special reach" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "each reach display") are provided as "reserved display", and the reach pattern (execution mode) of each "reserved display" is composed of one type.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured to provide multiple reach patterns for each "reach display" (two types, a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern", in the sixth embodiment), and is configured to determine the reach pattern for each "reach display" when the "reach display" is selected. Specifically, for example, when the "super reach" presentation mode is selected in the variable presentation, the values of the reach pattern table 222h and the reach pattern counter 223k described below are referenced to select either the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern" reach pattern for the "super reach" presentation mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when executing a "hold change notice" "after hold deletion", if the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected as the "reach display", the "strong pattern" is changed to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. Then, after the "weak pattern" "reach display" is executed, the "hold change notice" "after hold deletion" is executed.

Conventionally, when multiple types of reach patterns are provided for each "reach display" for the purpose of diversifying the presentation patterns, for example, a "strong pattern" reach pattern that is likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot, and a "weak pattern" reach pattern that is less likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot than the "strong pattern" are provided. That is, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is configured to be less likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and more likely to be selected in the event of a miss, while the "strong pattern" reach pattern is configured to be more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a miss. Thus, when a "weak pattern" appears in the "reach display," the player recognizes that the expected value of a jackpot is low, making it unlikely that a jackpot will be awarded in the variable presentation, and so gives up on the jackpot in the variable presentation, which can cause the player to lose interest when a "weak pattern" reach pattern appears.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a "reserve change notice" is made "after reserve clearing" in the jackpot variable presentation, if a "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected in the "reach display" of the variable presentation, the "strong pattern" reach pattern is changed to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. By configuring it in this way, even if a "weak pattern" reach pattern appears, if the "reserve change notice" "after reserve clearing" appears after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, it will be a jackpot, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when a "weak pattern" appears.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 63, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment further stores at least a reach pattern table 222h in addition to the ROM 222 in the first to fifth embodiments. The reach pattern table 222h will be described later in FIG. 64.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment is further provided with at least a reach pattern counter 223k in addition to the RAM 223 of the first to fifth embodiments.

The reach pattern counter 223k is a counter for drawing lots for the reach pattern of each "reach display." As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, it extracts a variation pattern (presentation mode) from the variation pattern command. Then, if the extracted variation pattern includes the presentation mode of a "reach display," it is configured to draw lots for whether the reach pattern of the "reach display" will be a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" using the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h based on the type of the "reach display."

In the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, this reach pattern counter 223k is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99), and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the reach pattern counter 223k is updated (e.g., incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern of the variation performance indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted, and the value of the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h are referenced based on the type of the "reach display", and the reach pattern of the "reach display" is selected by lottery (see S1703 in FIG. 67).

Now, with reference to Figure 64, we will explain the reach patterns of "each reach display" in the sixth embodiment and the reach pattern table 222h showing the selection rate of each reach pattern of "each reach display". Figure 64(a) is a diagram showing an example of the reach patterns "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" in the sixth embodiment, and Figure 64(b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of the reach pattern table 222h.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, it extracts a variation pattern from the variation pattern command. Then, when it is determined that the "reach display" is to be executed for that variation pattern, the reach pattern table 222h is referenced based on the value of the reach pattern counter 223k at that time, and the reach pattern of the "reach display" is determined. Specifically, in the sixth embodiment, "blue background" and "red background" are provided as reach patterns for "normal reach", "punch" and "kick" are provided as reach patterns for "super reach", and "gun" and "cannon" are provided as reach patterns for "special reach" (see FIG. 64(a)). Note that "special variation" is represented as "-" since no reach pattern is provided (see FIG. 64(a)).

Now, with reference to Figure 65, the reach patterns for each "reach display" in the sixth embodiment will be described. Figure 65(a) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of a "normal reach" in the sixth embodiment, Figure 65(b) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of a "normal reach", Figure 65(c) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of a "super reach", Figure 65(d) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of a "super reach", Figure 65(e) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of a "special reach", and Figure 65(f) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of a "special reach".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a reach pattern with a "blue background" is provided as a "weak pattern" of a "normal reach" (see FIG. 65(a)). Also, a reach pattern with a "red background" is provided as a "strong pattern" of a "normal reach" (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, a "punch" reach pattern is provided as a "weak pattern" of the "super reach" (see FIG. 65(c)). In addition, a "kick" reach pattern is provided as a "strong pattern" of the "super reach" (see FIG. 65(d)).

In addition, a "gun" reach pattern is provided as a "weak pattern" of the "special reach" (see FIG. 65(e)). Also, a "cannon" reach pattern is provided as a "strong pattern" of the "special reach" (see FIG. 65(f)).

Returning to FIG. 64(b), the explanation will continue. As shown in FIG. 64(b), the reach pattern table 222h is grouped based on the selected "reach display."

Specifically, they are divided into a "miss: normal reach" which is referenced when a "normal reach" is determined on a miss, a "miss: super reach" which is referenced when a "super reach" is determined on a miss, a "miss: special reach" which is referenced when a "special reach" is determined on a miss, a "jackpot: normal reach" which is referenced when a "normal reach" is determined on a jackpot, a "jackpot: super reach" which is referenced when a "super reach" is determined on a jackpot, a "jackpot: special reach" which is referenced when a "special reach" is determined on a jackpot, and a "special variation" on a jackpot. The values of the reach pattern counter 223k are then associated with each divided group.

In the reach pattern table 222h, the "special variation" at the time of the jackpot is not assigned a value in the reach pattern counter 223k. This is because the "special variation" is a presentation mode that is always selected at the time of a "2R special jackpot", and the variable element of the "movie" is always selected, and no other reach patterns are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "normal reach" presentation mode is "0 to 79" for a "weak pattern" and "80 to 99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected on a miss, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is selected 80% of the time, and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected 20% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected on a miss when the "normal reach" is selected is set to be the "weak pattern" (80%).

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "super reach" presentation mode is "0 to 89" for a "weak pattern" and "90 to 99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected on a miss, the "Weak Pattern" reach pattern is selected 90% of the time, and the "Strong Pattern" reach pattern is selected 10% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected on a miss when the "Super Reach" is selected is set to be the "Weak Pattern" (90%).

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "special reach" presentation mode is "0 to 98" for a "weak pattern" and "99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "special reach" presentation mode is selected on a miss, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is selected 99% of the time, and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected 1% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected during a "special reach" on a miss is set to be the "weak pattern" (99%).

Therefore, in the case of a miss, all "reach displays" are configured so that the "weak pattern" reach pattern is more likely to be selected and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is less likely to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "normal reach" presentation mode is "0 to 9" for a "weak pattern" and "10 to 99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected during a jackpot, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is selected 10% of the time, and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected 90% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected during a "normal reach" during a jackpot is set to be the "strong pattern" (90%).

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "super reach" presentation mode is "0 to 19" for a "weak pattern" and "20 to 99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected during a jackpot, the "Weak Pattern" reach pattern is selected 20% of the time, and the "Strong Pattern" reach pattern is selected 80% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected during a "Super Reach" during a jackpot is set to be the "Strong Pattern" (80%).

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "special reach" presentation mode is "0 to 29" for a "weak pattern" and "30 to 99" for a "strong pattern."

In other words, when the "special reach" presentation mode is selected during a jackpot, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is selected 30% of the time, and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected 70% of the time. Therefore, the reach pattern selected during a "special reach" during a jackpot is set to be the "strong pattern" (70%).

Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, all "reach displays" are configured so that the "strong pattern" reach pattern is more likely to be selected and the "weak pattern" reach pattern is less likely to be selected.

In this way, by providing a "strong pattern" reach pattern that is likely to be selected when there is a jackpot and difficult to select when there is a miss, and a "weak pattern" reach pattern that is difficult to select when there is a jackpot and easy to select when there is a miss, the difference in expected value of a jackpot between the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" reach patterns can diversify the presentation patterns of the variable presentation and increase the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S1110), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command, and a variation pattern determination process is performed to determine the variation pattern (reach pattern) for the details of the variation performance (S1251), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). Note that, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), the processes of S1204 to S1212 are performed, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

Now, referring to FIG. 67, the variation pattern determination process (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern determination process (S1251). When the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is a "reach display", this variation pattern determination process (S1251) determines the reach pattern of the "reach display" and performs processing to set a display variation pattern command for the display control device 114.

In this fluctuation pattern determination process (S1251), first, a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1701). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223. Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern includes a "reach display" (S1702). If the result of the determination is that the fluctuation pattern includes a "reach display" (S1702: Yes), in order to determine a detailed reach pattern of the "reach display", the reach pattern is determined by referring to the reach pattern table 222h based on the value of the reach pattern counter 223k at that time (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern does not include a "reach display" (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

In the process of S1704, a display variation pattern command is set (S1704) to notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern and reach pattern based on the extracted variation pattern and reach pattern, and this variation pattern determination process (S1251) is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 66). Note that in the process of S1704, a dedicated display variation pattern command is set for a variation performance in which no reach pattern exists, such as the "special variation" performance mode.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation pattern and reach pattern variation presentation determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 68, the variable performance process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the variable performance process (S1109) of the sixth embodiment.

This variable performance process (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28). In order to display the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81, first, various information stored in the reserved information storage area 1 of the reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 is shifted to the reserved information storage areas 1 to 3. In addition, it is determined whether the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and when the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" is executed, a variable change process is performed to change the reach pattern from a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern". Furthermore, when the stop type command received from the main control device 110 does not match the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated, and a process is performed to set this command to be sent to the display control device 114. In addition, when it is time to execute the "reserved change notice" for the executed pattern and the reserved pattern, various commands related to the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" are generated, and processing is performed to set up these commands for transmission to the display control device 114.

Specifically, in the fluctuation performance process (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), since at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation performance process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, the process of S1402 to S1404 is carried out to start the fluctuation performance, and then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and a fluctuation change process is carried out to change the reach pattern from a strong pattern to a weak pattern when a "hold change notice" is executed after "hold deletion" (S1471). After the fluctuation change process (S1471), the process of S1408 to S1416 is carried out, the fluctuation performance process (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

Now, referring to FIG. 69, the variation change process (S1471) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variation change process (S1471). In this variation change process, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 matches the content (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and when a "hold change notice" after "hold deletion" is executed, a process is performed to change the reach pattern from a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern."

Specifically, first, the change pattern of the change performance to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f (S1801). Then, it is determined whether or not the change pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the change pattern in the change performance extracted from the change pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1701 of the change pattern determination process (see FIG. 67) (S1802). If the information on the change performance indicated by the change pattern command received this time differs from the information on the change performance previously stored in the execution information storage area 223f (reserved information storage area 223e), a normal change performance (change pattern) cannot be executed due to the influence of some abnormality (noise, etc.). Therefore, this determination process is used to determine whether or not there is an abnormality and to confirm whether or not a normal change performance can be executed.

If it is determined in S1802 that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f does not match the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 (S1802: No), some abnormality has occurred with the variation performance being executed, so a display error command is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 of the abnormality (S1803), and processing proceeds to S1804.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 28). Upon receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some kind of abnormality has occurred regarding the variable performance, switches the third pattern display device 81 to an error display (e.g., default variable), and begins display control of the error display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1802 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f matches the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 (S1802: Yes), no abnormality has occurred with respect to the fluctuation performance being executed, so the processing of S1803 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1804.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to make a "reserved change notice" appear in the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 (S1804). This determination is made by checking the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f, and determining whether the scenario data indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and that the data indicates "at the start", "before the reach", "after the reach", or "after the reserved balls are cleared" (hereinafter abbreviated as "at the start" through "after the reserved balls are cleared").

If the result of the determination in S1804 is that the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and that the data indicates any of "at the start" to "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1804: Yes), then it is determined whether the execution timing of the "reserved ball change notice" is "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1805).

In addition, since in S1805 it is determined whether the timing for executing the "reserve change notice" is "after the reserve is cleared", it is possible to omit the process in S1804 of determining whether it is the timing for executing the "reserve change notice" in the executed symbol.

If the result of the judgment in S1805 is that the execution timing of this "hold change notice" is "after hold deletion" (S1805: Yes), then it is judged whether the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variable performance is a "strong pattern" or not (S1806). This judgment is made by judging the reach pattern determined in the processing of S1703 of the variable pattern determination processing (see FIG. 67). If the result of the judgment is that the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variable performance is a "strong pattern" (S1806: Yes), the reach pattern of the "reach display" is changed from a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern" (S1807), a reach pattern change command for display is set based on the changed reach pattern (S1808), this variable change processing (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance processing (see FIG. 68).

In this way, when a "hold change notice" is made "after hold removal" in the variable presentation, if a "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected in the "each reach display" of the variable presentation, the "strong pattern" reach pattern is changed to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. By configuring it in this way, even if a "weak pattern" reach pattern appears, if the "hold change notice" "after hold removal" appears after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, it will be a jackpot, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when a "weak pattern" appears.

In the process of S1804, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of reserved balls is "0" and is not data indicating any of "at the start" to "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1804: No), the "reserved ball change notice" in the execution pattern is not executed, so the processes of S1805 to S1808 are skipped, this variable change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 68). In addition, in the process of S1805, if the execution timing of this "reserved ball change notice" is not "after reserved balls are cleared" (S1805: No), the processes of S1806 to S1808 are skipped, this variable change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 68). In the process of S1806, if the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variable performance is not a "strong pattern" (S1806: No), there is no need to change the reach pattern, so the processes of S1807 and S1808 are skipped, this variable change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 68).

Next, referring to FIG. 70, an example of the execution of a "reserve change notice" after "reserve deletion" in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a situation in which a "reserve change notice" is performed after "reserve deletion" in a variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

Specifically, FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a "reach display" is about to appear in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. 70(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 70(a) and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 70(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area Db is erased from the state of FIG. 70(b) and the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 70(d) is a diagram showing a state in which a performance suggesting that a "miss display" will appear in the performance of the variable element of the "super reach" is executed from the state of FIG. 70(c). FIG. 70(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. 70(d) and the "miss display" appears in the main display area Dm. FIG. 70(f) shows the state just before the "big win display" appears after "re-change" is performed from the state of FIG. 70(e). Note that in FIG. 70(a) to FIG. 70(f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted.

In FIG. 70(a), the third "7" symbol is displayed statically in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third "7" symbol is about to be displayed statically in the right display area Dm3, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is "high-speed fluctuating" so that it is still not visible. Therefore, this is the state immediately before the so-called "reach display" of the "7" symbol appears.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character image is displayed in the central small area Ds2 in a preview manner that suggests that a "reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character image displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and right small area Ds3, and no character image or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 70(b) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 70(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a "reach display" by the "7" symbol is confirmed, and the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach" variable element, the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner as if the entire main display area Dm were expanded. Specifically, the "7" symbol that is displayed in a stopped state is enlarged in the left display area Dm1 and right display area Dm3, and the third symbol is displayed in a slowly visible changing manner (for example, slowly scrolling from the "5" symbol to the "6" symbol) in the middle display area Dm2.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is erased as the primary display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of a variable element of the "normal reach", and the secondary display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the state of Fig. 70(b), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of Fig. 70(a), the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. Therefore, similar to Fig. 70(a), the execution pattern indicates that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved patterns indicate that the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is four.

Figure 70 (c) shows a state in which a "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 70 (b). In this "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach", the reach forming pattern of the "7" pattern displayed as a variable element of the "Normal Reach" is displayed in a reduced form in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, while the variable element of the "Super Reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, a new number pattern ("4" in the sixth embodiment) indicating the number of balls reserved for the variable performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, in the variable element of "Super Reach" in FIG. 70(c), a "battle performance" in which multiple character symbols compete for victory or defeat is displayed using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this "battle performance", a performance is executed in which the character symbol on the player's side (e.g., the left character symbol) fights against the character symbol on the enemy's side (e.g., the right character symbol) (kickboxing in the sixth embodiment).

As described above, the variable element of the "Super Reach" is configured to be able to execute "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach" by expressing different attack patterns of the character design on the player's side. Specifically, there are reach patterns of "punch" as a "weak pattern" and "kick" as a "strong pattern", and in the example shown in Figure 70 (c), "punch", which is a reach pattern of the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach", is executed.

Conventionally, the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are configured so that if a jackpot is won, a "strong pattern" is likely to be selected, and if a jackpot is not won, i.e., if the player misses, a "weak pattern" is likely to be selected. Therefore, when a player sees a "weak pattern" in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", they predict that at the stage when they see the "weak pattern", the player's character design will have a hard time beating the enemy's character design in the "battle performance" of the variable elements of the "Super Reach", and as a result, the player's character design will lose to the enemy's character design and result in a miss.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a "reserved change notice" is executed "after the reserved state is cleared," that is, for example, when a jackpot is won and a "jackpot display" appears due to "re-change" after the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach," the reach pattern of the variable element of the "Super Reach" can be changed from a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern." Therefore, even if a "weak pattern" appears in the variable element of the "Super Reach," the "reserved change notice" occurs "after the reserved state is cleared" and a jackpot is reached. Therefore, the player does not lose interest when the variable element of the "Super Reach" appears in a "weak pattern," but can maintain interest for a long time by focusing on the timing when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends and the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, and concentrating on the variable presentation until that stage.

In the state shown in Figure 70 (c), a reduced version of the "7" symbol that is the cause of the variable element of this "Super Reach" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Figure 70(d) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 70(c), the player's character design (left character design) has lost to the enemy's character design (right character design) in the "battle performance" of the variable element of the "Super Reach". Therefore, when the player recognizes the display content of Figure 70(d), he or she predicts that, because the player's character design has lost in the "battle performance" of the variable element of the "Super Reach", the variable element of the "Super Reach" will not show a "jackpot display" but will show a "miss display".

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a "reserve change notice" is executed "after the reserve is cleared", the reach pattern of the variable element of the "Super Reach" can be changed from a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern". Therefore, when a "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach" appears, a player who has already experienced the possibility of a "reserve change notice" occurring "after the reserve is cleared" will lose to the "battle performance" due to the "weak pattern" of the variable element of the "Super Reach", but will focus on the possibility of a "reserve change notice" occurring at the timing when the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends, and will be concentrating on the variable performance up to that stage.

Also, in FIG. 70(d), as in FIG. 70(c), the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db remains erased.

Figure 70 (e) shows a state in which the "Super Reach" variable element performance from the state of Figure 70 (d) has failed (the enemy character symbol has won), and the "miss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds and the execution symbol and reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are visible again. Note that the character symbol in the small central area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the "miss display." In other words, the main part of the third symbol display device 81 displays a state in which the chances are down.

In FIG. 70(e), the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a display mode ("blue") that has changed from the display mode ("white"; see FIG. 70(b)) before it was erased by the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach". In other words, a "reserve change notice" is issued at the execution timing "after the reserve is erased". That is, a chance up state is displayed in the non-main part (secondary part) of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a chance down state in the main part and a chance up state in the non-main part are simultaneously displayed.

When the player first sees the state of Figure 70(e), due to the appearance of the "miss display (787)" in the main display area Dm and the impression of having lost the "battle performance" with the variable element of "Super Reach", the player infers that, as predicted at the time of Figure 70(d), the "big win display" will not appear in this variable performance, but rather the "miss display" will appear and the "miss display" will be confirmed, and his interest shifts to the next variable performance. Then, when the player looks at the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the content of the next variable performance, he recognizes that a "reserved change notice" has been made in the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0 indicating the current variable performance, and that the execution pattern has changed to "blue".

At this point, when a player sees this "reserve change notice" for the first time "after the reserve is cleared," he or she first notices the difference in the way the execution pattern is displayed from before the "battle effect" of the variable element of the "Super Reach" is executed, and feels something is off. The player then realizes that the source of this offense is the "blue" execution pattern. The player then uses his or her memory to consider when the "reserve change notice" of the "blue" execution pattern was made. After considering this, the player realizes that the "reserve change notice" was not made before the variable element of the "Super Reach" was executed, but was executed after the variable element of the "Super Reach" had ended. At this moment, the player predicts that some kind of event will occur due to the "blue" execution pattern in the variable effect that is currently being executed.

Figure 70(f) shows a state in which a "re-variable" variable element is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of Figure 70(e). In this "re-variable" variable element, the main display area Dm is enlarged and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "miss display" that was displayed as a static "787" in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 starts to vary again, eventually becoming a static "jackpot display" of "777". The player is surprised that the "re-variable" variable element has occurred, and feels happy and satisfied that the variable presentation has not been finalized as a "miss display" but has developed to a "jackpot display", as predicted at the stage of Figure 70(e).

Furthermore, a player who has experienced this "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" will check whether the execution pattern has changed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db in the next "weak pattern" "Super Reach" variable element, even if the "Super Reach" variable element is executed in a "weak pattern" reach pattern and a "miss display" appears as a result of the "Super Reach" variable element. This creates an interest in checking the display state of the execution pattern that is re-displayed even after the execution of the "Super Reach" variable element, and the player can play while hoping for the "jackpot display" to appear until the variable effect is confirmed. This allows the player to maintain interest in the game until the variable effect is confirmed.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a "hold change notice" is made "after hold clearing" in the jackpot variable presentation, if a "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected in the "each reach display" of the variable presentation, the "strong pattern" reach pattern is changed to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. By configuring it in this way, even if a "weak pattern" reach pattern appears, if the "hold change notice" "after hold clearing" appears after the variable element of the "weak pattern" "reach display" ends, it will be a jackpot, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when a "weak pattern" appears.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding a part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing a part or parts of the configuration of that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are merely examples, and it is of course possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above-mentioned embodiments, when the variable element of "Super Reach" appears, the entire cockpit display area Db is erased, and both the execution pattern and the reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db are erased so that they are not visible. In contrast, it is also possible to erase only the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db, and to continue to display the execution pattern indicating the content of the variable performance being performed. By configuring in this way, when the "reserved change notice" is executed in the execution pattern, it is possible to continue to suggest to the player the expectation of a big win regarding the variable performance being executed based on the display mode of the "reserved change notice", and it is possible to increase the interest of the game in the variable performance being executed. Note that, when the execution pattern is not erased but is continued to be displayed during the variable performance, it is preferable to configure the "reserved change notice" after the "reserved change notice" to be executed on the reserved pattern.

<Modification 2>
In the first or fifth embodiment, the execution symbol or reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db, which is normally visible but becomes invisible when a variable element of the "Super Reach" occurs, is configured to execute a "reserved change notice""after the reserved symbol is erased" at the timing when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends and the execution symbol and reserved symbol become visible again. In contrast to this, the "change notice""aftererasure" may be executed in a display object different from the execution symbol or reserved symbol.

Specifically, for example, a "change notice" may be configured to be made "after erasure" for the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. When a "change notice" is made "after erasure" for the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2, the display mode of a part (for example, only hair or only headband) or the whole (for example, the facial expression of the character pattern) of the character pattern may be configured to be displayed in a special display mode (for example, "red" for a headband, "gold" for hair, a happy facial expression of the character pattern) different from the normal display mode (for example, "white" for a headband, "black" for hair, a disappointed facial expression when a "miss display" appears) at the timing when the central small area Ds2 is redisplayed after the variable element of the "super reach" has ended (for example, "red" for a headband, "gold" for hair, a happy facial expression of the character pattern).

By configuring it in this way, when a deleted display object is redisplayed, the player assumes that it will be redisplayed with the same display content as before it was deleted, but the redisplayed object changes, and because the change is very slight from the overall display content, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference from their initial assumption. Therefore, the display content of the display object can be changed without the player noticing, providing the player with an unexpected presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

For example, a level meter display is displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, and the level meter display is configured to be constantly displayed during normal times. This level meter display is configured to specifically display the probability of winning in the variable performance. Specifically, the level meter display is raised stepwise each time a performance that increases the probability of winning appears in the variable performance (for example, the appearance of a character pattern or a cut-in pattern, etc.), and the probability of winning at that stage is visualized and displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Then, when the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the like is used to erase the sub-display area Ds, the level meter display is also erased, and when the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the like is terminated and the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed, the level meter display is also redisplayed. When the redisplayed level meter display has changed from the display state before it was erased (for example, the level meter has increased in stages from before it was erased), the variable element of "re-variation" is performed to derive the "jackpot display".

Furthermore, for example, in the background display of the main display area Dm, the background display is erased due to a variable element of "Super Reach" or the like, and when the variable element of "Super Reach" or the like ends and the background display of the main display area Dm is redisplayed, this background display is also redisplayed. If the redisplayed background display has changed from the display state before it was erased (for example, a clear change from "town stage" to "sky stage", the background display color changes from "blue" to "light blue", or a small character pattern is added so as to blend into part of the background), the variable element of "re-change" is performed to derive a "jackpot display".

In this way, by changing and displaying a display object that is not an execution pattern or a reserved pattern before it is erased at the timing of redisplaying it, it is possible to subtly change the display mode of the object while making it more difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the object, compared to when an object that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or when a new object is made to appear and notified. By making the object invisible for a moment and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is directly linked to the game value (for example, a jackpot), it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

The change in the object may also be configured to occur for multiple objects. This allows the player to search for the location of the object that has been changed since it was erased when the variable element of the "Super Reach" ends and the display screen returns to the normal display mode, making the game more interesting.

<Modification 3>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "reserved change notice" is executed "after the reserved deletion", the display mode of the execution pattern or reserved pattern is configured to be displayed in a display mode that is raised (chance up) from the normal display mode. In contrast, when the "reserved change notice" is executed "after the reserved deletion", the display mode of the execution pattern or reserved pattern may be configured to be displayed in a display mode that is lowered (chance down) from the display mode before deletion. By configuring in this way, for example, if the reserved pattern before deletion was in a "blue" display mode, the reserved pattern is displayed in the normal display mode of "white" at the timing of redisplay, so that the display of the reserved pattern for which the "reserved change notice" was performed "after the reserved deletion" is displayed as the same as the other reserved patterns, making it difficult for the player to know which reserved pattern has changed. By making it impossible to know the reserved pattern that had changed before deletion, it is made unclear in which variation performance the "reserved change notice" occurred. This unclear impression gives the player a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to realize that the source of this discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, a jackpot), thereby providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment, when each movable part 87, 88 is driven, each movable part 87, 88 is configured to be driven simultaneously. In contrast, each movable part 87, 88 may be configured to be driven separately instead of simultaneously. In this case, for example, the left movable part 87 is configured to be driven so that only the left movable part 87 covers the cockpit display area Db. That is, the left movable part 87 is configured to cover the cockpit display area Db only when it is driven before the right movable part 88, and the left movable part 87 is configured not to be able to cover the cockpit display area Db when the right movable part 88 is driven before the left movable part 87. By configuring in this way, the subsequent performance content changes depending on whether any of the movable parts 87, 88 starts moving first, so that it is possible to create interest in the way each movable part 87, 88 starts moving.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the left movable role 87 is driven to cover the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db, and a "reserved change notice" is performed on the execution symbol at the timing when the left movable role 87 covers the execution symbol. In contrast, the execution symbol may be concealed (covered) by another concealing member (covering member). Specifically, for example, a light guide plate is provided on the front side of the game board 13, the front side of the light guide plate is mechanically etched to form fine linear unevenness, light is introduced from the side of the light guide plate, and the light introduced by the unevenness is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, a pattern corresponding to the unevenness appears to shine in color due to the light. Then, by arranging the unevenness on the front side of the execution symbol, the execution symbol is configured to be invisible when light is incident on the light guide plate, and the "reserved change notice" is performed at the timing when the execution symbol becomes visible again by stopping the incidence of light on the light guide plate. By configuring it in this manner, a three-dimensional presentation is possible using the light guide plate and the third pattern display device 81, and a "reserve change notice" is given "after the reserve is removed" at the timing when light enters the light guide plate, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the reach patterns of the "reach display" are provided with a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern", and when the "reserve change notice" is performed "after the reserve is cleared", if the "strong pattern" of the "reach display" is selected, the "strong pattern" is changed to the "weak pattern". In contrast, with respect to the reach patterns of the "reach display", for example, in the "battle performance", two types of action patterns, an attack pattern and a defense pattern, by the character design on the player side, and two types of action patterns, an attack pattern and a defense pattern, by the character design on the enemy side, are provided, and a reach pattern is formed by combining one of the action patterns by the character design on the player side with one of the action patterns by the character design on the enemy side, and a combination of reach patterns is provided that is selected only when the "reserve change notice" after the reserve is cleared is performed. Specifically, when the "reserve change notice" after the reserve is cleared is performed, a combination of action patterns that would not normally occur (for example, a combination of defense patterns, a defense pattern of the character design on the player side and a defense pattern of the character design on the enemy side) may be performed.

In this way, a combination pattern that would not normally occur gives the player a first sense of incongruity, and then a "reserved change notice" is executed at the timing when the execution pattern or reserved pattern is redisplayed, giving the player a second sense of incongruity from that change. When the player senses the second sense of incongruity, the player is made to recognize that the root of the second sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (e.g., a jackpot), providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the first sense of incongruity before the occurrence of the second sense of incongruity was a notice-like display of the second sense of incongruity. Then, once a player has experienced this event, in subsequent games, the player will play games searching for the second sense of incongruity as well as the first sense of incongruity, thereby diversifying the gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, when a "reserved change notice" is made after the execution symbol or reserved symbol is made invisible, the "reserved change notice" is made for the execution symbol or reserved symbol when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. In contrast, the "reserved change notice" may be made when a predetermined time has elapsed since the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. In this case, the execution symbol or reserved symbol may be changed gradually (e.g., morphing, etc.) so that the execution symbol or reserved symbol is changed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that it is changing.

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, when a "weak pattern" of the variable elements of the "Super Reach" appears, a "hold change notice" may appear "after hold removal". In other words, the "weak pattern" of the variable elements of the "Super Reach" is configured to suggest the possibility that a "hold change notice" will be executed "after hold removal". In contrast, during the execution of the variable performance, the background display, the notice pattern, or the stopped pattern of the "miss display" may be configured to suggest the possibility that a "hold change notice" will be executed "after hold removal".

Specifically, for example, a weak background ("blue") and a strong background ("red") are provided for the background display, and the strong background is more likely to directly cause a "jackpot display" to appear than a weak background, but the weak background is more likely to cause a "reserve change notice" to be executed "after the reserve is cleared" than a strong background. Also, for example, a weak notice ("mini character") and a strong notice ("big character") are provided for the notice pattern, and the strong notice is more likely to directly cause a "jackpot display" to appear than a weak notice, but the weak notice is more likely to cause a "reserve change notice" to be executed "after the reserve is cleared" than a strong notice. Furthermore, the stopping symbols for the "missing display" are divided into weak losing numbers (numbers that are not related to the individual symbols, such as "169") and strong losing numbers (numbers that are related to the symbols, such as "123" in a predetermined sequence or "645 (Mujiko)" that can be expressed in words), and the strong losing numbers are more likely to directly cause the "big win display" to appear than the weak losing numbers, but the weak losing numbers are more likely to execute the "reserve change notice" "after the reserve is cleared" than the strong losing numbers.

By configuring it in this way, the player can play while paying attention to whether or not a presentation that suggests the execution of a "reserve change notice" after "reserve deletion" appears during the execution of the variable presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above embodiments, the display object (execution symbol or reserved symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched from a visually perceptible state to an unperceptible state, and the display state is changed at the timing when the display object becomes visually perceptible again, so that a sense of incongruity is generated based on the change. In contrast, the sense of incongruity may be generated by changing perception based on perception other than vision, for example, hearing or skin sensation (touch, temperature, pain, wind, etc.).

For example, to create an auditory discomfort, the sound output by the audio output device 226 is changed from its normal state to create an uncomfortable feeling for the player. An audio discomfort is created by changing the way the player's hearing is stimulated, for example, by changing the pitch of the sound, the pattern of change in the sound image, the loudness of the sound, changes in rhythm, the type of instrument, etc., from the normal output state to create an uncomfortable feeling for the player.

Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which high and low tones are initially synthesized and output, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silenced), and then when the sound is output again, only high tones are output. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound whose sound image changes from right to left is initially output, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silenced), and then when the sound is output again, a sound whose sound image changes from left to right is output. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a piano sound is initially output, the sound output is temporarily stopped (silenced), and then when the sound is output again, a guitar sound is output.

Visual recognition is easier to recognize early on if something feels wrong because it is possible to continue checking with the eyes, but auditory recognition is weaker than visual recognition because sound is only recognized as output at that moment and cannot be checked continuously. Therefore, changing the sound output from its normal state to make the player feel something is wrong can prolong the time until the player clearly recognizes something is wrong.

In addition, for example, in the case of creating a sense of discomfort due to skin sensations (sensations occurring on the surface of the body, such as touch (sensation of touch), temperature (sensation of temperature), pain (sensation of pain or stimuli), pressure (sensation of pressure), and wind (sensation of wind)), the control state of the operating handle 51, frame button 22, ball removal lever 52, ball lending button 42, or return button 43, as well as other parts that stimulate the player, such as electric fans and heaters, is changed from the normal state to create a sense of discomfort for the player.

Specifically, for example, the operating handle 51 may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by making the biasing force of a spring (not shown) that biases the operating handle 51 to the initial position stronger than usual at a predetermined timing. Also, for example, the frame button 22 may be configured to have a locking mechanism that locks the frame button 22 so that it cannot be pressed down, and when an instruction such as continuous tapping is output, the frame button 22 may be locked in the middle of the continuous tapping state so that it cannot be pressed down, making the player feel uncomfortable. In this case, it is preferable to output an announcement such as "Please tap the frame button repeatedly" on the third pattern display device 81, etc. Furthermore, for example, a fan that can output wind toward a player is configured to normally emit (output) wind to stimulate the player's wind sense, but it may be configured to initially output wind, but then suck in wind halfway through, making the player feel uncomfortable with the wind sense.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when "after hold clearing" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", if the variable element of "re-change" is not included in the variable performance, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is changed to another timing other than "after hold clearing" (for example, "after reaching"). In contrast, when "after hold clearing" is selected as the execution timing of the "hold change notice", if the "hold change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after hold clearing" in the variable performance, another notice performance other than the "hold change notice" may be executed.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a "normal reach + re-change" change pattern, in which the "re-change" change element is performed but the cockpit display area Db is not cleared, when a "hold change notice" "after hold clearing" is selected, a "re-display notice" "after secondary display area clearing" is performed in the secondary display area Ds at the timing when the secondary display area Ds is redisplayed, instead of the "hold change notice" "after hold clearing". As this "re-display notice", for example, the display mode of the character design displayed in the secondary display area Ds is changed from before the secondary display area Ds was cleared (for example, the color of the headband changes from "white" to "red", etc.). In a variable presentation that includes a "re-variable" variable element, the "normal reach" variable element is always executed, and when the "normal reach" variable element is executed, the small central area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds is erased. Therefore, even in a variable pattern in which a "reserve change notice" "after reserve removal" cannot be executed, a notice presentation that is the same as or similar to the "reserve change notice" "after reserve removal" can be performed, such as a "re-display notice" "after secondary display area removal," to increase the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of display modes of the "reserve change notice" are provided, and one of the execution timings of the "reserve change notice" is selected, and the "reserve change notice" is executed in one of the display modes determined at the one execution timing. In contrast, when a display mode with a plurality of levels (e.g., "red" or "rainbow") is selected in the "reserve change notice", the "reserve change notice" may be executed in stages at a plurality of execution timings. By configuring in this way, the "reserve change notice" can be executed in stages to execute a notice performance that steps up the probability of winning, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Modification 12>
In the third embodiment, the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in a "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and when the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven to the initial position again to release the covering, a "reserved change notice" is executed for the execution pattern. In response to this, the movable parts 87 and 88 are equipped with LEDs to be able to express color changes, and the colors of the movable parts 87 and 88 are expressed in a suggestive manner before the movable parts 87 and 88 cover the cockpit display area Db. Then, when the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable parts 87 and 88 expressed in a suggestive manner, the suggestive manner is propagated to the execution pattern (reserved pattern) of the cockpit display area Db, and when the covering of the movable parts 87 and 88 is released and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible, the display manner of the execution pattern may be displayed in a state that reflects the suggestive manner.

Specifically, for example, the display mode of each movable role 87, 88 before covering the cockpit display area Db is lit in red, and when each movable role 87, 88 covers the cockpit display area Db and the covering is released, the execution pattern (reserved pattern) of the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a red display mode. By configuring in this way, a gameplay is created in which the execution pattern (reserved pattern) is covered by each movable role 87, 88, and if it is covered, the suggestive mode of each movable role 87, 88 is transmitted to the execution pattern (reserved pattern), and the interest of the game can be increased. Note that instead of each movable role 87, 88, a cut-in image or the like may be used. In addition, a "state reflecting a suggested pattern" includes the display mode of a presentation means that makes the execution pattern (reserved pattern) difficult to see being directly transmitted to the execution pattern (reserved pattern), the execution pattern (reserved pattern) being displayed in content related to the display mode of the presentation means, or the display mode of the presentation means being shifted (transitioned) to the execution pattern (reserved pattern) and displayed, etc.

<Modification 13>
In the third embodiment, the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven from the initial position in a "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and when the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven to the initial position again to release the covering, a "reserved change notice" is executed for the execution pattern, giving the player a sense of incongruity. In contrast, as a performance that gives the player a sense of incongruity, for example, the movable parts 87 and 88 may be configured to move from the initial position to a moving position, and when driven again from the moving position, to return to a position slightly shifted from the initial position, rather than to the initial position. By configuring in this way, the player can feel a sense of incongruity that the movable parts 87 and 88 are shifted from the initial position to the shifted position.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above embodiments, the player is suggested to have different expectations for a jackpot depending on the display color of the "reserved change notice". In contrast, the player may be suggested to have different game values (probability change state or time reduction state) to be awarded at the time of a jackpot depending on the display color of the "reserved change notice". Specifically, for example, when the "reserved change notice" is "blue", the probability of the "probability change state" being awarded is low, when the "reserved change notice" is "red", the probability of the "probability change state" being awarded is high, and when the "reserved change notice" is "rainbow", the probability change state is awarded and the jackpot with the highest game value (for example, 15R) is awarded. By configuring in this way, when the "reserved change notice" is executed after "reserved deletion", the game value to be awarded is suggested to be different depending on the display color of the "reserved change notice", and the gameplay of wondering which color the "reserved change notice" displayed after "reserved deletion" will be will be created, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition to the configuration in which the game value awarded in the event of a jackpot differs depending on the display color of the "Hold Change Notice," the "Hold Change Notice" may be configured to suggest to the player a certain game status depending on the display color of the "Hold Change Notice." Specifically, for example, the "Hold Change Notice" may be configured to suggest that when the "Hold Change Notice" is "blue," the change time of the executed change performance is short, and when the "Hold Change Notice" is "red," the change time of the executed change performance is long.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is finished, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the "reserved change notice after the re-display" is executed to change the display mode of the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db from the display mode before the re-display of the execution pattern, and a surprising performance is executed. In contrast, the display mode of the character pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds may be changed from the display mode before the re-display of the character pattern to suggest that a jackpot will be obtained based on the change. In this case, while displaying a temporary "miss display" in the main display area Dm, the character pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds may be displayed in a display mode that does not correspond to the "miss display" (for example, a happy expression), so that the player feels a sense of incongruity based on the non-correspondence between the display mode of the "miss display" and the expression of the character pattern.

<Modification 16>
In the third embodiment, when the left movable role 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", the left movable role 87 is configured to cover the entire cockpit display area Db. In contrast, when the left movable role 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", it may be configured to cover only a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution pattern display area Db0, the first reserved pattern display area Db1, and the second reserved pattern display area Db2, and not cover the third reserved pattern display area Db3 and the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4. By configuring in this way, the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" can be executed only with the execution pattern and the reserved pattern within the range that the left movable role 87 can cover, and the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" is not executed with the reserved pattern that cannot be covered by the left movable role 87, thereby enriching the variation of the game.

In addition, in the above configuration, the left movable part 87 may be configured to cover the execution pattern display area Db0, the first reserved pattern display area Db1, and the second reserved pattern display area Db2, and the right movable part 88 may be configured to cover the third reserved pattern display area Db3 and the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4, and the timing of the execution of the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" may be changed depending on the driving mode of each movable part 87, 88. In this case, by configuring the driving of the "strong pattern" of the left movable part 87 and the driving of the "strong pattern" of the right movable part 88 to have different jackpot reliability, the driving contents of each movable part 87, 88 and the execution contents of the "reserved change notice" can be varied to provide variation in the game, increasing the interest of the game.

<Modification 17>
In the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed once during the variation performance to conceal the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db, and when the concealment is released, a "reserved change notice" is performed for the execution pattern "after the reservation is cleared." In contrast, the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be displayed multiple times in the area where the cockpit display area Db is displayed during the variation performance, and when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again after one of the large character cut-in images Dc2 is displayed, a "reserved change notice" is performed "after the reservation is cleared."

Specifically, for example, the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be configured to be displayed three times in the variable performance, and the game may be given as to whether the cockpit display area Db is erased when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and then erased, and whether the execution pattern or reserved pattern of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed with the cockpit display area Db erased and then erased. For example, based on the first display of the large character cut-in image Dc2, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered, and when the first large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the cockpit display area Db is also erased. Then, when the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, only the outer frame of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. Then, when the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, and the display color of the execution pattern is changed to execute a "reserved change notice" "after the reserved change notice is erased." By configuring in this way, it is possible to add gameplay to the fact that the effect related to the "reserved change notice" is executed at the timing when the large character cut-in image Dc2 covering the cockpit display area Db is erased, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Modification 18>
In the fourth embodiment, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered by the entire large character cut-in image Dc2. In contrast, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, only a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution pattern display area Db0, the first reserved pattern display area Db1, and the second reserved pattern display area Db2 may be covered, and the third reserved pattern display area Db3 and the fourth reserved pattern display area Db4 may not be covered. By configuring in this way, the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" can be executed only for the execution pattern and the reserved pattern within the range that can be covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" is not executed for the reserved pattern that cannot be covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2, thereby enriching the variation of the game.

<Modification 19>
In the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2, the rear of which is invisible, is displayed, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered with the large character cut-in image Dc2, the cockpit display area Db is concealed, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the cockpit display area Db is made visible again, and the "pending change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible. In contrast, the rear side of the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be made visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and invisible when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Specifically, for example, when the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in blue, it is made invisible when the execution pattern is displayed in "blue", while when the execution pattern is displayed in "white" or "red", the execution pattern is made visible through the large character cut-in image Dc2. With this configuration, if the display color of the execution pattern (reserved pattern) displayed before the large character cut-in image Dc2 appears is the same (same color) as the large character cut-in image Dc2, the execution pattern is assimilated with the large character cut-in image Dc2 when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, making it invisible, and the display color of the execution pattern is changed when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased. This allows the execution of a "reserved change notice""after the reservation is erased" to be determined based on the relationship between the display color of the execution pattern before the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2, thereby enriching the variety of presentations and increasing the interest of the game.

Also, the look-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, the display control device 114 may be provided with a reserved information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 19, which store information for performing the look-ahead process, i.e., the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 upon the start winning, and when a display reserved ball number command is received, the display control device 114 executes the look-ahead process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved information storage area and the execution information storage area, and if it is determined that there is a change performance that will be a jackpot among the variable performances being executed and the variable performances being held, a "hold change notice" may be executed. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the reserved ball number command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 as a display reserved ball number command as it is. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start winning can be stored in the reserved information first to fourth areas provided in the reserved information storage area of the display control device 114, in the areas corresponding to the reserved ball number of the display reserved ball number command. Then, the display control device 114 may execute a shift process similar to the process of S1403 and S1404 of FIG. 31 on the reserved information storage area every time it receives a display variable pattern command. As a result, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110, and the reserved information first to fourth areas can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display, but the main control device 110 may send commands directly to the display control device 114. Also, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and commands instructing the display control device 114 to output each sound and turn on the lamp may be sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as a single control device. By configuring them as a single control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as a single control device, a reserved information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 19 may be provided in the RAM of the single control device, and when a reserved ball count command is received from the main control device 110, the counter values C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command may be stored in the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls read ahead of the reserved ball count command among the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information provided in the reserved information storage area. In addition, each time a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the single control device may perform a shift process similar to the processes of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 31 between the reserved information areas 1 to 4 and the execution information storage area.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation start flag 223a is always set to ON if a stop type command is received, but the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON if a fluctuation pattern command is received and then a stop type command is received. This makes it possible to prevent strange fluctuation performances from being executed in cases where a stop type command is received without receiving a fluctuation pattern command.

Also, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, in the fluctuation performance process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fact that the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned ON may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to execute the fluctuation performance based on this display fluctuation pattern command for the display control device 114 without waiting for the reception of the stop type command. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, and transmit it to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which a "reserved change notice" was performed on the executed and reserved symbols to inform the player whether or not there is a jackpot-winning variable performance during the variable performance of the third symbol that is reserved and executed upon the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). In contrast, the player may be notified by using the second symbol reserved lamp 84 or the third symbol display device 81, etc., whether or not there is a winning variable performance (stopped at a "○" pattern) among the variable displays of the second symbol (normal symbol) that is reserved and executed upon the ball passing through the second ball entrance 67 (start winning), together with or instead of whether or not there is a jackpot-winning variable performance during the variable performance of the third symbol. This allows the player to know whether or not there is a winning variable display among the variable displays of the reserved second symbol (normal symbol) or among the variable displays of the active and reserved second symbol (normal symbol). Therefore, it is possible to guess whether or not the second symbol will be a winning one before the variable display of the second symbol is executed. Some gaming machines enhance playability by determining whether or not a normal symbol wins, and this is particularly effective for such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the demo performance displayed a stopped third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9", but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo performance may display a stopped third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. It may also be a performance in which only the back image changes without displaying the third pattern. It may also be a performance in which a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable performance is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which performs the variable performance, is used to execute the "reserve change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice performance. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. A fourth symbol display device other than the third symbol display device 81 may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the fourth symbol may be displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, to execute a continuous notice performance (hereinafter, "reserve change notice" is included in the "continuous notice performance") that is executed across multiple variable performances, different from the "reserve change notice" or "reserve change notice". In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a role different from each movable role device 87, 88 that operates in response to various performances may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the role device may be operated in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance to execute the continuous notice performance. In addition, the continuous preview performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the continuous preview performance from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, or the continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance (dynamic display) is performed on the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the fourth pattern display device successively displays a pattern, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination units 29-33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a big win. Furthermore, while a player would normally continue playing while gazing at the third pattern display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, the continuous advance notice performance is performed by the display of a pattern by the fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29-33, so that the player can easily recognize that a performance different from the usual one has been performed. In addition, the continuous preview performance can be easily performed with simple control such as displaying a pattern by the fourth pattern display device, activating the role-playing device, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or turning on or off the illumination units 29 to 33.

In addition, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be performed by combining at least two of the following: display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role in a predetermined mode, audio output from the audio output device 226, and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and controlling them in conjunction with each other. This allows a more diverse continuous preview performance to be performed. In addition, by changing the method of performing the continuous preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected according to the game state after the continuous preview performance ends (15R special jackpot, 2R special jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, miss).

In the above embodiment, when a winning ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the reserved ball count that has been increased by "1" including each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the type of counter included in the reserved ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, information indicating the value of each counter may not be included in the reserved ball count command, but information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the reserved ball count command and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command, to which the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning are added. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending counts the notified counter values relate to. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in one of the pending information areas 1 to 4 corresponding to that pending count, based on the information on the pending count included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 indicated by the reserved ball count command are stored in the reserved information storage area 223e. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. When a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, some or all of the following may be determined based on the values of each counter indicated in the command: whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of miss in the case of a miss, etc., and these determination results may be stored in the reserved information storage area 223e instead of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the counter values. In this way, when the pre-reading process is executed, the determination results of whether or not the variable performance being executed or on hold is a jackpot, etc. are already stored in the reserved information storage area 223e, so the pre-reading process only needs to read out these determination results, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuation performance starts (strictly speaking, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), when the reserved ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the number of reserved balls at the time when the fluctuation performance starts cannot be determined, so the fluctuation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuation time in the reserved information storage area 223e. In this way, if the balls are stopped from being shot into the play area when the pre-reading process is executed, the number of reserved balls at the time when the fluctuation performance starts can be determined, so the fluctuation time can be calculated based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 together with the judgment results of whether or not there is a jackpot, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the miss type in the case of a miss, which are stored in the reserved information storage area 223e.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entry port 64, which starts the lottery for a jackpot when a ball enters the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the game board 13 may be provided with multiple (e.g., two) first ball entry ports, each of which detects an entry ball independently and starts the lottery for a jackpot. In this case, the reserved ball count command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when there is a reservation at each first ball entry port may include information indicating which first ball entry port the reservation is from. In addition, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation performance is from. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a reserved ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the reserved ball number command is set to the reserved ball number, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each first ball entrance.

In addition, when multiple first ball entry ports are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with each entry into the first ball entry port (start entry) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in association with the start entry may include information indicating which first ball entry port the counter value was acquired in association with the start entry. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the fluctuation performance is associated with the start entry into. Furthermore, in the voice lamp control device 113, a pending information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entry port. Thereby, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pending information storage area corresponding to the first ball entry port that detected the start entry that triggered the execution of the fluctuation performance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation performance for each first ball entry port can also be held in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, in cases where the probability of a jackpot, the allocation probability of jackpot types, the allocation probability of miss types, etc. differ depending on the first ball entry port that was used for the start winning, the look-ahead process can correctly determine whether or not each variable performance will be a jackpot, the jackpot type if a jackpot, and the miss type if a miss, based on which first ball entry port the start winning occurred. Also, in cases where a variable performance based on a start winning entry into one first ball entry port is performed in priority to a variable performance based on a start winning entry into another first ball entry port, the look-ahead process can be performed in order from the counter value corresponding to the variable performance based on a start winning entry into one first ball entry port.

In addition, in the case where multiple first ball entry ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning into the first ball entry port from the main control device 110 by command, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the continuous notice performance for all variable performances (reserved balls) reserved at that time, regardless of the first ball entry port where the start winning occurred. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which multiple first ball entry ports are provided and the variable performance for the winning into one first ball entry port is executed with priority over the variable performance for the winning into the other first ball entry ports, the start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the result of the pre-reading of the counter value acquired for the winning into the first ball entry port where the variable performance is executed with priority. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting for the execution of the continuous notice performance is not determined for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the first ball entry port with a low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous preview performance is started for a variable performance corresponding to winning at the first ball entry port, which has a low priority, and the variable performance is continually on hold at the first ball entry port, which has a high priority, there is a risk that the continuous preview performance will not end easily. In contrast, in this modified example, the presence or absence of a setting for the execution of a continuous preview performance is not determined for a variable performance corresponding to winning at the first ball entry port, which has a low priority, and a continuous preview performance is not started for this variable performance, thereby preventing such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 reduces the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 (see S1411 in FIG. 31), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the reserved ball number command may be set so that the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, which is subtracted in accordance with the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 22), is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the reserved ball number command may be sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls reserved in the main control device 110. The variation pattern command may also include the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command, it extracts the number of reserved balls (N) contained in the variation pattern command and sets it in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b.

In the above embodiment, the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the second ball entrance 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in the above embodiment, the variable presentation, which is the variable display of the third pattern, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving the pattern horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The variable display of the pattern is not limited to the variable presentation of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a presentation display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of actions or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variable effect, a high-speed change is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed change, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Group A: Change execution timing of "Hold Change Notice" & "Hold Change Notice" when redisplaying>

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing these suggestive displays, the display mode of an object that is always visible to the player is changed from a first mode to a second mode, or a new object is additionally made to appear, and the display mode of the object is configured to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot.

However, in conventional gaming machines, when a suggestive display is executed, the display mode of the visible displayed object is always changed or a new displayed object is additionally displayed, making it easy for the player to notice the change in the displayed object and not creating an element of surprise in the presentation. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute unexpected effects and effectively increase the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A display switching means for switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach");
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
When the change means changes from the first mode to the second mode, when the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means is redisplayed, a redisplay change means (e.g., execution symbol change process (S1414)) changes the display of the second display means to the second mode;
A gaming machine A0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. In addition, the display switching means controls the second display means to be switched between a display state and a non-display state. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode that shows the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes from the first state to the second state, the redisplay change means changes the display of the second display means to the second state when the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means is redisplayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, and the second display means can be casually changed to the second state, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first state to the second state to notify the player, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second state on the second display means, and this has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A0,
The changing means is
A change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means,
The redisplay change means includes:
A change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process (S1414)) that changes the display of the second display means to the second mode at a first display timing that redisplays the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means when it is determined by the change determination means that the display is to be changed from the first mode to the second mode;
The gaming machine A1 is characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the following effect is achieved. That is, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines that the display mode of the second display means is to be changed from the first state to the second mode, the change execution means provided in the re-display change means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing at which the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means is re-displayed. This makes it possible to unobtrusively change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode to notify the player, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to recognize that this uneasiness is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine A1,
the second display means is capable of displaying a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means;
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach");
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect including an effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means invisible by the display switching means (for example, a variable element of a "Super Reach");
and a re-display means for re-displaying the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the special effect by the special effect execution means is ended (for example, re-displaying the cockpit display area Db after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is ended),
The change execution means includes:
When the second display means is redisplayed by the post-termination redisplay means, the display on the second display means is changed to the second mode.

Gaming machine A2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A1. That is, a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Also, the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means causes the second display means to be continuously displayed in the dynamic display. Then, the special effect execution means executes a special effect including an effect in which the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is made invisible by the display switching means, and the end re-display means re-displays the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the special effect executed by the special effect execution means ends. Then, the change execution means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode when the second display means is re-displayed by the end re-display means.

Conventionally, at the start of a dynamic display, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, when a special effect is executed, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means, and after the special effect ends, the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means, and the second display means is returned to the state in which it was displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display, thereby preparing for the execution of the next dynamic display. In other words, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player, and the next dynamic display can be executed smoothly while making the player aware of the number of the next dynamic display. Therefore, the redisplay of the second display means when the special effect ends is a natural expression in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

And like the gaming machine A2, the second display means, which is continuously displayed by the continuous display means, is made invisible by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect, and the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing when the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means at the end of the special effect. By configuring in this way, in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, the display mode of the second display means can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while being redisplayed, which was made invisible. Therefore, the second display means can be casually changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, and the effect is that the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game while providing the player with a surprising performance.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
a temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, a temporary "missed display" in FIG. 33( e ));
and a re-dynamic means (e.g., a variable element of "re-variation") for executing a re-dynamic display to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means,
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that when the change determination means determines that the first state is to be changed to the second state and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second state at the first display timing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 and A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the temporary display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means, the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, in which the temporary identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information. Then, when the change determination means determines that the first mode is changed to the second mode and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the first display timing by the change execution means. That is, in a state in which the temporary identification information that is not the predetermined identification information is once displayed in the dynamic display, the second mode of the second display means is displayed, and in that state, the re-dynamic display is executed to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in conjunction with the re-display of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. Then, the dynamic display is performed again and the temporary identification information is changed to the specified identification information, which allows the player to recognize that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value, and has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine A3,
The change execution means includes:
A second timing execution means (e.g., "reserved change notice" after "reserved" is executed) for changing the second display means to the second mode at a second display timing (e.g., "after reach") different from the first display timing (e.g., "after reserved deletion");
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time for changing the second display means to the second aspect;
A re-display determination means (e.g., a process of determining re-display information (S1506)) that determines whether or not to execute the re-display by the re-display means when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode by the start time selection means;
The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a re-dynamic timing change means (e.g., S1506 of the execution pattern change processing) that changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the re-dynamic discrimination means determines that the re-dynamic display is not to be executed.

Gaming machine A4 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A3. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at a second display timing different from the first display timing by a second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. Also, the start time selection means selects the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode. Then, when the start time selection means selects the first display timing as the start time for the second mode, the re-dynamic determination means determines whether or not the re-dynamic display is to be executed by the re-dynamic means. Then, when the re-dynamic determination means determines that the re-dynamic display is not to be executed, the re-dynamic timing change means changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode, if the conditions for changing the second display means to the second mode are not met at the first display timing, the start time for changing the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing cases in which the second mode is not displayed and increasing the rate at which the second display means executes the second mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In gaming machine A3 or A4,
The change execution means includes:
a second timing execution means for displaying the second display means in the second manner at a second display timing (e.g., after "reach") different from the first display timing (e.g., after "reach"); and
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time for changing the second display means to the second aspect;
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode by the start time selection means, a special effect determination means (for example, a process of determining hold deletion information (S1507)) determines whether or not the special effect is to be executed by the special effect execution means;
The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a special timing change means for changing the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the special effect judgment means determines that the special effect will not be executed.

Gaming machine A5 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by gaming machines A3 or A4. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at a second display timing different from the first display timing by a second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. The start time selection means selects the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode. Then, when the start time selection means selects the first display timing as the start time for the second mode, the special effect execution means determines whether or not a special effect will be executed. Then, when the special effect determination means determines that a special effect will not be executed, the special timing change means changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode, if the conditions for changing the second display means to the second mode are not met at the first display timing, the start time for changing the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing cases in which the second mode is not displayed and increasing the rate at which the second display means executes the second mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The dynamic display execution means is configured to execute a predetermined specific performance (for example, a variable element of a “normal reach” or a variable element of a “pseudo consecutive win”) at a timing before the second display means can be made to be in a non-display state by the display switching means,
The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the second display timing is when the specific performance is executed.

Gaming machine A6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machines A4 and A5. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes a predetermined specific effect before the second display means is made invisible by the display switching means, and the second mode is displayed on the second display means in the specific effect executed before the second display means can be made invisible by the display switching means. Therefore, even if the second display means is not made invisible by the display switching means, the second mode can be displayed on the second display means, and the number of cases in which the second mode is not displayed can be reduced. This has the effect of increasing the rate at which the second mode is executed by the second display means, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines A2 to A6,
The dynamic display execution means executes the special effect in the latter half of the dynamic display.

Gaming machine A7 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A2 to A6. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes a special effect in the latter half of the dynamic display. This allows the player to play the game while anticipating the appearance of the display in the second mode by the second display means even in the latter half of the dynamic display. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating the appearance of the specified identification information until the latter half of the dynamic display, which has the effect of providing interest to the player for a long period of time.

In gaming machine A6 or A7,
The dynamic display execution means is configured so that, in the dynamic display, the execution timing of the specific effect arrives at a timing prior to the execution timing of the special effect.

Gaming machine A8 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines A6 and A7. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured so that the timing for executing a specific effect in a dynamic display arrives before the timing for executing a special effect. This allows the second mode to be displayed on the second display means in a specific effect that is executed before the second display means is made invisible by the special effect. Therefore, even in a dynamic display in which a special effect is not executed, the second display means can be changed to the second mode in the specific effect, thereby reducing the number of cases in which the second mode is not displayed. This has the effect of increasing the rate at which the second mode is executed by the second display means, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines A4 to A8,
The start time selection means
a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second aspect at a timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
an execution establishment determining means for determining contents of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine A9 characterized by having a timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine A9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A4 to A8. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the establishment of the start condition. Then, the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means is corrected based on the content of the dynamic display. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed in processes that are performed at different times, the consistency of the performance contents can be ensured, and adjustments can be made to prevent discrepancies from occurring between the performance contents. Therefore, by performing each determination in a separate process, it is possible to easily design the control program used for each determination during development, while also achieving a consistent performance.

In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
A special effect storage means (e.g., a reserved deletion information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
A gaming machine A10 characterized by having a re-dynamic memory means (e.g., a re-variation information storage area 223e8) that stores whether or not the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information.

Gaming machine A10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines A3 to A9. That is, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores whether or not a special effect is executed by the special effect storage means in the dynamic display of identification information executed based on the corresponding information, and similarly, in the dynamic display of identification information executed based on the corresponding information, the re-dynamic storage means stores whether or not a re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means. This makes it possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means by checking whether or not a special effect is executed and whether or not a re-variable display is executed, which are stored in each storage means. Therefore, for example, the execution mode of the dynamic display can be grasped without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, which has the effect of reducing the processing load at the start of the dynamic display.

<Group B: Changing variable factors to execute "pending change notice">

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing this suggestive display, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by lottery, and the suggestive display is made to appear based on the result of the lottery, thereby informing the player of the likelihood of a jackpot.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is decided in advance, depending on the content of the variable elements in the variable presentation, it may not be possible to execute the suggestive display at the decided start time. In such cases, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, making it impossible to diversify the presentation. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the opportunities to execute suggestive displays at the initially selected start time, diversify the presentation, and ideally increase the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements (for example, a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and a "normal reach" variable element),
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the first mode is changed to the second mode by the change means;
An execution determination means for determining whether the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507));
When it is determined by the execution determination means that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, an element change means (for example, S1553 or S1554 of the execution symbol change process) changes the dynamic element of the dynamic display to a dynamic element of the dynamic display that can display the second aspect at the start time selected by the start time selection means;
A gaming machine B0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine B0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, a dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to a second mode that indicates the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and if the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the element change means changes the dynamic element of the dynamic display to a dynamic element of the dynamic display that can display the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means. In this way, if the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected start time, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the start time. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected start time, diversifying the presentation, and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0,
A display switching means for switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach") is provided,
The changing means is
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process (S1414)) for changing the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the display mode of the second display means is to be changed to the second mode,
The start time selection means
A re-display time selection means (e.g., S1506 of the execution symbol change process) is provided for selecting a first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means,
The execution determination means is
A first display timing execution determination means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507)) for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display time selection means,
The element changing means is
a first display timing execution element change means (e.g., S1553 or S1554 of the execution pattern change process) for changing a dynamic element of the dynamic display to a dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second aspect at the first display timing when the first display timing execution determination means determines that the second aspect cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display time selection means;
The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising:

Gaming machine B1 provides the following effects in addition to those provided by gaming machine B0. That is, the display switching means controls the second display means to be switched between a displayed state and a non-displayed state. Then, a change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines that the display mode should be changed to the second mode, a change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, a re-display selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing at which the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means is re-displayed as the execution timing at which the second mode is displayed on the second display means. Here, the first display timing execution discrimination means provided in the execution discrimination means discriminates whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay time selection means, and when the first display timing execution discrimination means discriminates that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the redisplay time selection means, the first display timing execution element change means provided in the element change means changes the dynamic element of the dynamic display to a dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second mode at the first display timing. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, and makes it possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means invisible and then subtly changing it, the player is first made to feel strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the strange feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, and the effect is that the player is provided with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game. Also, if the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, the effect is that the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing are increased, and the presentation can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1,
the second display means is capable of displaying a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means;
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach");
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect including an effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means invisible by the display switching means (for example, a variable element of a "Super Reach");
and a re-display means for re-displaying the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the special effect by the special effect execution means is ended (for example, re-displaying the cockpit display area Db after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is ended),
The re-display selection means is
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is provided with a timing selection means for selecting the timing at which the second display means is re-displayed by the re-display means after the termination as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means.

Gaming machine B2 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1. That is, a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. The continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means causes the second display means to be continuously displayed in the dynamic display. The special effect execution means executes a special effect including an effect in which the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is made invisible by the display switching means, and the end re-display means re-displays the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the special effect executed by the special effect execution means is terminated. The timing selection means provided in the re-display time selection means selects the timing at which the second display means re-displays the second display means by the end re-display means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means.

Conventionally, at the start of a dynamic display, the second display means displays a pattern representing the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the continuous display means continuously displays the second display means. Then, when a special effect is executed, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means, and after the special effect ends, the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means, and the second display means is returned to the state in which it was displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display, thereby preparing for the execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player, and the next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while making the player aware of the number of the next dynamic display. Therefore, the redisplay of the second display means when the special effect ends is a natural expression in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, so the player does not feel strange.

And like gaming machine B2, the second display means, which is continuously displayed by the continuous display means, is made invisible by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect, and the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing when the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means at the end of the special effect. By configuring in this way, in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, the display mode of the second display means can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while being redisplayed from the invisible state. Therefore, the second display means can be casually changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, and the effect is that the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game while providing the player with a surprising performance.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The element changing means is
A special effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special effect in the dynamic display (for example, a process for determining hold deletion information (S1507));
and a performance change means for executing the special performance in the dynamic display when it is determined by the special performance determination means that the special performance is not to be executed (for example, a process for changing a variable element of a "pseudo performance" to a variable element of a "super reach" or a variable element of a "special reach" (S1553, S1554)).
The change execution means includes:
The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, after the special effect changed by the effect changing means ends, the second display means is changed to the second mode.

Gaming machine B3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B1 and B2. That is, a special effect discrimination means provided in the element change means discriminates whether or not a special effect is executed in the dynamic display. Also, a special effect is executed in the dynamic display by a effect change means also provided in the element change means when the special effect discrimination means discriminates that a special effect is not executed. Then, the change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode after the special effect changed by the effect change means ends. This makes it possible to display the second mode at the first display timing that was initially selected. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing that was initially selected, diversifying the effects, and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B3,
The presentation change means includes:
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element determination means (e.g., a process for confirming pseudo performance information (S1551)) is provided for determining whether or not there is a change target dynamic element (e.g., a variable element of a "pseudo performance") that can be changed to the special performance,
When the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element to be changed, the dynamic element to be changed is changed to the special effect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the presence or absence of a change target dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means provided in the effect change means. Then, when it is determined by the dynamic element determination means that there is a change target dynamic element, the change target dynamic element is changed to a special effect. As a result, when there is a change target dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect, it is possible to change to a special effect that erases the second display means, and erase the second display means. Therefore, by adding a special effect that erases the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, it is possible to display the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected. Therefore, there is an effect that, without performing a process such as reselecting the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected can be increased, and the effects can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B4,
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the special effects and the dynamic elements to be changed are configured to have the same execution time.

Gaming machine B5 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine B4. That is, the special effect and the dynamic element to be changed are configured with the same execution time. This allows the dynamic element of the dynamic display to be changed without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by adding a special effect that erases the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, it becomes possible to display the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected without performing a process such as reselecting the dynamic element of the dynamic display, thereby diversifying the effects and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B4 or B5,
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine B6 characterized in that when the first display timing is selected by the re-display selection means, when the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special performance, the second mode is not displayed on the second display means.

Gaming machine B6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B4 and B5. That is, when the first display timing is selected by the re-display selection means, the change execution means is configured not to display the second mode on the second display means when the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no changeable dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect. This has the effect of providing the player with a consistent effect without any inconsistencies in the content of the effect by configuring not to display the second mode when there is no changeable dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect in the dynamic display, that is, when there is no effect appropriate for the execution timing of the second mode.

In gaming machine B4 or B5,
The start time selection means
A second timing selection means (e.g., "after reach") that selects a second display timing different from the first display timing as an execution timing for starting the display of the second mode (e.g., "after reach""hold change notice");
A gaming machine B7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a timing change means for changing the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode and the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no changeable dynamic element that can be changed to the special effect.

Gaming machine B7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B4 or B5. That is, the second display timing different from the first display timing is selected as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode by the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means. Also, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode, if the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no change target dynamic element that can be changed to a special effect, the timing change means changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the conditions for displaying the second mode on the second display means are not met at the initially selected first display timing, the start time of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing the cases where the second mode is not displayed, increasing the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means, and improving the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B2 to B7,
The special effect is a dynamic element (e.g., a variable element of "Super Reach") that may cause the predetermined identification information to be displayed.

Gaming machine B8 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B2 to B7. That is, the special effect is configured as a dynamic element that may display predetermined identification information, i.e., an effect that suggests whether or not a predetermined gaming value will be awarded to the player. This has the effect of, for example, increasing the opportunities for special effects to be executed in dynamic display by the effect changing means, allowing the player to experience more effects indicating whether or not a predetermined gaming value will be awarded, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B2 to B8,
The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the change target dynamic element is a dynamic element (for example, a variable element of "pseudo consecutive wins") that is unlikely to display the specified identification information.

Gaming machine B9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines B2 to B8. That is, the dynamic element to be changed is configured as a dynamic element that is unlikely to display predetermined identification information, i.e., an effect that cannot confer a predetermined gaming value to the player. This has the effect that, for example, by changing the dynamic element to be changed to a special effect using the effect change means, a dynamic element that cannot confer a predetermined gaming value can be changed to a dynamic element that can confer a predetermined gaming value, allowing the player to experience many effects in which the predetermined gaming value will or will not be conferred, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
a temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, a temporary "missed display" in FIG. 33( e ));
and a re-dynamic means (e.g., a variable element of "re-variation") for executing a re-dynamic display to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means,
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine B10 characterized in that when the change determination means determines that the display is to be changed from the first state to the second state and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second state at the first display timing.

The gaming machine B10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machines B1 to B9. That is, the temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the temporary display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means, the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means, in which the temporary identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information. Then, when the change determination means determines that the first mode is changed to the second mode and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the first display timing by the change execution means. That is, in a state in which the temporary identification information that is not the predetermined identification information is once displayed in the dynamic display, the second mode of the second display means is displayed, and in that state, the re-dynamic display is executed to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in conjunction with the re-display of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. Then, the dynamic display is performed again and the temporary identification information is changed to the specified identification information, which allows the player to recognize that the source of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value, and has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10,
The start time selection means
a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second aspect at a timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
an execution establishment determining means for determining contents of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine B11 characterized by having a timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine B11 provides the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 to B10. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the establishment of the start condition. Then, the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means is corrected based on the content of the dynamic display. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed in processes that are performed at different times, the contents of the performance can be adjusted to be consistent so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the performance. Therefore, by performing each determination in a separate process, it is possible to easily design the control program used for each determination during development, while also enabling the execution of a consistent performance.

In gaming machine B10 or B11,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
A special effect storage means (e.g., a reserved deletion information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
A gaming machine B12 characterized by having a re-dynamic memory means (e.g., a re-variation information storage area 223e8) that stores whether or not the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information.

Gaming machine B12 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B10 or B11. That is, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores whether or not a special effect is executed by the special effect storage means in the dynamic display of identification information executed based on the corresponding information, and the re-dynamic storage means stores whether or not a re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means in the dynamic display of identification information executed based on the corresponding information. This makes it possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means by checking whether or not a special effect is executed and whether or not a re-variable display is executed, which are stored in each storage means. Therefore, for example, the execution mode of the dynamic display can be grasped without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, which has the effect of reducing the processing load at the start of the dynamic display.

In any one of gaming machines B4 to B12,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it is equipped with a change target memory means (e.g., a pseudo performance information storage area 223e9) that stores whether or not the change target dynamic element is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information.

Gaming machine B13 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B4 to B12. That is, in the storage means, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the change mode storage means stores whether or not the dynamic element to be changed is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information. This makes it possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic element to be changed that may be changed to a special effect by checking whether or not the dynamic element to be changed stored in each storage means is executed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the dynamic display without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, which has the effect of reducing the processing load at the start of the dynamic display.

<Group C: Activating movable parts to execute "hold change notice">

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing this suggestive display, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by lottery, and the suggestive display is made to appear based on the result of the lottery, thereby informing the player of the likelihood of a jackpot.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is decided in advance, depending on the content of the variable elements in the variable presentation, it may not be possible to execute the suggestive display at the decided start time. In such cases, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, making it impossible to diversify the presentation. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the opportunities to execute suggestive displays at the initially selected start time, diversify the presentation, and ideally increase the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A movable part (e.g., a left movable part 87) that is driven in conjunction with the performance content of the dynamic display during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means;
A role drive means (for example, a role drive process (S1151)) for driving the movable role,
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the first mode is changed to the second mode by the change means;
An execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507));
When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, a drive change means (for example, a process (S1564) for setting a super strong flag 223j) drives the movable role object by the role object drive means;
A drive-linked display means for displaying the second mode by the second display means in accordance with the drive of the movable role object driven by the drive change means;
A gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. During the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the movable role is driven in conjunction with the performance content of the dynamic display. Then, the movable role is driven by the role drive means. Also, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to a second mode that shows the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes from the first mode to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the drive change means drives the movable role by the role drive means. Then, the drive linkage display means displays the second mode by the second display means in association with the drive of the movable role driven by the drive change means. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected start time, the movable role can be driven and the second mode can be displayed in association with the drive. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected start time can be increased, and the presentation can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C0,
A display switching means for controlling switching between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach") is provided,
The changing means is
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process (S1414)) for changing the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the first mode should be changed to the second mode,
The accessory driving means is
Controlling the movable part so as to be driven to a position where the second display means is difficult to see;
The start time selection means
a re-visualization time selection means for selecting a first display timing at which the second display means, which has been put into a difficult-to-visualize state by the display switching means, changes from a difficult-to-visualize state to a visible state, as an execution timing for starting the second mode in the second display means (for example, a “pending change notice” after “strong pattern driving”);
The execution determination means is
A first display timing execution determination means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507)) that determines whether the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means,
The drive-linked display means is
a first display timing drive change means (for example, a process for setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) for driving the movable reel by the reel drive means to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see when the first display timing execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C0, the following effect is achieved. That is, the display switching means controls switching between the visible state and the difficult-to-see state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the judgment result by the judgment means. Also, when the change determination means determines that the display mode is to be changed from the first mode to the second mode, the change execution means provided in the change means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Here, the movable role drive means controls so that the movable role is driven to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. Then, the re-visibility selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing at which the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the display switching means, becomes visible as the execution timing for starting the second mode in the second display means. Here, the first display timing execution discrimination means provided in the execution discrimination means discriminates whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, and when the first display timing execution discrimination means discriminates that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the first display timing drive change means provided in the drive interlocking display means drives the movable role by the role drive means to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. This makes it possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means invisible and then subtly changing it when the second display means becomes visible again, the player is first made to feel strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the strange feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, and the effect is that the player is provided with an unexpected performance while diversifying the performance and increasing the interest of the game. Also, if the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, the movable role can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, the effect is that the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing are increased, and the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when making the second display means difficult to see for the player, it is possible to make the second display means difficult to see by changing the drive mode of the movable role object that is different from the dynamic display performance, rather than changing the content of the dynamic display performance. Therefore, since it is possible to make the second display means difficult to see and then change to the second mode without sending additional commands or the like for controlling the dynamic display and replacing the content of the performance, it has the effect of providing the player with a surprising performance and diversifying the performance to increase the interest of the game, without increasing the control burden of the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine C1,
The accessory driving means is
The initial position of the movable part;
In the dynamic display, a first position (e.g., a "strong pattern") in which the movable character makes the second display means difficult to see;
The movable part can be driven from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again;
The change execution means includes:
With the movable part in the first position, the second display means starts the second mode,
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, when the movable device is returned to its initial position, the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means.

Gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C1. That is, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable reel from the initial position to the first position by the reel driving means, and the second display means starts displaying the second mode when the movable reel is in the first position by the change execution means, and the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means when the movable reel has returned to the initial position.

Conventionally, when a movable part is driven during execution of a dynamic display, it is configured to be driven from the initial position to a drive position, and then driven back to the initial position to complete one drive mode. In other words, when a movable part is driven, it is configured to always return to its initial position so as not to interfere with the content of other effects in the dynamic display. Therefore, when a movable part is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression of the flow of the drive mode of the movable part, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

And, as in gaming machine C2, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable role from the initial position to the first position, and the second mode is displayed by the second display means while the movable role is in the first position. After that, the movable role is driven from the first position to the initial position, and the second mode is continuously displayed by the second display means, so that the player can see the second mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode of the second display means while making it visible in the smooth flow of the driving mode of the movable role. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then casually changing it, first, a sense of incongruity is given to the player. Then, after that, the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode by the second display means, and there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with a surprising performance and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, a position determination means for determining whether the movable role object is in the first position (for example, a process for determining whether to drive in a "strong pattern" (S1561)) is provided;
The drive change means is
When the position determination means determines that the movable role object is not in the first position, a drive position change means (for example, a process for setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) is provided for driving the movable role object to the first position in the dynamic display.
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the drive position of the movable reel is changed to the first position by the drive position change means, and while the movable reel is in the first position by the reel drive means, the second display means starts displaying the second mode.

Gaming machine C3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the position discrimination means provided in the execution discrimination means discriminates whether or not the movable role is in the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means drives the movable role to the first position in the dynamic display when the position discrimination means determines that the movable role is not in the first position. Then, the change execution means starts displaying the second mode in the second display means while the movable role is in the first position. This makes it possible to display the second mode at the first display timing initially selected. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected, diversifying the presentation, and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C3,
The drive position changing means is
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element discrimination means for discriminating the presence or absence of a dynamic element (e.g., a variable element of a "Super Reach") capable of driving the movable part (e.g., a process for confirming the presence or absence of a variable element of "Super Reach" or more (S1563)),
A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that when the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable device, the movable device is driven to the first position while the dynamic element is being executed.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving a movable part in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means provided in the drive position change means. Then, when the dynamic element determination means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable part, the movable part is driven to the first position during the execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable part, the drive mode of the second display means is changed to one that makes it difficult to see, and the second display means can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining the consistency between the performance content of the dynamic display and the drive mode of the movable part, it is possible to display the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected. Therefore, there is an effect that, without performing a process such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected can be increased, and the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C4,
The accessory driving means is
A predetermined time is required to drive the movable part from the initial position to the first position and then back to the initial position;
The dynamic element determination means
A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, in the dynamic display, it is determined whether or not the dynamic element exists for a period of time longer than the predetermined period of time.

Gaming machine C5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C4. That is, the movable part is driven from the initial position to the first position by the part driving means, and it takes a predetermined time to drive it back to the initial position. Then, the dynamic element discrimination means discriminates whether or not there is a dynamic element in the dynamic display that lasts for a predetermined time or more. As a result, in the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the movable part can be driven by a dynamic element that can complete the drive of the movable part that requires a predetermined time, so that the drive of the movable part can be completed by the dynamic element, and a combined performance of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the drive of the movable part can be implemented with consistent content. This has the effect of providing a performance that is easy for the player to understand, and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C4 or C5,
The change execution means includes:
Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that when the first display timing is selected by the re-display selection means, when the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no dynamic element in the dynamic display that can drive the movable role, the second mode is not displayed on the second display means.

Gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines C4 and C5. That is, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode by the re-viewing execution means, if the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable role object, the second display means is configured not to display the second mode. This has the effect of providing the player with a consistent performance without any inconsistencies in the performance content by configuring not to display the second mode when there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable role object in the dynamic display, that is, when there is no performance appropriate for the execution timing of the second mode.

In gaming machine C4 or C5,
The start time selection means
A second timing selection means (e.g., "after reach") that selects a second display timing different from the first display timing as an execution timing for starting the display of the second mode (e.g., "after reach""hold change notice");
gaming machine C7, characterized in that it is equipped with a timing change means for changing the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode and the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable device.

Gaming machine C7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, the second display timing different from the first display timing is selected as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode by the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means. Also, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode, when the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable role object, the timing change means changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display. As a result, when the conditions for displaying the second mode on the second display means at the initially selected first display timing are not met, the start time of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed, thereby reducing the cases in which the second mode is not displayed, increasing the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means, and improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7,
The start time selection means
a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second aspect at a timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
an execution establishment determining means for determining contents of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine C8 characterized by having a timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine C8 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the establishment of the start condition. Then, the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means is corrected based on the content of the dynamic display. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed in processes that are performed at different times, the contents of the performance can be adjusted to be consistent so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the performance. Therefore, by performing each determination in a separate process, it is possible to easily design the control program used for each determination during development, while also enabling the execution of a consistent performance.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a drive information memory means (e.g., drive pattern information storage area 223e10) that stores drive information of the movable reel by the reel drive means in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information.

Gaming machine C9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C8. That is, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores drive information for the movable role by the role drive means in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the corresponding information. This makes it possible to easily determine the drive state of the movable role by checking the drive information stored in each storage means. Therefore, for example, it is possible to grasp the drive state of the movable role without determining the drive state of the movable role in detail at the start of the dynamic display, which has the effect of reducing the processing load at the start of the dynamic display.

<Group D: Add effects to execute "Hold Change Notice">

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing this suggestive display, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by lottery, and the suggestive display is made to appear based on the result of the lottery, thereby informing the player of the likelihood of a jackpot.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is decided in advance, depending on the content of the variable elements in the variable presentation, it may not be possible to execute the suggestive display at the decided start time. In such cases, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, making it impossible to diversify the presentation. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the opportunities to execute suggestive displays at the initially selected start time, diversify the presentation, and ideally increase the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
and an image display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) for displaying a specific image (e.g., a large character cut-in image Dc2) in conjunction with the performance content of the dynamic display during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means.
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the change means changes to the second mode;
An image selection means (e.g., the drive selection counter 223g of the third embodiment (described in paragraph 0948)) for selecting whether or not to display the specific image in the dynamic display;
an image display means (e.g., a large character cut-in command for display) for displaying the specific image so as to overlap with the second display means when the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means;
An execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507));
an image changing means for causing the image display means to display the specific image when it is determined by the execution determining means that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selecting means (for example, a pattern in which a large character cut-in image Dc2 is added and displayed);
a display linking means for displaying the second aspect on the second display means in association with the appearance of the specific image by the image changing means;
A gaming machine D0 comprising:

According to the gaming machine D0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. During the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, a specific image is displayed by the image display means in conjunction with the performance content of the dynamic display. Also, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for the judgment by the judgment means. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to a second mode that shows the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes from the first mode to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Also, the image lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to make a specific image appear in the dynamic display, and when the specific image is made to appear based on the lottery of the image lottery means, the image appearing means makes the specific image appear so as to overlap (cover, conceal, superimpose, conceal, shield) with the second display means. Also, the execution determination means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the image change means makes the specific image appear by the image appearing means. Then, the appearance interlocking display means displays the second mode on the second display means in association with the appearance of the specific image by the image change means. Thereby, when the second mode cannot be made to appear at the initially selected start time, the specific image can be made to appear, and the second mode can be displayed in association with the appearance of the specific image. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the start time that was initially set, diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
A visibility switching means for controlling switching between a visible state and a difficult-to-visible state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach") is provided,
The changing means is
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process (S1414)) for changing the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the second mode should be changed to the second mode,
The start time selection means
a re-visualization time selection means for selecting a first display timing at which the second display means, which has been put into a difficult-to-see state by the visibility switching means, changes from a difficult-to-see state to a visible state as a timing for starting the second mode in the second display means (for example, a display post-clearance change command for executing a "hold change notice" after "hold clearing");
The execution determination means is
A first display timing execution determination means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507)) that determines whether the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means,
The appearance interlocking display means includes:
The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first display timing image change means for causing the image display means to display the specific image (for example, a pattern of displaying by adding a large character cut-in image Dc2) when the first display timing execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the visibility switching means controls switching between a visible state and a difficult-to-see state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the judgment result by the judgment means. Also, when the change determination means determines that the display mode should be changed from the first mode to the second mode, the change execution means provided in the change means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Also, the re-visualization selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing at which the second display means, which has been made difficult to see by the visibility switching means, becomes visible as the execution timing at which the second mode is started in the second display means. Here, the first display timing execution discrimination means provided in the execution discrimination means discriminates whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, and when the first display timing execution discrimination means discriminates that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the first display timing image change means provided in the appearance interlocking display means causes the image presenting means to present a specific image. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, and makes it possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode, compared to when the always-visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means difficult to see, and then subtly changing it when it becomes visible again, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to recognize that the uneasy feeling is the emergence of the second mode of the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when making the second display means difficult to see for the player, the second display means can be made difficult to see by changing the presence or absence of a specific image that can be displayed in addition to the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, rather than changing the dynamic elements of the dynamic display. Thus, without adjusting and changing the dynamic elements of the dynamic display or controlling other movable gadgets, etc., the second display means can be made difficult to see by making slight changes to the presentation of the dynamic display, and the second mode can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation and diversify the presentation to increase the interest of the game without significantly increasing the control burden related to the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine D1,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, an image discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the specific image appears (for example, a process for discriminating whether or not a large character cut-in image Dc2 appears),
The image modification means includes:
an image adding means for making the specific image appear in the dynamic display when it is determined by the image determining means that the specific image does not appear (for example, a process for additionally displaying a large character cut-in image Dc2);
The change execution means includes:
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the specific image is made to appear by the image adding means, and when the specific image is erased, the second display means displays the re-displayed image in the second mode.

Gaming machine D2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D1. That is, the image discrimination means provided in the execution discrimination means discriminates whether or not a specific image appears in the dynamic display, and the image addition means provided in the image change means makes the specific image appear in the dynamic display when the image discrimination means determines that the specific image does not appear. Then, the change execution means causes the image addition means to make the specific image appear, and when the specific image is erased, the redisplayed second display means is displayed in the second mode. This makes it possible to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing, diversifying the presentation, and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements,
The image display means includes:
A gaming machine D3 characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

Gaming machine D3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines D1 or D2. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements. The image display means then displays the specific image in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements. This allows any of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display to complete the presentation of the specific image, and allows a composite presentation of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display and the specific image to be implemented with consistent content. This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by setting the display time of the specific image to be shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, there is no need for processing to determine whether or not the dynamic element can display the specific image, compared to, for example, the case where the second display means is covered by driving a movable part that requires a certain drive time. Therefore, when executing the second mode after making the second display means difficult to see with the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control to determine the display timing of the specific image, which has the effect of reducing the control burden while providing the player with a surprising presentation and diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The start time selection means
a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at a timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
an execution establishment determining means for determining contents of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine D4 characterized by having a timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine D4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the establishment of the start condition. Then, the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means is corrected based on the content of the dynamic display. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed in processes that are performed at different times, the contents of the performance can be adjusted to be consistent so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the performance. Therefore, by performing each determination in a separate process, it is possible to easily design the control program used for each determination during development, while also enabling the execution of a consistent performance.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
A winning/losing information storage means (e.g., a first winning random number counter storage area 223e1) for storing winning/losing information on whether or not the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
A type information storage means (e.g., a first winning type counter storage area 223e2) for storing type information for determining a type of the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a dynamic information storage means (for example, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 or a fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4) for storing dynamic information regarding the execution mode of the dynamic display;
A second mode storage means (e.g., a hold change information storage area 223e5) for storing information on the display mode of the second mode in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
a timing storage means (e.g., a scenario data storage area 223e6) for storing the execution timing in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the storage means stores only the win/lose information storage means, the type information storage means, the dynamic information storage means, the second mode storage means and the timing storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, only the following information is stored in the storage means for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means. First, the winning/losing information storage means stores winning/losing information indicating whether or not a predetermined identification information appears. Furthermore, the type information storage means stores type information that determines the type of the predetermined identification information. Furthermore, the dynamic information storage means stores execution information for dynamic display. Furthermore, the second mode storage means stores the second mode to be displayed on the second display means. Furthermore, the timing storage means determines the execution timing of the second mode. Then, only the winning/losing information storage means, type information storage means, dynamic information storage means, second mode storage means, and timing storage means are stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the entire storage means can be reduced without storing unnecessary information in the storage means.

<Group E: The value of the "pending change notice" increases by one level depending on the execution timing>

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. This suggestive display is prepared in multiple display modes, and is configured to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot for each display mode by selecting a display mode that is unlikely to be selected in the event of a loss when a jackpot is won.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the suggestive display of a display mode that is likely to be selected when a loss occurs is configured to be difficult to select when a jackpot is won, and when the suggestive display of a display mode that is likely to be selected when a loss occurs is displayed, the player's expectations for a jackpot are diminished based on the suggestive display, and the player loses interest in the game. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can implement effects that maintain the expectation of a big win, thereby ideally increasing the enjoyment of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223 d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the first mode is changed to the second mode by the change means,
the display mode of the second display means indicates the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information in stages (for example, "white", "blue", "red" or "rainbow") based on the type of the predetermined identification information;
The start time selection means
a single-step change means for displaying the predetermined identifying information in a single-step change mode in which the expectation of the predetermined identifying information is different by one step when the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means in the case of making the predetermined identifying information appear (for example, a change from "white" to "blue" in a "hold change notice" after "hold deletion");
A gaming machine E0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode that indicates the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes the display mode of the second display means, the start time selection means selects the time to change the display mode of the second display means. Here, the display mode of the second display means indicates the expectation of the predetermined identification information appearing in stages based on its type. When the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means in the case where the predetermined identification information is to be made to appear, the single-step change means provided in the start time selection means displays the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information in a single-step change mode that differs by one step. As a result, when the predetermined identification information appears, the degree of change of the second display means is displayed in a single-step change mode that differs by one step, so that since the degree of change of the second display means is slight, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the degree of change. When the predetermined identification information appears, the second display means is casually changed, so that the player first feels uneasy, and then the player is made to recognize that the uneasy feeling is the appearance of the single-step change mode in the second display means, and since the predetermined identification information appears even in the single-step change mode, the player can play the game while expecting the appearance of the predetermined identification information in the subsequent game, even in the single-step change mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a performance that can maintain the expectation of a big win can be executed, and the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0,
A display switching means for controlling switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach") is provided,
The changing means is
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process) for changing the second display means to the second mode at an execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the first mode should be changed to the second mode,
The start time selection means
A re-display time selection means (e.g., S1506 of the execution symbol change process) is provided for selecting a first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means,
The single-step change means is
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that, when the second display means is changed to the second state by the re-display selection means, the gaming machine E1 is provided with a re-display single-stage change means for re-displaying the second display means in the single-stage change state from the display state displayed before the second display means was made non-displayable (for example, a change from "white" to "blue" in the "reserve change notice" after "reserve is cleared").

According to the gaming machine E1, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. Also, when the change determination means determines that the display mode of the second display means is changed, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. Also, when the re-display time selection means changes the second display means to the second mode, the re-display time single-step change means provided in the single-step change means re-displays the second display means in a single-step change mode from the display mode that was displayed before the second display means was made non-displayable. This makes it possible to change the second display means unobtrusively while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first state to the second state to notify the player, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. Also, by displaying the degree of change in the second display means in a single-step change state that is one step different from the display state before it was erased, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the degree of change, since the degree of change in the second display means is slight. Therefore, by making the second display means invisible once and then unobtrusively changing it, the player is first made to feel strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the strange feeling is the appearance of a single-step change state in the second display means, and this has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E1,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
a temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, a temporary "missed display" in FIG. 33( e ));
and a re-dynamic means (e.g., a variable element of "re-variation") for executing a re-dynamic display to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means,
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode at the first display timing.

Gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E1. That is, temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the temporary display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, re-dynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a re-dynamic display in which the temporary identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means. Then, when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to a single-step change mode at the first display timing by the change execution means. That is, in a state in which temporary identification information that is not the predetermined identification information is temporarily displayed in the dynamic display, the single-step change mode of the second display means is displayed, and in that state, re-dynamic display is executed to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the judgment result of the judgment means, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information is shown in stages based on the type of the display mode. Therefore, for example, when the display mode of the second display means is changed, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information is set to be higher in a multi-stage mode where the expectation level differs by multiple stages from the display before the change than in a single-stage change mode where the expectation level differs by one stage from the display before the change. In other words, the display mode of the second display means is set so that the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected when a multi-stage change mode appears, but the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected when a single-stage change mode appears, and identification information other than the predetermined identification information (i.e., a miss) is often displayed. Therefore, even if the display mode of the second display means changes, for example, when a single-step change mode appears, the player cannot expect the appearance of the specified identification information from the single-step change mode as opposed to the multiple-step change mode, and therefore the player judges that the appearance of the specified identification information cannot be expected from the dynamic display in which the single-step change mode appears, and is unable to find interest in the dynamic display corresponding to the single-step change mode, and is instead turned off by it.

Therefore, in a dynamic display that reveals the specified identification information, by making the second display means invisible and then making the second display means reveal a single-step change mode at the timing when the second display means is redisplayed, it is possible to expect the specified identification information to appear depending on the timing of the appearance of the single-step change mode, even in a single-step change mode in which the appearance of the specified identification information could not previously be expected. As a result, the significance of the single-step change mode, which was previously uninteresting, is enhanced, and the appearance of the specified identification information can be expected in any presentation pattern, resulting in the effect of increasing the interest of the game through a variety of presentations.

In the gaming machine E2,
The single-stage change mode is a mode in which the expectation level of the predetermined identification information increases by one stage.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the single-step change mode is displayed in a mode in which the expectation level of the specified identification information is increased by one step. As a result, by making the second display means appear with the single-step change mode in which the expectation level of the specified identification information is increased by one step at the timing when the second display means is erased and the second display means is redisplayed again, even in the single-step change mode in which the expectation level of the specified identification information is increased by one step, in which the appearance of the specified identification information could not be expected in the past, it is possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information depending on the timing at which the single-step change mode appears. As a result, the significance of the single-step change mode in which the expectation level of the specified identification information is increased by one step, which was not interesting in the past, can be enhanced, and the appearance of the specified identification information can be expected in any presentation pattern, and the interest of the game can be increased by the diverse presentation.

In gaming machine E2 or E3,
the single-step change means executes the single-step change mode when the second display means is in an initial mode with the lowest expectation before the second display means is put into a non-display state;
The single-stage change mode is a first increasing mode which is one stage higher than the initial mode.

Gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines E2 and E3. That is, the single-step change means executes a single-step change mode when the initial mode, which has the lowest expectancy, is displayed before the second display means is switched to the non-display state, and a first increase mode, which is one step higher than the initial mode, is displayed as the single-step change mode.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, the first rising mode, which is one step higher than the initial mode in which the expected degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is the lowest, is configured to be easily selected when identification information other than the predetermined identification information appears, and is difficult to select when the predetermined identification information appears. For this reason, players judge that the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected for a dynamic display in which the first rising mode appears, and find the dynamic display corresponding to the first rising mode uninteresting, and are instead turned off by it.

In this case, in a dynamic display that reveals the specified identification information, the second display means is made to be in a non-display state, and at the timing when the second display means is made to be redisplayed, a single-step change mode is made to appear by the second display means, and this single-step change mode also reveals a first rising mode that is one step higher than the initial mode in which the expected appearance of the specified identification information is the lowest. This makes it possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information, depending on the timing at which the first rising mode appears, even in the first rising mode in which the appearance of the specified identification information was not previously expected. As a result, the significance of the first rising mode, which was previously uninteresting, is enhanced, and the appearance of the specified identification information can be expected in any presentation pattern, resulting in an effect of increasing the interest of the game through a variety of presentations.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4,
The second display means is capable of displaying a pattern corresponding to the information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the single-stage change means is equipped with a standby execution means for making the single-stage change pattern appear in a pattern corresponding to the information for which execution of the dynamic display is awaited before execution by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine E5 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means, a pattern corresponding to that information can be displayed by the second display means. Then, a standby execution means provided in the single-stage change means causes a single-stage change pattern to appear in the pattern corresponding to the information that is pending execution by the dynamic display execution means and for which dynamic display execution is pending.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific identification information will appear in the dynamic display being executed, so the player plays the game while paying attention to how the symbols that can suggest the display result of the dynamic display being executed (for example, the third symbol or the execution symbol) change. For this reason, if a display object related to the dynamic display is changed while the dynamic display is being executed, the change may be noticed by the player, no matter how the change is made. Therefore, even if it is desired to casually change the display mode of the second display means based on the judgment result for the dynamic display being executed, there is a risk that the change will be noticed by the player.

Therefore, instead of changing the display mode of the second display means capable of suggesting the display result of the dynamic display currently being executed, a single-step change mode is presented in the second display means showing the dynamic display on standby before the dynamic display is executed. Players do not pay as much attention to the change in the second display means showing the dynamic display on standby as to the symbols capable of suggesting the display result of the dynamic display currently being executed, and it is difficult for them to notice the change. Therefore, when the display mode of the symbols corresponding to the second display means showing the dynamic display on standby is changed, the player is slow to notice the change, and the single-step change mode for the second display means can give the player a sense of incongruity. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation and increase the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected presentation.

In the gaming machine E5,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach");
a special effect execution means for executing a special effect including an effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means invisible by the display switching means (for example, a variable element of a "Super Reach");
and a re-display means for re-displaying the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the special effect by the special effect execution means is ended (for example, re-displaying the cockpit display area Db after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is ended),
The single-step change means is
A gaming machine E6, characterized in that when the second display means is redisplayed by the post-termination redisplay means, the display on the second display means is changed to the single-step change mode.

Gaming machine E6 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine E5. That is, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the special effect execution means executes a special effect including an effect in which the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is made invisible by the display switching means, and the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means after the special effect by the special effect execution means is terminated by the end redisplay means also provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the single-step change means changes the display of the second display means to a single-step change mode when the second display means is redisplayed by the end redisplay means.

Conventionally, at the start of a dynamic display, the second display means displays a pattern representing the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the continuous display means continuously displays the second display means. Then, the second display means is made invisible when a special effect is executed, and the second display means is redisplayed after the special effect ends, and the second display means is returned to the state in which it was displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display, thereby preparing for the execution of the next dynamic display. In other words, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player, and the next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while the player is made aware of the number of the next dynamic display. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the second display means becomes visible again, which is a natural expression in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

And, like the gaming machine E6, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means is made invisible by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect in the dynamic display, and the display of the second display means is changed to a single-step change mode at the timing when the display switching means redisplays the second display means at the end of the special effect. By configuring in this way, in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, the display mode of the second display means made invisible can be changed while making it visible again. In addition, since the content of the change is also a one-step change, the change is slight and therefore difficult for the player to recognize. Furthermore, by making the single-step change mode appear in the second display means showing the waiting dynamic display that the player does not pay attention to, it is possible to make the change difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, the second display means can be casually changed to a single-step change mode while making the change of the second display means difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, by temporarily making the second display means invisible and then subtly changing it, the player first feels uneasy, and then the player realizes that the uneasy feeling is the manifestation of a single-stage change in the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E6,
The storage means includes:
For each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means,
a display information storage means for storing displayed information indicating that the single-stage change mode has been displayed when the single-stage change mode is displayed on the second display means by the standby execution means in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information,
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the single-stage change means is provided with a display maintenance means which, when the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means and the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means, maintains the display mode displayed on the second display means before the special effect is executed.

Gaming machine E7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E6. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means stores displayed information indicating that the single-stage change mode has been displayed when the standby execution means displays the single-stage change mode on the second display means. Also, when the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means, if a special effect has already been executed by the special effect execution means, the display maintenance means provided in the single-stage change means maintains the display mode displayed on the second display means before the special effect was executed. This has the effect of preventing the single-stage change mode from being executed redundantly on the second display means, and maintaining the consistency of the effects.

<Group F: Change reach pattern to "weak pattern">

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

In this variable presentation, when a jackpot is suggested, either of the suggestive presentations (first suggestive presentation or second suggestive presentation) with different expectations for the jackpot to appear can be executed. Therefore, for example, the second suggestive presentation, which is different from the first suggestive presentation, is configured to be easier to select than the first suggestive presentation when a jackpot is hit, and the second suggestive presentation is configured to have a higher expectation of the jackpot appearing. In other words, the player is configured to expect the jackpot to appear when the second suggestive presentation is executed, and to be less likely to expect the jackpot to appear when the first suggestive presentation is executed.

In such gaming machines, when the first suggestion effect is executed in the variable performance, the first suggestion effect is less likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot than the second suggestion effect, and more likely to be selected in the event of a miss. As a result, players judge that they cannot expect a jackpot to appear for the variable performance in which the first suggestion effect appears, and are unable to find interest in the variable performance in which the first suggestion effect is executed, and are instead turned off by it. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the expectation of a big win regardless of the presentation, and can effectively increase the enjoyment of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing, in the dynamic display, a first suggestion performance (e.g., a "weak pattern" of a variable element of a "Super Reach") suggesting the appearance of the predetermined identification information, and a second suggestion performance (e.g., a "strong pattern" of a variable element of a "Super Reach") having a higher expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information than the first suggestion performance;
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing a display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating a determination result by the determination means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223 d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the change means changes to the second mode,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
a first suggestion execution means (e.g., a display reach pattern change command) for executing the first suggestion performance by the suggestion performance execution means before displaying the second mode when displaying the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means in the case of making the predetermined identification information appear;
A gaming machine F0 comprising:

According to the gaming machine F0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, a dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. In the dynamic display, a first suggestion effect suggesting the appearance of the predetermined identification information and a second suggestion effect having a higher expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information than the first suggestion effect are configured to be executable by the suggestion effect execution means. In addition, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the judgment result by the judgment means. In addition, when the change means changes to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Then, when the first suggestion execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means causes the second mode to appear, when the second mode is displayed on the second display means at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the suggestion execution execution means executes the first suggestion performance before the second mode is displayed. As a result, the first suggestion performance is executed before the second mode is displayed, and then the second display means changes to the display of the second mode, and the specified identification information appears. As a result, even in the first suggestion performance in which the appearance of the specified identification information could not be expected from the second suggestion performance in the past, it is possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information by the appearance of the second mode thereafter. On the other hand, when the second suggestion performance, which is not the first suggestion performance, appears, it is possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information based on the expected appearance of the specified identification information by the second suggestion performance, which has a higher expected appearance of the specified identification information than the first suggestion performance. As a result, the significance of the first suggestive effect, which previously lacked interest, has been increased, and the appearance of the specified identification information can be expected in any presentation pattern, with the effect of increasing the interest of the game through a variety of presentations.

In the gaming machine F0,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
a temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, a temporary "missed display" in FIG. 33( e ));
and a re-dynamic means (e.g., a variable element of "re-variation") for executing a re-dynamic display to change the temporary identification information to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means,
The first suggestion execution means is
A gaming machine F1 characterized in that when the change means changes from the first state to the second state and when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the first suggestion performance is executed before changing the display of the second display means to the second state.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F0, the following effect is achieved. That is, the temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the temporary display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the re-dynamic means also provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a re-dynamic display in which the temporary identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means. Then, when the first mode is changed to the second mode by the change means and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the first suggestion execution means executes the first suggestion performance before the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. That is, the first suggestion performance is executed before the second mode of the second display means is displayed, and then the temporary identification information appears and the second display means changes to the display of the second mode, and then the re-dynamic display is executed in which the temporary identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information. As a result, even in the case of a first suggestion performance in which the appearance of a predetermined identification information was not previously expected, it is now possible to expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the appearance of the second mode thereafter. Furthermore, when a second suggestion performance that is not the first suggestion performance appears, it is possible to expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information based on the expected appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestion performance, which has a higher expected appearance of the predetermined identification information than the first suggestion performance. As a result, the significance of the existence of the first suggestion performance, which was previously uninteresting, is increased, and the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected in any performance pattern, resulting in an effect of increasing the interest of the game through a variety of performances.

In the gaming machine F1,
A display switching means for controlling switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach") is provided,
The changing means is
A change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) that determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode that indicates a determination result by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process) for changing the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the second mode should be changed to the second mode,
The start time selection means
A re-display time selection means (e.g., S1506 of the execution symbol change process) is provided for selecting a first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means,
The first suggestion execution means is
a pre-display first suggestion execution means (e.g., a display reach pattern change command) for executing the first suggestion performance by the suggestion performance execution means before displaying the second mode when the second mode is displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display selection means;
A gaming machine F2 characterized by comprising:

The gaming machine F2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1. That is, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines that the display mode of the second display means is changed to the second mode, the change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. Also, when the re-display time selection means displays the second mode on the second display means by the pre-display first suggestion execution means provided in the first suggestion execution means, the suggestion performance execution means executes the first suggestion performance before the second mode is displayed.

Conventionally, when the suggestive performance execution means suggests the appearance of a predetermined identification information, the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information is configured to differ based on the type of the suggestive performance. Thus, for example, when the suggestive performance execution means suggests the appearance of a predetermined identification information, the second suggestive performance different from the first suggestive performance is set to have a higher expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information than the first suggestive performance. In other words, the player expects the appearance of the predetermined identification information when the second suggestive performance is executed, but cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information when the first suggestive performance is executed, and is often set to expect an identification information other than the predetermined identification information (i.e., a miss). Therefore, for example, when the first suggestive performance is executed, the player cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information from the first suggestive performance compared to the second suggestive performance, so the player judges that the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected for the dynamic display in which the first suggestive performance appears, and is unable to find interest in the dynamic display in which the first suggestive performance is executed, and is instead turned off.

In the dynamic display in which the second display means is made invisible and then the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing of redisplay by the redisplay time selection means, the first suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance execution means before the second mode is displayed. Then, as the provisional identification information appears, the second display means changes to the display of the second mode at the first display timing, and after that, the provisional identification information is displayed, and then a re-dynamic display is executed in which the provisional identification information is changed to the specified identification information. As a result, even in the first suggestive performance in which the appearance of the specified identification information could not be expected in the past, it is possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information by the appearance of the second mode thereafter. Also, when a second suggestive performance that is not the first suggestive performance appears, it is possible to expect the appearance of the specified identification information based on the expected appearance of the specified identification information by the second suggestive performance in which the expected appearance of the specified identification information is higher than that of the first suggestive performance. As a result, the significance of the first suggestive effect, which previously lacked interest, has been increased, and the appearance of the specified identification information can be expected in any presentation pattern, with the effect of increasing the interest of the game through a variety of presentations.

In the gaming machine F2,
the second display means is capable of displaying a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means;
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach");
A special effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect including an effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means invisible by the display switching means (for example, a variable element of a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" of a "super reach");
and a re-display means for re-displaying the second display means by switching control of the display means after the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance by the special performance execution means is ended (for example, the cockpit display area Db is re-displayed after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is ended),
The change execution means includes:
When the second display means is redisplayed by the post-termination redisplay means, the display on the second display means is changed to the second mode.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the following effect is achieved. That is, a pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Also, the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means causes the second display means to be continuously displayed in the dynamic display. Then, the suggestive performance execution means executes the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance including a performance in which the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is made to be in a non-display state by the display switching means, and the end re-display means also provided in the suggestive performance execution means re-displays the second display means by switching control of the display switching means after the end of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance by the special performance execution means. Then, the change execution means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode when the second display means is re-displayed by the end re-display means.

Conventionally, at the start of a dynamic display, the second display means displays a pattern representing the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and the continuous display means continuously displays the second display means. Then, when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means, and after the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is terminated, the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means, and the second display means is returned to the state displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display, thereby preparing for the execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by redisplaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player, and the next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while the player is made aware of the number of the next dynamic display. Therefore, the redisplay of the second display means when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is terminated is a natural expression in the flow of the dynamic display execution process, so the player does not feel strange.

And, like the gaming machine F3, the second display means, which is continuously displayed by the continuous display means, is made invisible by the display switching means based on the execution of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance, and the second mode is displayed on the second display means at the timing when the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means at the end of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the second display means can be changed from the first mode to the second mode while being redisplayed in the smooth flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. Therefore, the second display means can be casually changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once by the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance, and then casually changing it, first, a sense of incongruity is given to the player, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, and the effect is that the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game while providing the player with a surprising performance.

In the gaming machine F3,
The first suggestion execution means is
A suggestion effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect in the dynamic display (for example, a change change process (S1471));
and a performance change means for changing the second suggestive performance to the first suggestive performance when the suggestive performance determination means determines that the second suggestive performance is to be executed (for example, a process for changing a "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern" (S1807)).
The re-display selection means is
A gaming machine F4, characterized in that when the second display means is displayed after the first suggestive performance changed by the performance change means ends, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the suggestive performance discrimination means provided in the first suggestive execution means discriminates whether or not the second suggestive performance is executed in the dynamic display. Also, the performance change means also provided in the first suggestive execution means changes the second suggestive performance to the first suggestive performance when the suggestive performance discrimination means discriminates that the second suggestive performance is executed. Then, the re-display selection means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode after the first suggestive performance changed by the performance change means ends. This increases the chances that the specified identification information appears after the first suggestive performance is executed by the simple control of replacing the second suggestive performance with the first suggestive performance, and increases the expectation of the specified identification information appearing by the first suggestive performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance can be diversified by simple control to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F4,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance are configured to have the same execution time.

Gaming machine F5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F4. That is, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are configured with the same execution time. This allows the first suggestion effect to be changed to the second suggestion effect without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by changing the second suggestion effect to the first suggestion effect while maintaining the consistency of the execution time of the dynamic display, it is possible to increase the expectation of the appearance of specified identification information by the first suggestion effect without having to perform processing such as reselecting the dynamic elements of the dynamic display. This has the effect of diversifying the effects and increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5,
The start time selection means
a timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second aspect at a timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
an execution establishment determining means for determining contents of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means includes:
A gaming machine F6 characterized by having a timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means.

Gaming machine F6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires information triggered by the establishment of the start condition. Then, the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines the content of the dynamic display based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the timing correction means provided in the change execution means corrects the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means is corrected based on the content of the dynamic display. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed in processes that are performed at different times, the contents of the performance can be adjusted to be consistent so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the performance. Therefore, by performing each determination in a separate process, it is possible to easily design the control program used for each determination during development, while also enabling the execution of a consistent performance.

<Group G: The contents of the thing being hidden are transmitted to the thing being hidden>

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a start winning slot and a start winning is detected while a variable performance (variable display) of a pattern or the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the variable performance related to that start winning is put on hold up to a predetermined number. When the variable performance currently being performed ends, the execution of the pending variable performance that has not yet been performed is started.

As part of the excitement of the game, this variable presentation is configured to execute suggestive displays (for example, "hold change notice" or mini appearance notice) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. When executing these suggestive displays, the display mode of the display object that is always visible to the player is changed from a first mode to a second mode, or a new display object is additionally made to appear, and the display mode of the display object is configured to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot.

However, in conventional gaming machines, when a suggestive display is executed, the display mode of the visible displayed object is always changed or a new displayed object is additionally displayed, making it easy for the player to notice the change in the displayed object and not creating an element of surprise in the presentation. Therefore, there is a need to improve the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute unexpected effects and effectively increase the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
A performance means (e.g., a movable prop, a cut-in image, etc.) controlled in conjunction with the performance content of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means;
A presentation mode changing means for changing a display mode of the presentation means,
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db) configured to be able to display the judgment result by the judgment means;
A change means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
a start time selection means (e.g., a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the change means changes to the second mode;
The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a display propagation means (for example, reflecting the display color of the left movable role 87 to the display color of the executed pattern) that propagates the display mode of the performance means to the second display means to display the second mode when the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means.

According to the gaming machine G0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. The presentation means is controlled so as to be linked to the presentation content of the dynamic display of the identification information. In addition, the display mode of the presentation means is changed by the presentation mode change means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to a second mode that shows the judgment result by the judgment means. When the change means changes to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Then, when the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the display mode of the presentation means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. In this way, when the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the display mode of the presentation means is propagated and changed, so that a gameplay is created in terms of how the presentation means changes and whether the display mode of the presentation means is propagated to the second display means. Therefore, when the second display means is changed, the display mode of the presentation means is propagated to the second display means to change it, which has the effect of first providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game. In addition, "propagating the display mode of the production means to the second display means" includes directly propagating the display mode of the production means to the second display means, displaying the second display means with content related to the display mode of the production means, or transferring (shifting) the display mode of the production means to the second display means and displaying it.

In the gaming machine G0,
A display switching means for controlling switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means by the performance means (for example, changing a variable element of a “normal reach” to a variable element of a “super reach”),
The changing means is
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a change execution means (e.g., an execution symbol change process (S1414)) for changing the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means when the change determination means determines that the second mode should be changed to the second mode,
The start time selection means includes:
A re-display time selection means (e.g., S1506 of the execution symbol change process) is provided for selecting a first display timing for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means,
The display propagation means includes:
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that when the re-display selection means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing, the second display means is made difficult to see by the performance means, and when the second display means is made visible again by switching control of the display switching means, the gaming machine G1 is further characterized in that it is equipped with a re-display propagation means (for example, reflecting the display color of the left-side movable role 87 in the display color of the executed pattern) which propagates the display mode of the performance means to the second display means to display the second mode.

Gaming machine G1 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine G0. That is, the display switching means controls the performance means to switch between the display state and non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. If the change determination means determines to change to the second mode, the change execution means changes the display mode of the second display means at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Here, the re-display selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the first display timing at which the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the display switching means is re-displayed as the execution timing at which the second mode is displayed on the second display means. Then, when the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the first display timing by the redisplay time selection means, the redisplay time propagation means provided in the propagation display means makes the second display means difficult to see by the performance means, and when the second display means is made visible again by the switching control of the display switching means, the display mode of the performance means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means, and makes it possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode, compared to when the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or when a new second display means is added and made to appear. In addition, the change of the second display means from the first mode to the second mode is also changed by the propagation of the display mode of the performance means, so that the gameplay is created by how the performance means changes and whether the display mode of the performance means is propagated to the second display means. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means invisible using the presentation means, and then casually propagating and changing the display mode of the presentation means to the second display means, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to recognize that the uneasy feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the presentation means is a movable device capable of covering the front side of the second display means.

Gaming machine G2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine G1. That is, the presentation means is constituted by a movable part that can cover the front side of the second display means. This makes it possible to make the second display means invisible by using a drive mode of the movable part that is different from the display means that displays the dynamic display. This has the effect of enabling a composite presentation of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display and the drive of the movable part to be implemented with well-matched content, providing the player with a presentation that is unexpected and diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G2,
A role drive means (for example, a role drive process (S1151)) for driving the movable role,
The accessory driving means is
The initial position of the movable part;
In the dynamic display, a first position (e.g., a "strong pattern") in which the movable character makes the second display means difficult to see;
The movable part can be driven from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again;
The re-visiting time propagation means is
When the movable role is in the first position, the display mode of the movable role is transmitted to the second display means to start displaying the second mode;
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, when the movable device is returned to its initial position, the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means.

Gaming machine G3 achieves the following effects in addition to those achieved by gaming machine G2. That is, the movable role is driven by the role drive means, and the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable role from the initial position to the first position by the role drive means, and the display mode of the movable role is propagated to the second display means when the movable role is in the first position by the re-visibility propagation means, thereby starting the display of the second mode, and when the movable role has returned to the initial position, the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means.

Conventionally, when a movable part is driven during execution of a dynamic display, it is configured to be driven from the initial position to the drive position, and then driven back to the initial position to complete one drive mode. In other words, when a movable part is driven, it is configured to always return to the initial position so as not to interfere with the content of other effects in the dynamic display. Therefore, when a movable part is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression of the flow of the drive mode of the movable part, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

And, like the gaming machine G3, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable role from the initial position to the first position, and the display mode of the movable role is propagated to the second display means while the movable role is in the first position, and the second mode is displayed continuously by the second display means, so that the player can see the second mode. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the second display means can be changed while being made visible in the smooth flow of the driving mode of the movable role. Therefore, the second display means can be casually changed to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display means. As a result, by making the second display means invisible once and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode by the second display means, and the effect is that the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game while providing the player with a surprising performance. In addition, the gameplay is created by whether or not the display state of the movable role is transmitted to the second display means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G3,
The start time selection means
An execution determination means for determining whether or not the second aspect can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means (for example, a process for determining re-change information (S1506) or a process for determining reserved deletion information (S1507));
The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a drive change means (for example, a process for setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) that drives the movable reel by the reel drive means to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the execution determination means provided in the start time selection means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, and when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the drive change means drives the movable role by the role drive means to a position that makes the second display means difficult to see. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing initially selected, the movable role can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected can be increased, and the presentation can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when making the second display means difficult to see for the player, it is possible to make the second display means difficult to see by changing the drive mode of the movable role object that is different from the dynamic display performance, rather than changing the performance content of the dynamic display. Therefore, since it is possible to make the second display means difficult to see and then change to the second mode without sending additional commands or the like for controlling the dynamic display and replacing the performance content, it has the effect of providing the player with a surprising performance and diversifying the performance to increase the interest of the game, without increasing the control burden of the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine G4,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, a position determination means for determining whether the movable role object is in the first position (for example, a process for determining whether to drive in a "strong pattern" (S1561)) is provided;
The drive change means is
When the position determination means determines that the movable role object is not in the first position, a drive position change means (for example, a process for setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) is provided for driving the movable role object to the first position in the dynamic display.
The re-visiting time propagation means is
A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the drive position of the movable role is changed to the first position by the drive position change means, and while the movable role is in the first position by the role drive means, the display mode of the movable role is propagated to the second display means to start displaying the second mode.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the position determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the movable role is in the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means drives the movable role to the first position in the dynamic display when the position determination means determines that the movable role is not in the first position. Then, the re-viewing time propagation means propagates the display mode of the movable role to the second display means while the movable role is in the first position, and starts displaying the second mode. This makes it possible to display the second mode at the first display timing initially selected. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are increased, and the presentation is diversified to increase the interest in the game. In addition, there is an effect that the playability of whether or not the display mode of the movable role is propagated to the second display means is created, and the interest in the game is increased.

In the gaming machine G5,
The drive position changing means is
In the dynamic display, a dynamic element discrimination means for discriminating the presence or absence of a dynamic element (e.g., a variable element of a "Super Reach") capable of driving the movable part (e.g., a process for confirming the presence or absence of a variable element of "Super Reach" or more (S1563)),
A gaming machine G6 characterized in that when the dynamic element discrimination means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable device, the movable device is driven to the first position while the dynamic element is being executed.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving a movable part in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means provided in the drive position change means. Then, when it is determined by the dynamic element determination means that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable part, the movable part is driven to the first position during the execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable part, the drive mode of the second display means is changed to one that makes it difficult to see, and the second display means can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining the consistency between the performance content of the dynamic display and the drive mode of the movable part, it is possible to display the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected. Therefore, there is an effect that, without performing a process such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected can be increased, and the performance can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G6,
The accessory driving means is
A predetermined time is required to drive the movable part from the initial position to the first position and then back to the initial position;
The dynamic element determination means
A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in the dynamic display, the presence or absence of the dynamic element for a predetermined period of time or more is determined.

Gaming machine G7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G6. That is, the movable role is driven from the initial position to the first position by the role drive means, and it takes a predetermined time to drive it back to the initial position. Then, the dynamic element discrimination means discriminates whether or not there is a dynamic element in the dynamic display that lasts for a predetermined time or more. As a result, in the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the movable role can be driven by a dynamic element that can complete the drive of the movable role that requires a predetermined time, so that the drive of the movable role can be completed by the dynamic element, and a combined performance of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the drive of the movable role can be implemented with consistent content. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand and increase the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7,
The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the presentation means is a specific image that is displayed overlapping with the second display means.

Gaming machine G8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G7. That is, the presentation means is constituted by a specific image displayed overlapping with the second display means. This allows the second display means to be made invisible by displaying an additional image on the display means that displays the dynamic display. Therefore, without adjusting and changing the dynamic elements of the dynamic display or controlling other movable parts, etc., it is possible to perform the second mode after making the second display means invisible by making a slight change to the presentation of the dynamic display by adding and displaying a specific image, thereby providing the player with an unexpected presentation and diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G8,
The start time selection means
A gaming machine G9 characterized by comprising an image change means for causing the image display means to display the specific image (for example, a pattern of displaying by adding a large character cut-in image Dc2) when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means.

Gaming machine G9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine G8. That is, when the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means, the image change means causes the image display means to display a specific image. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the initially selected first display timing, a specific image is displayed, and the display mode of the specific image is propagated to the second display means at the first display timing to display the second mode. This has the effect of increasing the opportunities to execute the second mode of the second display means at the initially set first display timing, diversifying the presentation, and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G8 or G9,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements,
The image display means includes:
A gaming machine G10 characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

Gaming machine G10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines G8 or G9. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements. The image display means then displays the specific image in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements. This allows any of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display to complete the presentation of the specific image, and allows a composite presentation of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display and the specific image to be implemented with consistent content. This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by setting the display time of the specific image to be shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, there is no need for processing to determine whether or not the dynamic element can display the specific image, compared to, for example, the case where the second display means is covered by driving a movable part that requires a certain drive time. Therefore, when executing the second mode after making the second display means difficult to see with the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control to determine the display timing of the specific image, which has the effect of reducing the control burden while providing the player with a surprising presentation and diversifying the presentation to increase the interest of the game.

<Group H: Chance Down & Chance Up displayed simultaneously>
An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
an increase effect execution means for executing an expectation increase effect (for example, the occurrence of a variable element of a "super reach") indicating that the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information has increased in the dynamic display;
A descending effect execution means for executing an expectation descending effect (for example, a miss of a variable element of "Super Reach") indicating that the expectation of the appearance of the predetermined identification information has decreased in the dynamic display;
A main execution means capable of executing the expectation level increasing effect and the expectation level decreasing effect on a main display part (for example, a main display area Dm) of the display means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information, which is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means, includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A second display means capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
A display switching means for switching between a display state and a non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing a variable element of a "normal reach" to a variable element of a "super reach");
a change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode (e.g., a "hold change notice") indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
and a start time selection means (e.g., an execution symbol change process) for selecting a start time of the second mode by the second display means when the change determination means determines that the second mode should be changed.
The display switching means is
a non-display means (e.g., a variable element of a "Super Reach") for making the second display means non-displayed when the expectation level increase effect is executed by the increase effect execution means in the main display section of the display means by the main execution means;
and a re-display means for re-displaying the second display means that has been made non-displayable by the non-display means when the expectation level decreasing effect is executed by the decreasing effect execution means in the main display section of the display means by the main execution means (for example, the end of a variable element of a "Super Reach");
The start time selection means is
The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a re-display time selection means (for example, a post-clearance change command for displaying that executes a ``hold change notice'' after ``hold clearing'') that selects a first display timing at which the second display means is re-displayed by the re-display means in a sub-display unit (for example, a cockpit display area Db), which is a display unit other than the main display unit and has a smaller display area than the main display unit, when the expectation level decreasing presentation is being executed on the main display unit, as an execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means.

According to the gaming machine H0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display execution means executes a dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The increase effect execution means executes an expectation increase effect indicating that the expectation of the predetermined identification information appearing in the dynamic display has increased. Also, the decrease effect execution means executes an expectation decrease effect indicating that the expectation of the predetermined identification information appearing in the dynamic display has decreased. Then, the main execution means enables the display means to execute the expectation increase effect and the expectation decrease effect on the main display unit, respectively. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that appears the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be displayable by the second display means. Also, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means determines whether or not the display mode of the second display means is changed from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines that the display mode is to be changed to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Then, the non-display means provided in the display switching means makes the second display means non-displayed when the main execution means executes an expectation level increase effect by the rise effect execution means in the main display section of the display means. Similarly, the re-display means provided in the display switching means re-displays the second display means made non-displayed by the non-display means when the main execution means executes an expectation level decrease effect by the fall effect execution means in the main display section of the display means. Then, when the expectation level lowering effect is being executed in the main display section, the display of the second display section is changed to the second mode by the redisplay time selection means provided in the start time selection means, at the first display timing when the redisplay means redisplays the second display section in the sub-display section, which is a display section other than the main display section and has a smaller display area than the main display section, as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display section. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the second display section, and makes it possible to unobtrusively change the second display section to the second mode, compared to when the always visible second display section is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode to notify the player, or when the second display section is newly added and made to appear. Also, by displaying the second mode by the second display section of the display means by the sub-display section of the display means during the execution of the expectation level lowering effect after the expectation level raising effect is executed on the main display section of the display means, the second display section can be unobtrusively changed while the player is paying attention to the effect on the main display section. Therefore, by subtly changing the second display means, the player is first made to feel strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the strange feeling is the manifestation of the second mode on the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

<Group I: Discomfort in the perception of vision, hearing, and touch>
An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A suggestion means (for example, an execution pattern or a reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db) configured to be able to suggest the judgment result by the judgment means;
A recognition difficulty means for making it difficult for a player to recognize the suggestion means by perception (for example, a variable element of "Super Reach");
A recognition restart means for making it possible to recognize again the suggestion means that has become difficult for the player to recognize by the player's perception due to the recognition difficult means (for example, a cockpit display area Db that is redisplayed after the variable element of "Super Reach");
a change execution means for changing the suggestion means from a predetermined first state to a second state based on the judgment result by the judgment means when the suggestion means becomes recognizable again by the recognition resumption means (for example, a display post-clearance change command for executing a "pending change notice" after "pending clearing");
A gaming machine I0 comprising:

According to the gaming machine I0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be suggestable by the suggestion means. The suggestion means is made difficult to recognize by the player's perception by the recognition difficulty means, and the suggestion means that has become difficult to recognize by the player's perception by the recognition difficulty means is configured to be recognizable by the recognition resumption means. Then, when the suggestion means becomes recognizable again by the recognition resumption means, the change execution means changes from the predetermined first state to the second state based on the judgment result of the judgment means in the suggestion. This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the suggestion by the suggesting means, compared to when the suggesting means, which is always perceptible by the player's perception, is directly changed from the first state to the second state, and the suggesting means can be subtly changed to the second state to suggest the judgment result of the judgment means. Therefore, by making the suggesting means difficult to recognize once, and then suggesting the judgment result of the judgment means when it becomes perceptible again, firstly, the player is made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of that uneasiness is the suggestion by the suggesting means, thereby providing the player with an unexpected presentation, diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0,
the suggestion means is a display object on the display means,
The recognition difficulty means has a visual difficulty means (e.g., a variable element of "Super Reach") that makes the display of the display object difficult to visually recognize,
The recognition restart means has a re-display means for making the display object that has been made difficult to see by the difficult to see means visible again (for example, the end of a variable element of "Super Reach");
The change execution means is characterized in that when the re-display means makes the display object visible again, it is provided with a re-display time change means (for example, a display post-erasure change command that executes a ``pending change notice'' after ``pending erasure'') that changes the display mode of the display object from the display mode of the display object before it was made difficult to see by the visibility means based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suggestion means is a display object in the display means, and the display of the display object is made difficult to see by the difficult to see means provided in the difficult to recognize means. Also, the re-display means provided in the recognition resumption means makes the display object made difficult to see by the difficult to see means visible again. Then, when the display object is made visible again by the re-display means, the re-display time change means provided in the change execution means changes the display mode of the display object from the display mode of the display object before it was made difficult to see by the difficult to see means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, compared to when a display object that is always visible to the player's vision is directly changed from the first state to the second state and notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the display object, while casually suggesting the judgment result of the judgment means by the change in the display object. By temporarily making the display object, which is the suggestion means, difficult to see, and then suggesting the result of the judgment by the judgment means when it becomes visible again, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then the player is made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is the suggestion by the suggestion means, which has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
a sound output means (e.g., a speaker) for outputting a sound audible to the player's hearing;
the difficulty in perception means has difficulty in hearing means for making the output of the sound by the sound output means difficult to hear (for example, stopping the output of sound from a speaker);
The recognition restart means has a re-output means (e.g., re-outputting the sound from a speaker) that outputs the sound that has been made difficult to hear by the difficult-to-hear means so that it can be heard again,
The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the notification execution means is equipped with a re-output time change means (e.g., changing the volume of the sound) that, when the sound is output by the re-output means so that it can be heard again, changes the output mode of the sound from the state before it was made difficult to hear by the difficult-to-hear means based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sound output means outputs a sound that is audible to the player's hearing. The hard-to-hear means provided in the difficult-to-recognize means makes the sound output by the sound output means hard to hear. The re-output means provided in the recognition resumption means makes the sound output that was made hard to hear by the hard-to-hear means audible again. Then, when the re-output means makes the sound output audible again, the re-output time change means provided in the notification execution means changes the output mode of the sound from the output mode of the sound before it was made hard to hear by the hard-to-hear means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. As a result, compared to when the suggestion means, which is always audible to the player's hearing, is directly changed from the first state to the second state to suggest, the suggestion by the suggestion means is made difficult for the player to clearly recognize, and the judgment result of the judgment means can be casually notified by the suggestion means. In addition, by making the suggestion means sound difficult to hear at one point, and then suggesting the result of the judgment means when it becomes audible again, the player is first made to feel uneasy, and then made to realize that the source of that uneasiness is the suggestion caused by the suggestion, which has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A storage means (e.g., a reserved ball storage area 203b or a reserved ball execution area 203c) for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number being the upper limit;
A determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on each of the pieces of information stored in the storage means includes a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information;
A suggestion means (e.g., a blower) configured to be able to suggest a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
A perception switching means (e.g., a voice lamp control device 113) that controls switching between a perception state (e.g., wind) and a non-perception state (e.g., no wind) of the suggestion means based on the player's skin sensation (e.g., touch, temperature, pain, wind, etc.);
A change determination means (e.g., a hold display setting process (S1209)) that determines whether or not to change the indication state of the indication means from a predetermined first state (e.g., weak wind) to a second state (e.g., strong wind) that indicates the judgment result by the judgment means;
A change execution means (e.g., an execution pattern change process (S1414)) that changes the suggestion state of the suggestion means to the second state at a first recognition timing when the change determination means determines that the first state is to be changed to the second state, and the suggestion means that has been set to the non-cognitive state by the recognition switching means is set to the cognitive state;
A gaming machine I3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I3, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, the judgment means judges whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows the predetermined identification information among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. Then, the judgment result by the judgment means is configured to be suggestable by the suggestion means. Also, the recognition switching means controls the switching between the recognition state and the non-recognition state of the suggestion means by the player's skin sensation. Then, the change judgment means judges whether or not to change the suggestion state of the suggestion means from a predetermined first state to a second state that indicates the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, when the change determination means determines that the state is to be changed from the first state to the second state, the change execution means changes the suggestion state of the suggestion means to the second state at the first recognition timing when the suggestion means, which has been set to the non-recognition state by the recognition switching means, is set to the recognition state. In this way, the suggestion means is changed from the first state to the second state by the player's skin sensation to suggest the judgment result of the judgment means, so that the judgment result of the judgment means can be suggested to the player by the skin sensation, which is less sensitive than sight or hearing. Thus, while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the suggestion means, the judgment result of the judgment means can be notified by a casual suggestion. Thus, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the suggestion means, first, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the incongruity is the suggestion by the suggestion means, which has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation while diversifying the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

<Group J: Change at the timing of redisplay of the continuous display item>
An acquisition means (e.g., a first ball inlet 64) for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., a main control device 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
A dynamic display execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that causes a display means (e.g., a third pattern display device 81) to dynamically display the identification information (e.g., a variable performance of the third pattern) based on the determination result by the determination means;
a game machine that awards a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
A continuous display object (e.g., an execution pattern and a reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db) indicating information related to the dynamic display;
A continuous display execution means (e.g., the MPU 231 of the display control device 114) for continuously displaying the continuous display object on the display means;
A judgment means (e.g., the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113) for judging whether or not the predetermined identification information appears based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
a deletion means for deleting the display of the continuous display object by the continuous display execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning the "Super Reach" presentation mode);
A redisplay means for redisplaying the continuous display object erased by the erasing means (for example, redisplaying the execution pattern and the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db after the variable element of the "Super Reach" is finished);
a display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the continuous display object from the display mode before the object was erased by the erasing means based on the judgment result of the judging means when the continuous display object is to be displayed again by the re-displaying means (for example, a display post-erasure change command for executing a "hold change notice" after "hold erasure");
A gaming machine J0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine J0, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a judgment is made by the judgment means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Information regarding the dynamic display is suggested by the continuous display object continuously displayed on the display means by the continuous display execution means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the judgment means judges whether the predetermined identification information appears. Also, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the erasing means erases the display of the continuous display object by the continuous display means, and the continuous display object erased by the erasing means is displayed again by the re-displaying means. When the continuous display object is to be displayed again by the re-displaying means, the display mode changing means changes the display mode of the continuous display object from the display mode before erasure by the erasing means based on the judgment result of the judgment means. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the continuous display object, as compared with the case where the display object that is always visible is directly changed and notified, or the case where a new display object is made to appear and notified, and the judgment result of the judgment means can be casually displayed by the display mode of the continuous display object. Therefore, when the continuous display object is made invisible once and then displayed again, the display mode of the continuous display object is casually changed from before it was erased, so that the player first feels strange, and then the player is made to recognize that the strange feeling is a change in the continuous display object, and the effect is that the presentation is diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced while providing the player with a surprising presentation. Also, when the erased continuous display object is redisplayed, the player believes that the continuous display object will be redisplayed with the same display content as before it was erased, since it is a continuous display object that is displayed continuously. During this, the redisplayed continuous display object has changed, making it difficult for the player to recognize the difference from his initial assumption. This allows the display content of the continuous display object to change without the player noticing, providing the player with an unexpected presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

Note that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A10, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied. Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B13, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied. Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C9, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines D0 to D5. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines E0 to E7. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines F0 to F6. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G10. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, I0 to I3, and J0 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine H0. Also, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, and J0 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I3. In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine J0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, and I0 to I3. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definite identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area in response to the operation of the control handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

In any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, and J0, the gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."

The "ball entering" the "first ball entrance 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, the "counter values C1-C3, CS1" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, the "third pattern" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" in the claims, the "variable presentation" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" in the claims, the "jackpot pattern" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined identification information" in the claims, and the "jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" in the claims.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
81 Third pattern display device (dynamic display execution means, part of the second display means)
113 Voice and lamp control device (dynamic display execution means, part of second display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of second display means)
203b reserved ball storage area (part of memory means)
203c reserved ball execution area (part of storage means)
221 MPU (judgment means)
223e On-hold information storage area (part of storage means)
223f Execution information storage area (part of storage means)
Db Cockpit display area (part of the second display means)
Db0 Execution symbol display area (part of the second display means)
S204 (Acquisition means)
S307 Fluctuation start process (determination means)
S1209 Hold display setting process (determination means)

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
a dynamic display execution means for causing a display means to dynamically display the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means,
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements,
a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, the storage means storing a predetermined number of pieces of information;
a determination means for determining whether or not a dynamic display that reveals the predetermined identification information is included in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on each piece of information stored in the storage means;
A second display means capable of displaying information related to a result of the determination by the determination means;
a change means for changing a state of a display element of the second display means from a predetermined first state to a second state indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
a start time selection means for selecting a start time for changing the state of the display element of the second display means to the second state by the changing means;
a situation determination means for determining, during execution of the dynamic element, that a situation exists in which a state of the display element of the second display means should be changed to the second state;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an element execution means for executing a dynamic element of the dynamic display that can display the second aspect at a start time selected by the start time selection means when the aspect of the display element of the second display means during execution of the dynamic element is not displayed in the second aspect.

Images